The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About07538 GCFB Spec 080401Set No.________ Project Manual Granite City Food & Brewery Carmel, IN Project # 07538 March 28, 2007 SJA Architects Architects Planning Interior Design Title Page 04/01/08 00001 - 1 DOCUMENT 00001 TITLE PAGE Granite City Food & Brewery Carmel, Indiana SJA Architects No. 07538 OWNER: Dunham Capital Management 230 S. Phillips Ave. Sioux Falls, SD 57104 Telephone: (605) 330-9415 Fax: (605) 373-9475 Web Site: www.dunhamcompany.com OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE: Behm Construction Development 7704 West Justice Street Sioux Falls, SD 57106 Telephone: (605) 336-6252 Fax: (952) 513-2143 Contact: Wade Behm KITCHEN EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER: Premier Restaurant Equipment 7120 Northland Terrace Minneapolis, MN 55428 Telephone: (763) 544-8800 Fax: (763) 544-7949 Web Site: www.premereq.com Contact: Wilson Fan/Louise Mason CIVIL ENGINEER: Woolpert Inc. 7140 Waldemar Drive Indianapolis, IN 46268 Telephone: (317) 299-7500 Fax: (317) 291-5805 Web Site: www.woolpert.com Contact: Dan Kuester TENANT: Granite City Food & Brewery 5402 Parkdale Drive, Suite 101 St. Louis Park, MN 55416 Web Site: www.gcfb.net ARCHITECT: SJA Architects 2035 15th Street North St. Cloud, MN 56303 Telephone: (320) 253-2100 Fax: (320) 253-2269 Web Site: www.staniusjohnson.com Contact: Steven Kalkman STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Larson Engineering of Minnesota 3524 LaBore Road White Bear Lake, MN 55110 Telephone: (651) 481-9120 Fax: (651) 481-9201 Web Site: www.larsonengr.com Contact: Kesh Ramdular MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Larson Engineering of Illinois Certification 04/01/08 00005 - 1 DOCUMENT 00005 CERTIFICATION I hereby certify that this Plan, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Professional Architect under the laws of the State of Indiana. Steve Kalkman, Architect Date: March 28, 2008 Registration No.: AR10700088 I hereby certify that this Plan, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Indiana. See Drawings and Division 15 for seal and Signature John Pastore,, Mechanical Engineer Date: March 28, 2008 Registration No.: PE60880166 I hereby certify that this Plan, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Indiana. See Drawings and Division 16 for seal and Signature John Pastore, Electrical Engineer Date: March 28, 2008 Registration No.: PE60880166 I hereby certify that this Plan, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Indiana. See Structural Drawings for seal and Signature Kesh Ramdular, Structural Engineer Date March 28, 2008 Registration No.: 10000156 I hereby certify that this Plan, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Indiana. See Civil Drawings for seal and Signature Dan Kuester, Civil Engineer Date: March 28, 2008 Registration No.: 19011 END OF CERTIFICATION SHEET ELECTRONICALLY FILE YOUR PROJECT WITH STATE OF INDIANA at http://www.in.gov/dhs/fire/branches/plan_review/index.html. This on-line filing is through a secure site, you can use it to submit your project information, pay the fees and upload your project plans. Would you like to reduce your turnaround time? As of June 16th, 2008, the 2008 Indiana Building, Fire, Mechanical and Fuel Gas codes will be in effect. 675 IAC 12-4-7 (a) states in part: “Construction projects shall be done in compliance with the applicable rules of the commission in effect on the date the plans were filed with the division”. Therefore, all plans received in the Plan Office on or after June 16th will be reviewed in accordance with the provisions of the 2008 codes. Page 1/2 CONSTRUCTION DESIGN RELEASE State Form 41191 (R9/5-98) Report Printed on: April 1, 2008 Project number Release date 332417 04/01/08 Construction type Occupancy classification Scope of release V-B, SPK A-2 Type of release Project name Street address City County ARCH ELEC FA FDN MECH PLUM STR Standard Granite City Food and Brewery 150 W 96th St Carmel HAMILTON To: Owner / Architect / Engineer SJA Architects Steven Kalkman AR10700088 2035 15th St N St. Cloud MN 56303 Note :(A1A & A1B): In accordance with the affidavit sworn under penalties of perjury in the application for construction design release the plans and specifications filed in conjunction with this project shall comply with all of the applicable rules and laws of Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission. Providing false information constitutes an act of perjury, which is a Class D felony punishable by a prison term and a fine up to $10,000. The plans, specifications and application submitted for the above referenced project have been reviewed for compliance with the applicable rules of the Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission. The project is released for construction subject to, but not necessarily limited to, the conditions listed below. THIS IS NOT A BUILDING PERMIT. All required local permits and licenses must be obtained prior to beginning construction work. All construction work must be in full compliance with all applicable State rules. Any changes in the released plans and/or specifications must be filed with and released by this Office before any work is altered. This release may be suspended or revoked if it is determined to be issued in error, in violation of any rules of the Commission or if it is based on incorrect or insufficient information. This release shall expire by limitation, and become null and void, if the work authorized is not commenced within one (1) year from the above date. CONDITIONS: 4G0603AE 3B1003Q 3B1003J 4G0618AP Detailed plans and specifications of the fire suppression system shall be filed with the required application and appropriate fees in accordance with 675 IAC 12-6-3(a) and 675 IAC 13-1-8. (N.F.P.A. 13) Every stairway serving any building or portion thereof shall conform to the requirements of Section 1003.3.3, IBC (675 IAC 13-2.4) Each door in a means of egress from an occupancy of Group A or E having an occupant load of 100 or more shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hardware, in accordance with Section 1003.3.1.9, IBC (675 IAC 13-2.4). Plans and specifications of the mechanical exhaust hood system have not been provided. Therefore, that system is not part of this release. An addendum application, plans, and fee shall be submitted in accordance with 675 IAC 12-6- l8(a). Please be advised that if an administrative review of this action is desired, a written petition for review must be filed at the above address with the Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission identifying the matter for which a review is sought no later than eighteen (18) days from the above - stated date, unless the eighteenth day falls on a Saturday, a Sunday, a legal holiday under State statute, or a day in which the Department of Fire and Building Services is closed during normal business hours. In the latter case, the filing deadline will be the first working day thereafter. If you ELECTRONICALLY FILE YOUR PROJECT WITH STATE OF INDIANA at http://www.in.gov/dhs/fire/branches/plan_review/index.html. This on-line filing is through a secure site, you can use it to submit your project information, pay the fees and upload your project plans. Would you like to reduce your turnaround time? As of June 16th, 2008, the 2008 Indiana Building, Fire, Mechanical and Fuel Gas codes will be in effect. 675 IAC 12-4-7 (a) states in part: “Construction projects shall be done in compliance with the applicable rules of the commission in effect on the date the plans were filed with the division”. Therefore, all plans received in the Plan Office on or after June 16th will be reviewed in accordance with the provisions of the 2008 codes. Page 2/2 Filed By Code review official Address (name,title of local official,street,city,state and ZIP code DENISE FITZPATRICK JIM BLANCHARD ONE CIVIC SQUARE CARMEL, IN 46032 DEPT OF COMMUNITY SERVICE Fax & e-mail: 3175712499, jblanchard@carmel.in.gov State Fire Marshal Code Enforcement & Plan Review Branch Director Table of Contents 3/08 00011 - 1 DOCUMENT 00011 TABLE OF CONTENTS Number Document 00001 Title Page 00005 Certification 00011 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00205 Instructions to Bidders • AIA Document A701 00210 Supplemental Instructions to Bidders 00320 Geotechnical Data 00412 Bid Form CONTRACT FORMS 00525 Agreement Forms • AIA Document A101 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00701 General Conditions • AIA Document A201 00805 Supplementary Conditions Table of Contents 00011 - 2 3/08 SPECIFICATIONS Section Title DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 General Requirements 01300 Submittal Procedures 01305 Project Management Internet Communication Requirement DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02200 Site Preparation 02300 Earthwork 02810 Irrigation Systems 02840 Site Accessories 02900 Landscaping DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04700 Simulated Masonry 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06179 Wood Trusses 06400 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06620 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07246 Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 07540 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07920 Joint Sealants Table of Contents 3/08 00011 - 3 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08115 Steel Doors and Frames (Institutional) 08210 Wood Doors 08410 Aluminum Framed Storefront 08710 Finish Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09100 Metal Support Assemblies 09250 Gypsum Board 09300 Tile 09512 Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 09910 Paint DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments 10430 Exterior Illuminated Signage 10440 Interior Signage 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 10705 Exterior Sun Control Devices 10810 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11000 See Kitchen Equipment Specifications (Separate Book) DIVISION 12 - FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS NONE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NONE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NONE Table of Contents 00011 - 4 3/08 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL, HVAC, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS 15000 See Mechanical Specifications 1. Balancing to be contracted directly by Owner. Contractor shall ensure that its HVAC subcontractor is available on the specified days to work with the owner’s balancing contractor. 2. HVAC Commissioning will be contracted directly by Owner. Contractor shall ensure that its HVAC and Plumbing subcontractors are available on the specified days to work with the Commissioning contractor. DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL POWER, LIGHTING AND COMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS 16000 See Electrical Specifications 1. Building Light Fixture Package is to be provided by owner. Installing contractor, typically the electrician, will receive owner’s fixture package, inventory and notify Owner’s Representative via the Contractor within 48 hours of delivery of any missing items. Owner will consider fixtures to have been delivered and in the possession of the installing contractor if notice of missing items is not given. Multiple light fixture deliveries should be expected. See Section 01100 Summary of General Requirements for Storage requirements. Owner will provide a copy of the order, and delivery updates to the Contractor as they are available. APPENDIX A KITCHEN AND BREWERY EQUIPMENT CUTSHEETS Instructions to Bidders 9/07 00205 - 1 DOCUMENT 00205 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701, 1997 edition) is hereby made a part of this Project Manual, except as amended by Section 00210, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, and may be examined at the office of the Architect. B. The AIA Instructions to Bidders including Supplementary Instructions to Bidders (Section 00210) shall become a part of this Contract and shall apply to all Contractors and Subcontractors. 1. TABLE OF ARTICLES: a. For the convenience of the Contractors, the “Table of Articles” of the AIA Instructions to Bidders is listed below: Article 1 Definitions Article 2 Bidder’s Representations Article 3 Bidding Documents Article 4 Bidding Procedures Article 5 Consideration of Bids Article 6 Post-bid Information Article 7 Performance Bond and Payment Bond Article 8 Form(s) of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 9/07 00210 - 1 DOCUMENT 00210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 The following changes apply to Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701, 1997 edition). 1.02 ARTICLE 2 – BIDDERS REPRESENTATIONS A. Bidders are required to understand Article 2. B. Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 2.1: 1. “2.1.2 No adjustment in contract amount or other allowance shall be made subsequently on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence on his part in making the afore stated representations or fulfilling the requirements of them.” 1.03 ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Paragraph 3.1.1.1 Add: 1. Bidders may view Bidding Documents at offices and Plan Rooms indicated in Advertisement for Bids. B. Paragraph 3.1.1.2 Add: 1. Additional sets of Plans and Specifications may be secured. The cost of reproduction, shipping and handling for each additional set will be due. C. Paragraph 3.3.2.1: Add: 1. For a Product Substitution to be considered, see Paragraph 1.11 and Section No. 01100. D. Delete the first sentence in Subparagraph 3.3.2 and substitute: 1. “No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Owner Representative at least seven (5) days prior to the date of receipt of the Bid.” 1.04 ARTICLE 4 A. Subparagraph 4.1.1 Add: 1. Submit Proposal on Bid Form included with Contract Documents, in a sealed opaque envelope plainly marked with project name and name of bidder as indicated in Invitation for Bids. B. Subparagraph 4.1.2 Add: 1. If blank space is not required, state "Not Applicable (NA)". If the Alternate has the option of being an "Add" or "Deduct", and if the option is not indicated, it will be assumed to be a "Deduct". C. Subparagraph 4.1.7 Add 1. Signature shall be hand executed by a principal duly authorized to make contracts. State fully bidder's legal name, address, and telephone number. Do not interlineate, alter or erase any part of "Bid Form". D. Paragraph 4.3.4: Add: 1. Bids received via facsimile will be accepted, but must be followed by an original within 24 hours. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00210 - 2 9/07 E. Paragraph 4.4.1: Add: 1. No bid may be withdrawn within 30 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids without consent of Owner. 1.05 ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS A. Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 5.2: 1. “5.2.2 Collusion between Bidders is cause for rejection of all Bids of Bidders involved.” B. Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 5.3: 1. “5.3.3 General Contractor to provide a breakdown of the bid as outlined on bid form.” C. Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 5.3: 1. “5.3.4 General Contractor to provide a proposed construction schedule acknowledging that work can be completed in the specified time.” END OF SECTION Geotechnical Data 9/07 00320 - 1 DOCUMENT 00320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FOUNDATION BORING NOTES A. Data shown on boring logs is for the Bidders’ information. The Bidder should be cognizant that materials between borings can vary from that shown on logs. Final and complete identification of all materials between borings can be verified only by site excavation. The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for excavating all materials encountered during construction regardless of density or groundwater condition. B. The boring logs are an exact copy of the originals made by photo process reproduction. This information was obtained for design purposes and is made available to the Bidder so they may have the same information the designers used. This information is not intended as a substitute for the Bidder’s personal investigations, interpretations or judgement. The Bidder may make his own soils investigation, but he must first obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative, who may also need to obtain permission from others. Failure of the Bidder to conduct his own investigation or to analyze the available data shall not relieve the Bidder of any responsibility in excavating difficult materials. 1. Soil boring report and logs are typically received from a larger development project from the developer. Architect may have removed additional soil borings of adjacent sites to reduce the large documentation. If required, full soil borings can be attained from Owner’s representative. C. Water levels indicated on the boring logs is subject to seasonal and/or annual variations. END OF SECTION SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION & FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS GRANITE CITY BREWERY CARMEL, INDIANA ALT & WITZIG FILE: 08IN0099 PREPARED FOR: DUNHAM COMPANY SIOUX FALLS, SOUTH DAKOTA PREPARED BY: ALT & WITZIG ENGINEERING, INC. CARMEL, INDIANA March 10, 2008 March 10, 2008 Dunham Company 230 South Phillips Avenue, Suite 202 Sioux Falls, SD 57104 Attn: Mr. Wade Behm RE: Subsurface Investigation & Foundation Recommendations Granite City Food & Brewery Carmel, Indiana Alt & Witzig File: 08IN0099 Dear Mr. Behm: In compliance with your request, we have completed a foundation investigation and evaluation for the above referenced project. It is our pleasure to transmit herewith an electronic copy and two (2) physical copies of our report. The purpose of this investigation was to determine the soil profile and to determine the engineering characteristics of the materials encountered in order to provide information to be used in preparing the foundation design for the proposed building. Site Location: The site is located on the northwest corner of the intersection of 96th Street and Meridian Street in Carmel, Indiana. The site may be located using the Carmel, Indiana 7½ minute quadrangle map in Section 11, Township 17 North, Range 3 East. The general location of the site is shown on the Site Location Map in the Appendix of this report. Project Description: Design plans indicate that this project will consist of a building with an approximate size of 8,922 square feet to be located within an outlot of the Parkwood West development on the south side of Carmel, Indiana. The proposed building will be constructed using conventional steel and brick veneer construction. Field Services: The soil borings were performed with a truck-mounted drilling rig equipped with a rotary head. Conventional hollow-stem augers were used to advance the holes. Representative samples were obtained employing split-spoon sampling procedures in accordance with ASTM Procedure D- 1586. Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 4105 West 99th Street • Carmel, Indiana 46032 (317) 875-7000 • Fax (317) 876-3705 Offices: Cincinnati, Ohio • Dayton, Ohio Indianapolis • Evansville • Ft. Wayne • Lafayette • South Bend • Terre Haute, Indiana Subsurface Investigation and Foundation Engineering Construction Materials Testing and Inspection Environmental Services Dunham Company Granite City Food & Brewery Alt & Witzig File: 08IN0099 March 10, 2008 Page 2 During the sampling procedure, standard penetration tests were performed at regular intervals to obtain the standard penetration value of the soil. The standard penetration value is defined as the number of blows required by a 140-pound hammer, falling thirty (30) inches, to advance the split-spoon sampler one (1) foot into the soil. The results of the standard penetration tests indicate the relative density and comparative consistency of the soils, and thereby provide a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. The logs provided in the appendix indicate locations where standard penetration tests were preformed. Laboratory Testing The types of soils encountered in the borings were visually classified and described in detail on the boring logs. Additionally, moisture content and strength tests were performed on the cohesive soil samples. Representative samples of the soils encountered in the field were placed in sample jars and stored in our laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, all samples will be discarded after two (2) months. General Soil Conditions The soils encountered within borings B-1 and B-2 were generally characterized as medium stiff cohesive soils to a depth of fifteen (15) feet and seven (7) feet, respectively. Below that cohesive soil moist, fine sand was encountered that continued to the termination depth within boring B-1 and to a depth of fifteen (15) feet within boring B-2. For a more detailed description of the soils, refer to the Records of Subsurface Exploration in the Appendix. Engineering Recommendations Spread footings and continuous wall footings are generally most economical when the existing soil conditions allow them to be founded at a shallow depth. Due to the variability in soil type and strength encountered across the site, a moderate bearing capacity is recommended to alleviate the impact of differential settlement. Net allowable bearing pressures of 2,000 and 1,600 psf are recommended for dimensioning conventional spread and continuous wall footings, respectively, if founded on the medium stiff natural soils or compacted fills. In order to lessen the effects of seasonal variation in moisture content on the behavior of the footings and to eliminate the effects of frost action, all exterior foundations should be founded a minimum of three (3) feet below the finished grade elevation. Due to the potential for pockets of soft or loose soil material, it is recommended that all foundation excavations be inspected by a representative of the soils engineer to assure that adequate bearing soils exist in the base of these footings. At the time of footing inspections, Housel Penetration Tests or other approved tests can be performed on these foundation soils. Dunham Company Granite City Food & Brewery Alt & Witzig File: 08IN0099 March 10, 2008 Page 3 Wherever soft or loose soils are encountered, these footing areas must be undercut. After excavation to an adequate bearing material, the footing areas can then be re-established to the proposed footing elevation by placing approved granular fill or lean concrete mix. Using approved fill, it is recommended that a density of 98 percent maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D-698 (Standard Proctor) be achieved in all areas that will be stressed by the foundation loads. Construction Considerations Groundwater readings obtained during and upon completion of the borings have been provided on the logs included in the Appendix of this report. The groundwater was encountered at a depth of three (3) feet below the ground surface. However, the exact location of the water table should be anticipated to fluctuate depending upon normal seasonal variations in precipitation. Upon review of the soil and groundwater conditions it is anticipated that little groundwater related difficulties will be encountered during construction of the shallow foundations. It is anticipated that conventional sump pumps will be capable of controlling most water, including seepage from surface runoff and groundwater that may be encountered during construction. If excavations penetrate into fine sand layers more extensive dewatering may be necessary. It was a pleasure working with you on this project. Often, because of design and construction details, which occur on a project, questions arise concerning the soil conditions. If we can give further service in these matters, please contact us at your convenience. Sincerely, ALT & WITZIG ENGINEERING, INC. Jason R. Bennett, E.I.T. Thomas J. Coffey, P.E. APPENDIX RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMPACTED FILLS AND BACKFILLS All fill shall be formed from material free of vegetable matter, rubbish, large rock, and other deleterious material. Prior to placement of fill, a sample of the proposed fill material should be submitted to the soils engineer for his approval. The fill material should be granular and placed in layers not to exceed eight (8) inches in loose thickness. Each layer should be uniformly compacted with vibratory equipment. Under no circumstances should a bulldozer or similar tracked vehicles be used as compacting equipment. Material containing an excess of water so the specified compaction limits cannot be attained should be spread and dried to a moisture content which will permit proper compaction; excessively dry material should be sprinkled with water as required to secure specified compactions. All fill should be compacted to the specified percent of the maximum density obtained in accordance with ASTM density Test D-698, Standard Proctor (98 percent of maximum dry density). Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate that the specified compaction limits are not obtained, the areas represented by such tests should be reworked and retested as required until the specified limits are reached. BORING LOCATION MAP Project Name: Granite City Food & Brewery Prepared By: Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Prepared For: Dunham Company Project No: 08IN0099 Date: 3/08 SURFACE ELEVATION Ground Water Recovery Graphics Sampler Graphics No. Sample Strata 140 Qu-tsf Unconfined 5.5 16.4 11.7 26.8 25.3 End of Boring at 16 feet CT Sample Type Standard Penetration Test, N - blows/foot CU RC CA ST Scale - Pressed Shelby Tube Groundwater Boring Method Pocket Penetrometer Compressive Strength Gray and Brown Silty CLAY with a Trace of Sand RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION 19 Gray, Moist Fine SAND 5 4 3 2 19 10 9 11 16.0 15.0 7.0 0.3 3.8 2.8 1.0 1 2.5 Dark Brown Clayey SILT with a Trace of Sand and Organics (Topsoil) SS SS SS SS Brown Clayey SILT with a Trace of Sand and Gravel SS Date Completed During Drilling Northing Easting 140 Sample Type SURFACE ELEVATION Ground Water Recovery Graphics Sampler Graphics No. Sample Strata Gray Clayey SILT with a Trace of Sand and Gravel Compressive Strength 3.0 10.5 18.4 19.7 Standard Penetration Test, N - blows/foot RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION Qu-tsf Unconfined CT CU RC CA ST Scale - Pressed Shelby Tube Groundwater Boring Method Pocket Penetrometer Brown, Moist Fine SAND with a Trace of Clay 13 5 4 3 2 End of Boring at 16 feet 16 9 10 8 16.0 15.0 7.0 0.3 3.5 3.0 1 0.8 Brown Silty CLAY with a Trace of Sand Dark Brown Clayey SILT with a Trace of Sand and Organics (Topsoil) SS SS SS SS SS Date Completed During Drilling Northing Easting - Mud Drilling - Cuttings Bid Form 3/08 00412 - 1 DOCUMENT 00412 BID FORM COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION (Note: Bidders to enter bid data into this form, then print and fax with appropriate signatures.) GRANITE CITY FOOD & BREWERY Carmel, Indiana Gentlemen: The undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to furnish any and all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services for the supply and installation of the above mentioned complete construction as indicated in the Construction Documents and the following addenda ____,____,____, as prepared by SJA Architects, St. Cloud, Minnesota. BASE BID: The sum of ___________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ _________ Dollars ( ). In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and all bids, and it is agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn during the period of days provided in the Bidding Documents. We propose to have the work substantially complete in accordance with the requirements of the Construction Schedule stated in Division 01. Respectfully Submitted, Firm: By: Address: Phone: Fax: E-Mail: The above Firm is a (complete one): Proprietorship: (Give full name and address of Proprietor.) Partnership: (Give full names and addresses of all Partners.) Corporation: State of Incorporation. Bid Form 00412 - 2 3/08 Please provide the following bid breakdown information: All Other Cost National Account Material Cost General Conditions 02200, 02300 Site Prep and Earthwork 02742 Plant-Mixed Bituminous Pavement 02751 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02840 Site Accessories 02810, 02900 Irrigation and Landscaping 03100 Formwork, 03200, 03300 Concrete Reinforcement, Cast-In-place Concrete 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete Edwards Stone Package Division 5 Complete 06100, 06179 Rough Carpentry and Wood Trusses 06400 Interior Architectural Woodwork, 06620 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 07210 Building Insulation 07246 Fiber Reinforced Stucco 07540, 07620 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing and Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 07920 Joint Sealant 08112, Drywall Frames 08115 Steel Doors and Frames 08210,Wood Doors 08710 Finish Door Hardware 08410, 08800 Aluminum Framed Storefront & Glazing 09100 Metal Support Assemblies 09260 Drywall and Metal Stud Framing 09300 Tile Tile Shop Package African Stone Package Dal-Tile Package 09512 Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 09910 Painting 10160, 10440, 10520, 10810 Specialties Division 11 (Brewery Equipment Installation) Division 15 Plumbing Division 15 Fire Protection Division 15 HVAC Division 16 Complete Winter Conditions Overhead & Profit Total Base Bid END OF DOCUMENT Agreement Forms 4/08 00525 - 1 DOCUMENT 00525 AGREEMENT FORMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 AGREEMENT A. This agreement form is available for review at Architect’s office. Successful bidders shall execute Agreement within ten (10) days of receipt of same, along with copies of required bonds and policies or certificates of insurance. B. Agreement form shall be AIA Document A101-1997 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (AIA Document A101). Supplemental Conditions are listed below and are to be included in the contract. AIA A101-1997 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS: Owner: Dunham Capital Management, LLC 230 S. Phillips Avenue, Suite 202 Sioux Falls, SD 57104 Phone: (605) 339-9400 Fax: (605) 373-9475 3.2 Add to end: The Owner and Contractor have agreed on a Project Schedule, attached as Exhibit “A”, which identifies milestones for the Work, including but not limited to, all major subcontract commencements and completions, owner and tenant contracted interaction tasks, as well as substantial completion, temporary certificate of occupancy and final certificate of occupancy. The Project Schedule includes time required for all activities and events that may be encountered in the project. 3.3.1 To augment the definition of “Substantial Completion” set forth in Subpart 9.8.1 of the incorporated General Conditions, AIA A201-1997, as modified, the parties agree that the Work will be Substantially Completed only when the Project has passed all requisite governmental inspections and received a final certificate of occupancy from the governmental authority where the project is located and Contractor has completed construction. 5.1.1 Add “and approval by Owner’s lender,” after “Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect” 5.1.4 Add at end: Each Application for Payment must not exceed the amount of Work performed or materials supplied and installed for the pay period and will be submitted using AIA Document G702 with detailed breakdown of amount by payee and type of work completed. Owner, Owner’s representative and Owner’s lender may make an inspection of work completed for approval of Application for Payment. 5.1.5 Add at end: Notarized, unconditional waivers of lien from the Contractor and every Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor and Supplier that performed work or supplied material for the immediately prior pay period shall be provided to Owner’s Representative along with each payment application. These unconditional lien waivers must be in a form acceptable to Owner, Owner’s lender and Owner’s title insurer, and shall comply fully with the laws of the State where the Project is located. 7.3 The Owner’s representative is: Mr. Wade Behm Behm Construction & Development 7704 West Justice Street Sioux Falls, SD 57106 Phone: (605) 366-6252 Fax: (952) 513-2143 Email: wade@behm.net Agreement Forms 00525 - 2 7/97 7.6 Other Provisions: 7.6.1 Insurance. Contractor shall provide and maintain during the performance of this Agreement the insurance described below, which insurance shall be placed with a financially solid company or companies authorized to do business in the State where the Project is located and shall name Owner, Tenant, Owner’s Representative, and Owner’s lender as additional insured: 7.6.1.1 Contractor shall provide Contractor’s Builder’s Risk Insurance on the Project. Certificate of Insurance shall list Owner, Tenant and Owner’s Representative as additional insured and Owner’s lender as additional insured, loss payee, and mortgagee. 7.6.1.2 Workmen’s Compensation Minimum Limits: Each Accident $100,000; Each Occupational Disease $100,000; Occupational Disease Aggregate $500,000. 7.6.1.3 Broad Form General Liability Insurance on an occurrence basis and shall include explosion, collapse, underground hazard and products/completed operations coverages. Minimum Limits: General Aggregate $2,000,000; Products/Completed operations Aggregate $2,000,000; Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000; Each Occurrence $2,000,000. 7.6.1.4 Automobile Liability Insurance, Minimum Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 7.6.1.5 The full aggregate liability policy limits required above shall be available with respect to Contractor’s obligations hereunder and Contractor shall obtain a project specific/location specific aggregate limit endorsement confirming such coverage. Contractor agrees to notify Owner of any substantial claims, paid or reserved, applied against the aggregate of any of the required insurance policies. All insurance required hereunder shall be maintained in full force and effect in a company or companies satisfactory to Owner until all of Contractor’s obligations hereunder have been accomplished in full. 7.6.1.6 All insurance shall be subject to the requirement that Owner must receive thirty (30) day prior written notice before the cancellation of or failure to renew any such policy. In the event of threatened cancellation for nonpayment of premium, Owner may pay the same on behalf of Contractor, at Owner’s discretion, and deduct the same from any amount or payment due Contractor hereunder. 7.6.1.7 All insurance provided by Contractor hereunder shall be primary to any insurance policies held by Owner. Contractor waives subrogation as to Owner and its agents, representatives, affiliates, and assigns on all policies carried by the Contractor. If the required policies of insurance require an endorsement to provide for continued coverage where there is a waiver of subrogation, the Contractor will cause them to be so endorsed. 7.6.2 Subcontracts. Contractor shall include within every subcontract agreement the following language: “Subcontractor binds itself to Contractor and Owner and is obligated to Contractor and Owner in the same manner and to the same extent that Contractor is bound and obligated to owner under the Prime Contract. All rights which Owner may exercise and enforce against Contractor may be exercised and enforced by Owner against Subcontractor. In the event of any dispute between Owner and Contractor, Subcontractor shall be bound by all decisions, directives, interpretations and rulings of the Owner or the Architect at Owner’s option, including Owner’s termination or suspension of Contractor.” 7.6.3 Contractor represents that it (1) has sufficient knowledge and expertise to construct Work in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations; (2) has reviewed, analyzed, and has current knowledge of the site; (3) has reviewed, analyzed and has found sufficient for construction and completion of the Work the Contract Documents listed in Article 8 of this agreement; any exceptions to this statement and list have been specifically identified in the attachments. Based upon the above statement, Contractor represents and warrants that it can and will complete the Work for the Contract Sum identified in this agreement, and that no sums additional to the Contract Sum are required for Contractor’s completion of the Work. Agreement Forms 4/08 00525 - 3 7.6.4 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include in all the Work all labor, materials and supplies, insurance, tools, equipment, permits (exclusive of plan review fees), licenses, taxes (exclusive of real estate taxes), approvals, transportation, and field surveying and other services and items necessary for the Project to be a complete and workable system and required in connection with the satisfactory performance, execution and final completion of the Work. Matters not expressly included in the Contract Documents but which are reasonably inferable there from as being necessary to produce the intended results shall be deemed included as part of the Work. 7.6.5 Owner may assume and undertake the various roles of the Architect under these Contract Documents, at Owner’s sole discretion. 7.6.6 Supply to Owner’s Representative, copies of the Seven (7) largest Subcontractor/Supplier Contracts, to include Electrical, Plumbing and HVAC, detailing the cost of each contract. 7.6.7 After construction of the footings and foundations, and prior to commencement of construction of additional improvements, cause a survey, paid for by Owner, to be done showing the building “footprint” is in conformance with construction plans and local regulatory guidelines. 7.6.8 The Contractor will allow for and arrange utilities for a 12-ft x 60-ft office/hiring trailer to be located at the site approximately 60 days prior to substantial completion. Owner will order the trailer, arrange delivery and pay the cost of the trailer rental. This trailer requires 120v single phase power at 100 amps. The trailer shall be placed in a location with respect to broad side exposure to high traffic areas and be accessible to non-construction traffic 7.6.9 The Contractor will coordinate and, if applicable, pay for, the installation of all utility services including, but not limited to; electricity, natural gas, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, domestic water, and, if applicable, cable TV services. 8.1.2 Add at the end “, as modified by the parties.” C. Should the Owner and the Contractor find it mutually agreeable, the owner may elect to use the following form of contract, in lieu of AIA Document A101-1997: AIA Document A111-1997 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis for payment is the COST OF THE WORK PLUS A FEE with a negotiated Guaranteed Maximum Price. Supplemental Conditions are listed below and are to be included in the contract. AIA A111-1997 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS: Owner: Dunham Capital Management, LLC 230 S. Phillips Avenue, Suite 202 Sioux Falls, SD 57104 Phone: (605) 339-9400 Fax: (605) 373-9475 4.2 Add to end: The Owner and Contractor have agreed on a Project Schedule, attached as Exhibit “A”, which identifies milestones for the Work, including but not limited to, all major subcontract commencements and completions, owner and tenant contracted interaction tasks, as well as substantial completion, temporary certificate of occupancy and final certificate of occupancy. The Project Schedule includes time required for all activities and events that may be encountered in the project. 4.3 To augment the definition of “Substantial Completion” set forth in Subpart 9.8.1 of the incorporated General Conditions, AIA A201-1997, as modified, the parties agree that the Work will be Substantially Completed only when the Project has passed all requisite governmental inspections and received a final certificate of occupancy from the governmental authority where the project is located and Contractor has completed construction. 12.1.1 Add “and approval by Owner’s lender,” after “Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect” Agreement Forms 00525 - 4 7/97 12.1.5 Add at end: Each Application for Payment must not exceed the amount of Work performed or materials supplied and installed for the pay period and will be submitted using AIA Document G702 with detailed breakdown of amount by payee and type of work completed. Owner, Owner’s representative and Owner’s lender may make an inspection of work completed for approval of Application for Payment. 12.1.6 Add at end: Notarized, unconditional waivers of lien from the Contractor and every Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor and Supplier that performed work or supplied material for the immediately prior pay period shall be provided to Owner’s Representative along with each payment application. These unconditional lien waivers must be in a form acceptable to Owner, Owner’s lender and Owner’s title insurer, and shall comply fully with the laws of the State where the Project is located. 14.3 The Owner’s representative is: Mr. Wade Behm Behm Construction & Development 7704 West Justice Street Sioux Falls, SD 57106 Phone: (605) 366-6252 Fax: (952) 513-2143 Email: wade@behm.net 14.6 Other Provisions: 14.6.1.1 Insurance. Contractor shall provide and maintain during the performance of this Agreement the insurance described below, which insurance shall be placed with a financially solid company or companies authorized to do business in the State where the Project is located and shall name Owner, Tenant, Owner’s Representative, and Owner’s lender as additional insured. 14.6.1.2 Contractor shall provide Contractor’s Builder’s Risk Insurance on the Project. Certificate of Insurance shall list Owner, Tenant, and Owner’s Representative as additional insured and Owner’s lender as additional insured, loss payee, and mortgagee. 14.6.1.3 Workmen’s Compensation Minimum Limits: Each Accident $100,000; Each Occupational Disease $100,000; Occupational Disease Aggregate $500,000. 14.6.1.4 Broad Form General Liability Insurance on an occurrence basis and shall include explosion, collapse, underground hazard and products/completed operations coverages. Minimum Limits: General Aggregate $2,000,000; Products/Completed operations Aggregate $2,000,000; Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000; Each Occurrence $2,000,000. 14.6.1.5 Automobile Liability Insurance, Minimum Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 14.6.1.7 The full aggregate liability policy limits required above shall be available with respect to Contractor’s obligations hereunder and Contractor shall obtain a project specific/location specific aggregate limit endorsement confirming such coverage. Contractor agrees to notify Owner of any substantial claims, paid or reserved, applied against the aggregate of any of the required insurance policies. All insurance required hereunder shall be maintained in full force and effect in a company or companies satisfactory to Owner until all of Contractor’s obligations hereunder have been accomplished in full. 14.6.1.8 All insurance shall be subject to the requirement that Owner must receive thirty (30) day prior written notice before the cancellation of or failure to renew any such policy. In the event of threatened cancellation for nonpayment of premium, Owner may pay the same on behalf of Contractor, at Owner’s discretion, and deduct the same from any amount or payment due Contractor hereunder. 14.6.1.9 All insurance provided by Contractor hereunder shall be primary to any insurance policies held by Owner. Contractor waives subrogation as to Owner and its agents, representatives, affiliates, and assigns on all policies carried by the Contractor. If the required policies of insurance require an endorsement to provide for continued coverage where there is a waiver of subrogation, the Contractor will cause them to be so endorsed. Agreement Forms 4/08 00525 - 5 14.6.2 Subcontracts. Contractor shall include within every subcontract agreement the following language: “Subcontractor binds itself to Contractor and Owner and is obligated to Contractor and Owner in the same manner and to the same extent that Contractor is bound and obligated to owner under the Prime Contract. All rights which Owner may exercise and enforce against Contractor may be exercised and enforced by Owner against Subcontractor. In the event of any dispute between Owner and Contractor, Subcontractor shall be bound by all decisions, directives, interpretations and rulings of the Owner or the Architect at Owner’s option, including Owner’s termination or suspension of Contractor.” 14.6.3 Contractor represents that it (1) has sufficient knowledge and expertise to construct Work in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations; (2) has reviewed, analyzed, and has current knowledge of the site; (3) has reviewed, analyzed and has found sufficient for construction and completion of the Work the Contract Documents listed in Article 8 of this agreement; any exceptions to this statement and list have been specifically identified in the attachments. Based upon the above statement, Contractor represents and warrants that it can and will complete the Work for the Contract Sum identified in this agreement, and that no sums additional to the Contract Sum are required for Contractor’s completion of the Work. 14.6.4 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include in all the Work all labor, materials and supplies, insurance, tools, equipment, permits (exclusive of plan review fees), licenses, taxes (exclusive of real estate taxes), approvals, transportation, and field surveying and other services and items necessary for the Project to be a complete and workable system and required in connection with the satisfactory performance, execution and final completion of the Work. Matters not expressly included in the Contract Documents but which are reasonably inferable there from as being necessary to produce the intended results shall be deemed included as part of the Work. 14.6.5 Owner may assume and undertake the various roles of the Architect under these Contract Documents, at Owner’s sole discretion. 14.6.6 Supply to owner’s representative, copies of seven (7) largest Subcontractor/Supplier Contracts, to include electrical, Plumbing and HVAC, detailing the cost of each contract. 14.6.7 After construction of the footings and foundations, and prior to commencement of construction of additional improvements, cause a survey, paid for by Owner, to be done showing the building “footprint” is in conformance with construction plans and local regulatory guidelines. 14.6.8 The Contractor will allow for and arrange utilities for a 12-ft x 60-ft office/hiring trailer to be located at the site approximately 60 days prior to substantial completion. Owner will order the trailer, arrange delivery and pay the cost of the trailer rental. This trailer requires 120v single phase power at 100 amps. The trailer shall be placed in a location with respect to broad side exposure to high traffic areas and be accessible to non-construction traffic. 14.6.9 The Contractor will coordinate and, if applicable, pay for, the installation of all utility services including, but not limited to; electricity, natural gas, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, domestic water, and, if applicable, cable TV services. 15.1.2 Add at the end “, as modified by the parties.” END OF DOCUMENT General Conditions 04/01/08 00701 - 1 DOCUMENT 00701 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION A. “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” AIA Document A201 (1997), is hereby made a part of this Project Manual and may be reviewed at the office of the Architect. B. The AIA General Conditions including Supplementary Conditions (Section 00805) shall become a part of this Contract and shall apply to all Contractors and Subcontractors. 1. TABLE OF ARTICLES: a. For the convenience of the Contractors, the “Table of Articles” of the AIA General Conditions is listed below: Article 1 General Provisions Article 2 Owner Article 3 Contractor Article 4 Administration of the Contract Article 5 Subcontractors Article 6 Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors Article 7 Changes in the Work Article 8 Time Article 9 Payments and Completion Article 10 Protection of Persons and Property Article 11 Insurance and Bonds Article 12 Uncovering and Correction of Work Article 13 Miscellaneous Provisions Article 14 Termination or Suspension of the Contract END OF DOCUMENT Supplementary Conditions 2/08 00805 - 1 DOCUMENT 00805 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”, AIA Document A201, 1997 edition, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive, is a part of this Contract. B. Supplements to General Conditions: 1. Where articles, paragraphs, subparagraphs are supplemented by following paragraphs, supplemental provisions are added to the original provisions which remain in effect. 2. Articles, paragraphs, subparagraphs not amended, voided, or superseded by following paragraphs remain in effect. 1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Construction Documents: 1. Add to subparagraph 1.1.1: a. The Owner Representative will provide 3 sets of Construction Documents for use by the Contractor on this project. b. The Contractor may secure more sets of Construction Documents from the Owner Representative upon payment of reproduction costs. c. The Construction Documents will be provided in digital format for electronic distribution or printing and manual distribution by the Architect. B. Inconsistency: 1. Add to Subparagraph 1.2.3: a. If there is an inconsistency in quality or quantity of work required by the Contract Documents, provide quality or quantity consistent with Owner Representative’s interpretation. No change shall result in Contract Sum based upon that interpretation provided that work so required was within range of quality or quantity described in the documents. b. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities: 1) The Agreement. 2) Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. 3) The Supplementary Conditions. 4) The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 5) Drawings and Specifications. c. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Owner Representative’s interpretation. d. In the case of an inconsistency between Reference Standards and Specifications, the Specifications will have precedence. 1.03 CONTRACTOR A. Overtime Work: Supplementary Conditions 00805 - 2 2/08 1. Add to Subparagraph 3.4.1: a. Contract Documents may require or Contractor may elect to perform work after regular working hours. Additional cost of such work shall be borne by Contractor. B. Warranty: 1. Add Article 3.5.2: a. Contractor’s warranty shall be for twelve (12) months beginning on the date when the building receives the final Certificate of Occupancy from the governmental authority where the project is located. Contractor acknowledges that Contractor’s 12 month warranty work obligations are included within the Contract Sum. 2. Add Article 3.5.3: a. Contractor shall assign to the Owner all warranties. Contractor shall ensure that all warranties are issued to and run in favor of Owner. Contractor shall deliver the original and one copy of all written guaranties and warranties to Owner upon substantial Completion of the Work. C. Building Permit: 1. Revise Paragraph 3.7.1: a. The Owner will pay for initial plan review process fee portion of the building permit in order that plan reviews begin prior to contract award. Remainder of building permit, other permits and government fees for this project to be by Contractor. The Contractor remains responsible for regulatory requirements, licenses and inspections. After contract for the Work is executed, the Contractor shall assist the Owner’s Representative, Architect and Consultants to obtain all requisite permits for the Work. 2. Add Article 3.7.5: a. Contractor shall be fully qualified under all applicable state or local licensing laws for contractors in effect at the time and location of the Work. Contractor and its Subcontractors must possess a current license for the proper classification of their work activity before commencing their work. Contractor shall be responsible for determining that each of its Subcontractors and suppliers are licensed in accordance with all applicable laws. D. Use of Site: 1. Add Subparagraph 3.13.2: a. 3.13.2 Owner may perform certain other work on site during course of construction with own personnel or by separate Contract. Permit full access to entire site by Owner or other Contractors, coordinate work with theirs, and cooperate in any way possible. E. Indemnification: 1. Add to Paragraph 3.18: a. 3.18.2.1 In addition to any indemnification required under this paragraph 3.18, purchase insurance as required by State Statutes for the project location, as most recently amended and as required in Article 11. Provide copies of insurance to Owner and Owner Representative and include these parties as additional insureds. F. Verification of Field Conditions: 1. Add to Article 3: a. 3.19 VERIFICATION OF FIELD CONDITIONS: 1) 3.19.1 Take field measurements and verify field conditions. Thoroughly compare such measurements and conditions with Contract Documents and Shop Drawings or product information before commencing work. Report any error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner Representative immediately. Employ and pay for Registered Surveyor if needed. Supplementary Conditions 2/08 00805 - 3 2) 3.19.2 No change in Contract Sum will be allowed because of minor differences between actual field conditions and conditions described in Contract Documents. A. Underground Utilities: Verification and location of underground utilities, facilities, and equipment. 1.04 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTACT A. Architects Administration of the Contract 4.2.4: 1. Should be deleted and replaced with: a. Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner Representative. As agreed in the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor AIA Document A101, Subparagraph 7.6.1, the Contractor will include language in all Subcontracts directing that, in the event of any dispute between the Owner and the Contractor, the Subcontractors are bound by all decisions, directives, interpretations, and rulings of the Owner or, at the Owner’s option, the Owner Representative, including but not limited to all decisions as to the scope of the Subcontract Work. 2. Add to 4.3.7.2: a. At the end, add the words “critical path of the” prior to “scheduled construction.” B. Delete Paragraph 4.5 in its entirety, substitute: 1. 4.5 UNRESOLVED DISPUTES: a. 4.5.1 Remedies Available. If any question, dispute, or controversy arises between Owner and Contractor out of any provision of Contract Documents, for which a decision is not otherwise provided for in Contract Documents and that cannot be settled by change order, Owner and Contractor may exercise legal remedies as may be available. 1.05 SUBCONTRACTORS A. Award of Contracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work : 1. Add to Subparagraph 5.2.1: a. Contractor’s responsibility to furnish materials, products, and equipment in conformance with requirements of Contract Documents shall not be modified or limited by Owner’s or Owner Representative’s lack of reasonable objection to any selected Contractor or Supplier. B. Add Article 5.2.3.1: 1. No approval or disapproval by the Architect, Owner Representative or Owner of any particular Subcontractor shall relieve Contractor of its responsibility for performance of the Work. Furthermore, Contractor is not relieved of its responsibility for selection of particular processes or materials for the performance of the Work by any Owner or Architect approval of a particular Subcontractor. 1.06 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Add Subparagraph 7.1.4: 1. Any adjustment to the Contract Time arising out of any changes in the Work shall be in writing by the Owner. If the Contractor believes a change in the Work has been directed for which an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time is due, and there is not a written directive for such change by the Owner, then the Contractor shall, as a condition precedent to preservation of any claim pertaining to such change, give written notice to the Owner prior to proceeding with any of the work involved in the change (except for emergency conditions endangering life or property, as provided in paragraph Supplementary Conditions 00805 - 4 2/08 10.3 of the General Conditions). The written notice shall identify (1) the scope and nature of the change in the Work and (2) the impact said change will have upon the Contract Sum or Contract Time. In the notice, the Contractor shall provide and identify specific cost impacts, if any, and the specific extent of additional time to perform, if any, sought for adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time by reason of the change. In the alternative, Contractor shall use its best efforts to provide specific maximum estimates of the costs and additional time required as a result of the alleged change. Contractor’s failure to give timely written notice shall constitute a waiver of any claims for adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time not otherwise approved in writing by the Owner, it being expressly understood that such notice, timely given, is a condition precedent to Contractor’s claim. B. Add Subparagraph 7.2.3: 1. 7.2.3 Change order amounts are understood to include costs plus amount for overhead and profit agreed upon under Subparagraph 12.1.3.5 and required adjustments to Contract Time. No further consideration for additional impact upon Contract Sum or Contract Time will be made as result of any change order or as cumulative result of any or all change orders as may be agreed to by Owner and Contractor. C. Change Subparagraph 7.3.3.3 as follows: Delete the final “or” and add: 1. A reasonable allowance for overhead and profit shall be negotiated as agreed percent of net cost of work accomplished by Contractor’s own forces or 5 percent of net cost of work accomplished by Subcontractors. Subcontractors may add an allowance of not more than 10 percent of the net cost of work accomplished by their own forces to cover their overhead and profit. 1.07 TIME A. Delays and Extensions of Time: 1. Add Subparagraph 8.3.4: a. 8.3.4 Extension of Contract Time shall be Contractor’s sole remedy for delay. 2. Add to Article 8: 1.08 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Application For Payment: 1. Add to Subparagraph 9.3.1: a. Substantiating documents may, at Owner’s option, include waivers of liens from Contractors and Suppliers. 2. Add the following Subparagraphs: a. 9.3.1.3: Retainage shall be 10 percent. b. 9.3.1.4: The schedule for application for payment and date of payment will be set at the Preconstruction Meeting. B. Partial Occupancy or Use: 1. Add to Subparagraph 9.9.1: a. The insurance company or companies providing property insurance required by Paragraph 11.3 shall consent to use or occupancy by endorsement prior to such use or occupancy. 2. Add to Subparagraph 9.9.2: a. After occupancy, Owner will allow Contractor reasonable access to occupied area to complete and correct work. 3. Add to Subparagraph 9.9.3: Supplementary Conditions 2/08 00805 - 5 a. Use or occupancy by Owner shall not be deemed to constitute waiver of existing claims on behalf of Owner or Contractor against each other. 4. Add Subparagraph 9.9.4: a. 9.9.4: Owner shall have right to install furnishings and equipment within project prior to substantial completion of work. Such installation shall not constitute occupancy or use by Owner. C. Substantial Completion: 1. Add at the end of Subparagraph 9.10.1: a. If, after notification that the work is ready for re-inspection, subsequent inspection by the Owner Representative reveals that any of the previously identified items remain incomplete or defective, the Owner Representative will again notify the Contractor in writing of the remaining items. All costs associated with any subsequent inspections, in which these items are again noted will be documented by the Owner Representative at the Owner Representative’s standard hourly rate, submitted to the Owner. An equivalent amount will be deleted from the Contract by Construction Change Directive. 1.09 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS: A. Add Article 10.1.2: 1. Contractor alone shall be responsible for all injuries to persons, and for all damages to property of the Owner or others, caused by or resulting from the negligence of Contractor, its employees or agents in conjunction with prosecution of the Work. This responsibility of Contractor shall extend to any location where Work is performed, and shall apply continuously throughout the course of Work performance without regard to normal working hours or days. Contractor agrees to pay reasonable attorneys fees and any other reasonable costs attendant to enforcement of this provision by Owner. 1.10 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Additional types and amounts of insurance required by Owner: 1. OCP: Purchase and maintain Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability Insurance policy which names Owner, Owner’s Lender, Tenant, Construction Manager, SJA, Consulting Engineers, any other consultants, and “their agents and employees” as named insured, written for not less than limits of liability for Bodily Injury Liability and Property Damage Liability. 2. Property Insurance (Builder’s Risk): Shall be purchased and maintained by Contractor and shall comply with the requirements of Article 11.4 of the General Conditions. a. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of insurance deductibles or self-insurance retention. b. The deductible for the Work of this Project is: $10,000 B. Insurance set forth in these documents is minimum required. Any additional coverage that may be necessary to further protect Contractor is sole responsibility of Contractor. C. Certificate of Insurance: 1. Add to subparagraph 11.1.3 a. List Owner as Certificate Holder. (The Lender may also request a certificate with the Lender listed as Certificate Holder). b. List Owner, Owner’s Lender, Tenant, Architect, Engineer and any other consultants, their employees and agents, as Additional Insureds. c. Include the Project name and address on all insurance certificates. 2. The Certificate of Insurance must be submitted to the Owner Representative prior to commencement of the work, in accordance with General Conditions. If the Contractor does start prior to receipt of a Supplementary Conditions 00805 - 6 2/08 correct copy of the Certificate of Insurance by SJA, Applications for Payment will not be processed until correct copy is received. 1.11 BOND REQUIREMENTS 1. Add the following subparagraph 11.5.3: a. Performance Bond and Payment Bond: Bonds shall be in force for the duration of the contract, including Contractor warranty periods. b. Bonding company must be licensed in state where Project is located. c. Bonding company must have a Best rating of A or higher. 1.12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK A. Add to Paragraph 12.2.2: 1. 12.2.2.1 Any specific warranties required by Contract Documents shall remain in effect as required in individual sections. Warranty period on work not completed on date of Substantial Completion will begin on date of Final Completion Certification or actual completion of work, whichever is later. 2. 12.2.2.2 Neither the final Certificate of Payment nor any provision in Contract Documents shall relieve Contractor of responsibility for negligence or for faulty materials or work within extent and period provided by law. Upon written notice, remedy any defect due thereto and pay all expenses to any other work resulting therefrom. 1.13 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Add Article 15: ARTICLE 15 GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS 15.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 15.1.1 The Contractor shall comply with all requirements that may be imposed by Federal, State or Local regulations at no additional cost to the Owner. This includes regulations for business entities and employers. END OF SECTION Summary of General Requirements 4/08 01100 - 1 SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Allowances 2. Alternates 3. Application for Payment 4. Project Coordination 5. Project Meetings 6. Testing 7. Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. Product Requirements 9. Substitutions 10. Cutting and Patching 11. Scope of Work Matrix 12. Project Closeout 13. Work Sequence 1.02 ALLOWANCES A. General: Selected items may be bid by allowance. B. Use contingency allowances only as directed for the Owner’s purposes, and only by Change Orders that designate amounts to be charged to the allowance. C. No allowance may be included in a lump sum proposal or guaranteed maximum price proposal unless specifically approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to the time and date bids are due or are listed below in paragraph D. D. Schedule of Allowances: 1. Winter Conditions – If this allowance is entered into the bid proposal, it must be accompanied with a written winter condition management plan. Types of heat, shelter, and other protections shall be identified as should expectations for anticipated use based on time of year. 1.03 ALTERNATES A. General: Selected items may be bid by alternate. B. Schedule of Alternates: 1. There are no scheduled alternates. Summary of General Requirements 01100 - 2 4/08 1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Forms: Applications for Payment must be submitted to the Owner Representative on AIA Documents G702 and G703. Three sets of forms must be submitted for each application. A. Schedule of Values: Use Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish format for Schedule of Values. (When utilizing the A111-1997 contract, line items for Schedule of Values on form G703 Continuation Sheet shall correspond to subcontract and material vendor line items.) B. Additional Requirements: 1. Prior to submitting Application for Payment, Contractor must submit to the Owner Representative: a. List of Subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators. b. Schedule of Values. 2. Schedule for Application: a. Contractor submit to Owner Representative by last day of month. b. Owner Representative submit to Owner by 10th of month. c. Owner pays Contractor by 20th of the same month. 3. Retainage: Until Owner takes occupancy, 10 percent of each progress payment will be retained. 1.06 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordination: 1. Supervise and direct the Work. Ensure that none of the Work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 2. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various specification sections to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation. 3. Coordinate work of various specification sections having interdependent responsibilities. 4. Prepare coordination drawings where off-site fabricated products and materials are by separate entities and must accurately interface. 5. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work indicated on Drawings. 6. Coordinate enclosure of Work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. 7. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction in finished areas, except as otherwise indicated. 8. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work. 9. The owner and the tenant contract directly for other work associated with the Contractor’s work. Work contracted directly by the owner or the tenant is to be coordinated in conjunction with all of the above conditions (1 through 8). The owner’s representative and the tenant will work with the contractor to assist in this coordination. 1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: A Preconstruction Conference shall be hosted by the Contractor with major subcontractors, and suppliers. The Tenant and/or Owner Representative should be advised of the meeting time and place. The Tenant and/or the Owner’s Representative may opt for participation via pre-written notes, conference call or in person. Upload notes for those meetings to ConstructWare. 1. An additional Preconstruction Conference shall be held with the landlord, mall, or other entity having ownership authority over the site that the Work is to take place. The purpose of this meeting shall be for the Contractor to familiarize himself with the work rules and special conditions for the site. Upload notes for those meetings to ConstructWare. Summary of General Requirements 4/08 01100 - 3 B. Progress Meetings: As needed; attendance by persons affected by that phase of construction. Contractor responsible for recording and distributing meeting notes in a timely manner. Upload notes for those meetings to ConstructWare. C. Preinstallation Meetings: As good practice, the Contractor is encouraged to hold preinstallation meetings with all trades, individually as that trade’s work is about to commence. When required in individual specification Sections, or as requested by Owner Representative, convene a pre-installation conference at the site prior to commencing Work of the Section. Upload notes for those meetings to ConstructWare. 1.08 TESTING A. Owner will contract and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. The Contractor shall coordinate testing services by giving the testing company adequate notice that work requiring observation or quality control sampling is about to commence. B. Where results of quality control services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance of related Work with requirements of the Contract Documents, retests are responsibility of Contractor, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor’s responsibility. Retesting will be at the rate of 2 retests for each failed test. Retest of Work revised or replaced by Contractor is Contractor’s responsibility. Retesting costs invoiced to the Owner will be deducted from Contract amount by Supplemental Agreement. 1.09 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Utility Service: New temporary utility services. 1. Water: Provided and paid by Contractor. 2. Electricity: Provided and paid by Contractor. 3. Telephone: Provided and paid by Contractor. 4. Heat: Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations, to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. a. Temporary heating and ventilation required by Work under Contract shall be provided and paid by Contractor requiring same. See 1.02 D Allowances (this Spec Section) for temporary heating associated with Winter Conditions. b. Owner will allow installation and use of permanent heating system for temporary heat after building is weather-tight and concrete floor slabs have been placed. Cost of temporary heat after enclosure shall be by allowance, See 1.02D (this Spec Section). Contractor shall install new filters at time of Substantial Completion. B. Field Office and Sheds: Contractor shall provide a lit, heated/cooled field office. Field office is for the primary use of the Contractor, but is expected to be available for the use of the Owner’s Representative and the Tenant prior to other adequate facilities being available on site. (See Office/Hiring Trailer Requirements in Section 00525 for more information about facility needs of the Tenant.) 1. The Owner shall purchase light fixtures and other items that will be shipped directly to the site from time to time. The Contractor shall provide one 16-foot storage as provided by PODS, Inc (www.pods.com), or equal, starting at 16 weeks prior to substantial completion. A second storage unit, of similar size shall be provided at 7 weeks prior to substantial completion. Both units can be removed 2 weeks prior to substantial completion or as soon as the contents have been installed within the building. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provided and paid for by Contractor. Construction personnel may not use sanitary facilities within existing building. Provide facilities for both sexes as needed. Room 115 Unisex Restroom must be operational, and available for Owner and Tenant use only, at the time the Hiring Summary of General Requirements 01100 - 4 4/08 Trailer arrives on site. (Note: room number reference is for prototypical sites. On Non-Conforming sites, verify this room number with the Owner’s representative.) D. Protection: 1. Safety enclosures, warning lights, signs, etc.: Provide as required to comply with pertinent safety, security, and other regulations. 2. Provide barriers to prevent public entry to construction areas. Verify with the Owner’s Representative prior to bidding as to the necessity of more elaborate or decorative barriers as may be required by others having authority over the site. Also verify the necessity for barriers to be erected in the case of special events on or near the premises. Failure to verify does not relieve the contractor of providing said protection. 3. Provide barricades and covered walkways as required for public rights-of-way, for public access to, and emergency egress from existing buildings. 4. Provide temporary OR insulated weather-tight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating. 5. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate and prevent penetration of dust and moisture from Work areas to Owner-occupied areas. 6. Prevent damage to existing buildings and exterior areas. 7. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. This shall not be construed as meaning a security guard needing to be placed on site, however, local authorities, mall security, or similar patrol shall be notified and asked to include work site in their vehicular patrols. 8. Provide and maintain in working order during the entire construction period, a minimum of 1 fire extinguisher in the construction area and 1 in the field office. a. Contractors using open flame (welding or soldering) shall have a 10-pound minimum extinguisher within closest practical distance. E. Environmental Requirements: When installing Casework, Finish Carpentry and Custom wall finishes, maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum temperature of 85 degrees F, and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent in spaces to receive the Work of this Section. F. Dust Control: Minimize raising dust from construction operations. G. Noise Control: Restrict the use of noise making tools and equipment to hours of use that comply with local ordinances. H. Drainage: Maintain excavations free of water. Dewatering should be seasonally anticipated and will not be allowed for basis of adjustment to the contract. I. Erosion Control: 1. The Contractor shall file and maintain a Storm Water Pollution Protection Plan and/or Erosion Control plan per Best Management Practice enforced by local codes and ordinances. When required the Owner Representative will, through the Civil Engineer, file on owner’s behalf. 2. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from dust and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. 3. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. J. Rubbish Removal: Contractor shall provide and pay for dumpsters and waste disposal. 1. Control accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. Debris that can blow in the wind is to be collected daily (minimum). Summary of General Requirements 4/08 01100 - 5 2. Dispose of all rubbish in safe and lawful manner into approved collection facilities on a daily basis. No rubbish shall be allowed to collect on or near finished materials within the work site. The owner and Tenant anticipate a clean and safe worksite. 3. Separate and recycle applicable materials per local ordinances. 4. Provide One (1) each Twenty (20) CY rubbish container for Owner/Tenant use. Cost for drop off, pick up and emptying up to five (5) times shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor. Owner’s waste is primarily cardboard. At such time as food and grease waste disposal is needed, Tenant will have contracted permanent waste management services. K. Shoring: Provide temporary, shoring, bracing, protection as required for installation of the Work. Pay special care to walls erected prior to permanent interior structure being placed. L. Removal of Temporary Facilities: Maintain temporary facilities, controls as long as needed for safe proper completion of Work. Remove as rapidly as progress of work will permit. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. 1.10 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Source Limitations: 1. To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. B. Product Provision: 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. C. Existing Products: 1. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. D. Proprietary Specification Requirements: 1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted without prior written authorization from the Owner’s Representative or Architect. 2. Where 2 or more products or manufacturers are named, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted without prior written authorization from the Owner’s Representative or Architect. 1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Prior to Bid: 1. All requests must be approved by Owner Representative, Tenant and/or Architect. 2. Only requests submitted prior to 5 days before Bid date will be reviewed. 3. All requests are to include supporting product data, including, but not limited to, cost/schedule impact and manufacturer’s literature. 4. No faxed requests will be reviewed. 5. Approved items will be listed in Addenda. B. During Construction: 1. Requests for substitution will be reviewed only if there is a substantial benefit to the Owner. a. Cost savings. b. Time savings. c. Energy conservation. Summary of General Requirements 01100 - 6 4/08 d. Merit of product or method of construction. e. Specified product is not available or can not be obtained with required warranty. 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents caused by the substitution will be paid by the Contractor. 1.12 BREWERY EQUIPEMENT INSTALLATION A. Owner’s Representative is to be on site to inspect brewery equipment during offload and to provide technical advice for placement of equipment. 1. Begin off-loading at 7:00 AM. It is essential that the contractor has equipment arrive the day before to limit time lost in the morning for off-loading and installation. 2. General Contractor to provide the following equipment and materials for offload and brewery equipment setting: a. A telescoping lift to unload the brewery tanks and move them into the building. b. Fork extensions with minimum of six (6) feet, with padding for forks if necessary. c. Chain fall 1,000 LB capacity d. Three 4 foot nylon rigging straps with clevis closures or hooks for lifting 900 LB, up to twelve (12) feet tall brewing vessels. e. A set of three heavy duty corner casters. f. Pallet jack. g. Ten foot step ladder. h. Rachet set and crescent wrench. i. Fifty (50) foot length of chain or strap. j. Hammer Drill with masonry/tile bits k. 12 each, Hilti Toggler Bolt, 3/16 with screw, Part Number 00374493 l. Teflon Tape 3. General Contractor to provide labor as follows: a. One (1) lull operator – One 10-hour day. b. Four (4) tradesmen – One 10-hour day (verify trade claiming work in jurisdiction of project) c. Historically the equipment can be offloaded in 2 hours, set in place and leveled in 6 hours. 4. Above labor shall also be used to install the stainless steel Carbon Dioxide and Nitrogen header pipe system and attach 10 coiled hoses for the brewery. This work must be done prior to the large fermentation tanks being installed. 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Responsibility: Contractor requiring the cutting is responsible for the patching. B. Limitations: Do not cut the following: 1. Structural members in manner to reduce load carrying capacity. 2. Operational elements in manner to reduce their capacity to perform as intended, or would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life. 3. Safety-related components in manner that would reduce their capacity to perform in manner intended, or would decrease safety. 4. Construction exposed on exterior or in occupied spaces in manner that, in Owner Representative’s opinion, reduces the building's aesthetic qualities. C. Patching: Repair structure or item to match surrounding condition unless noted otherwise. D. Replacement: Remove and replace patching done in an unsatisfactory manner. Summary of General Requirements 4/08 01100 - 7 E. Thoroughly clean areas, spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to original or better condition. 1.14 SCOPE OF WORK MATRIX A. The plans and specifications are meant to define the Work performed by the Contractor. The following matrix is a visual guide to assist the contractor in assessing the Work. All items are described in greater detail in the appropriate specification section. Detailed specifications will prevail in cases subject to interpretation. Scope items shown for Owner and Tenant are not intended to be a complete outline of their work, only an indication of the work outlined within these documents as it interacts with the Contractor’s Work. Contractor Owner Tenant Division 1 X Exc: Quality Control Testing C P Exc: Plan Review Fees X Division 2 X Division 3 X Division 4 X Division 5 X Exc: Decorative Railings I P Exc: Decorative Window Trim C2 X Division 6 X Exc: Casework (Office Area) C2 X Exc: Casework (Customer Areas) C2 X Division 7 X 8112, 8115, 8210, 8710 X 8410, 8800 X Exc: Decorative Door Pulls I P Division 9 X Exc: Wall Finish at Customer areas C1 P, I Division 10 X Exc: Exterior Signs and Awnings C P, I Division 11 (see following) Kitchen Equipment FC, C2 P, I Coolers and Freezers C2 P, I Bar Equipment FC, C2 P, I Furniture C2 P, I Brewery Tanks I P Brewery Equipment I, FC P Refrigeration and Glycol Systems FC P, I Soda and Beer Systems C2, C1 P, I POS, Security, A/V, Phones C2, C1 P, I Division 15 X Exc: Hood Suppression System C2 P, I Exc: Rooftop Equipment and Controls I, C1 P Exc: HVAC Balancing C1 P, I Exc: HVAC Commissioning C1 P, I Division 16 X Exc: Light Fixture Package I, C1 P Summary of General Requirements 01100 - 8 4/08 LEGEND X Complete. All work to be provided and installed by Contractor. Exc: With the Exception of I Install FC Final Connections (gas, electric, water, sewer) P Provide C Coordinate direct with Tenant/Owner contractor C1 Coordinate and schedule through Owner’s Representative C2 Coordinate work by Owner/Tenant contractor with the Work by Contractor. 1.15 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Substantial Completion and early entry & use by Tenant: 1. The Contractor shall request the Owner Representative certify Substantial Completion (or Partial Substantial Completion at early entry areas, such as the brewery) after the Contractor inspects Work completed, listing items and value of Work not completed. 2. Obtain and submit to the Owner: a. Temporary Certificate(s) of Occupancy (also referred to as a Conditional Certificate of Occupancy) 1) Temporary Certificate of Occupancy may be required for Tenant to occupy brewery. Contractor shall verify with local code officials. 2) Temporary Certificate of Occupancy may be required for Tenant to begin food deliveries and/or bring non-construction personnel into the work space. Contractor shall verify with local code officials. b. Certification of Occupancy. c. Specific warranties, maintenance agreements, similar documents. d. Lien Waivers, other proof of payment. e. Pending insurance change-over requirements. f. Maintenance manuals and Record Drawings and Specifications. 3. Provide demonstration services for specified products to train Tenant (and Owner’s Representative at his request): a. Startup Services: 1) Test and adjust controls and safeties, including replacing damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2) Procedures and schedules related to startup, shutdown, troubleshooting, service and preventative maintenance. 3) Review and turn over 2 copies of complete “Operating and Maintenance Manual”. b. Maintenance instructions: 1) Maintenance and care instructions. 2) Recommended maintenance program. 3) Warranty requirements. 4. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed surfaces. B. Final Completion: Complete, submit before requesting Owner Representative final inspection for certification of final acceptance: 1. Final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted. 2. Consent of Surety (if applicable). 3. Any documentation requested but not submitted at Substantial Completion. Summary of General Requirements 4/08 01100 - 9 1.16 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct work as required to coordinate construction schedule and other contracts doing work in the building during the construction period stipulated. 1. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Tenant’s operations. 2. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. B. Perform requirements of the Contract in coordination with the following milestones/tasks: Action By Task Description Carmel IN SJA Issue Plans for Bidding - Contractors to have plans by noon on this date Mon 31-Mar-08 General Contractor Proposals Due - from contractor(s) by 4pm on this date Fri 18-Apr-08 GCFB Corporate "Go / No Go" decision date Mon 21-Apr-08 DCM Contract Award Mon 21-Apr-08 General Contractor Construction Start - Contractor Mobilization Date Mon 28-Apr-08 Newland Systems Brewery Panel to Arrive on Site Wed 9-Jul-08 Trane Roof Curbs on Site Wed 9-Jul-08 GCFB/DCM Schedule Verification Date - we are 90 days out, are we going to open on time? Wed 16-Jul-08 Premier Beer Cooler Installation Fri 25-Jul-08 Bright Electric Light Fixture Package deliveries begin - especially F24 or M Fri 1-Aug-08 Bright Electric All Light Fixtures to be on site (all except Mica) Fri 22-Aug-08 General Contractor Brewery Ready for Equipment by EOD - See specs for brewery readiness criteria Sun 27-Jul-08 Trane RTU's, MUA's and EF's on site Mon 28-Jul-08 Newland Systems Brewery Equipment Delivery - Equipment Delivery scheduled for 7AM Tue 29-Jul-08 Premier Custom Refrigeration Install / Acorn Bar Die Wall - All tasks performed week of: Mon 4-Aug-08 Premier KES / Bar Field Check Date - Interior framing and MEP wall rough-ins complete Mon 4-Aug-08 HSM Security Intrusion Detection Roughins at perimeter sensor locations - In Wall Mon 4-Aug-08 Summary of General Requirements 01100 - 10 4/08 General Contractor Completion of Brewery EOD - all tradework complete permanent power, gas and water Mon 4-Aug-08 General Contractor Brewery TCO - if necessary, General Contractor to verify need & accommodate inspections Mon 4-Aug-08 GCFB Brew Team Brewery Sanitation and Wort Delivery Tue 5-Aug-08 Premier Hood Installation - Premier Mon 25-Aug-08 General Contractor Turnover Tuscan Finish Areas - Tile, Trim (caulked), and ceilings in place, climatized Mon 1-Sep-08 BeautiFaux Tuscan Training dates - Union Sites Only; 2-day duration Sun 31-Aug-08 BeautiFaux or Other Tuscan Finish Application (9d) - Traffic to a minimum, no dust activities after this date Mon 1-Sep-08 EcoLab Dish Machine Delivery Date - EcoLab Tue 2-Sep-08 General Contractor Interview Trailer Arrives - Temp Power hooked up by electrical contractor Mon 8-Sep-08 Premier Cooler, Freezer, Kitchen equip. & Millwork Install - tasks performed week of: Mon 8-Sep-08 Aufderworld Audio Video Systems & Camera installation - tasks performed week of: Mon 8-Sep-08 Sign Productions Exterior Sign and Awning Installation Tue 9-Sep-08 Mica Lamp Co. Mica Light Fixture Package Arrives Wed 10-Sep-08 HSM Security Intrusion Detection and Fire Alarm Monitoring Install - tasks performed week of: Mon 15-Sep-08 Premier / GCFB NSO Booths, Chairs, Delivery and Wrought Iron Install Mon 15-Sep-08 Casework Guys Office Cabinet Install - coordinated by GCFB Mon 15-Sep-08 Nova Cabling and Telecom Install - task performed week of (plus) Mon 15-Sep-08 Premier / GCFB NSO Kitchen Startup - all equipment connections must be in place and verified prior Mon 29-Sep-08 GCFB NSO Smallware delivery Mon 29-Sep-08 HSM / G Contr./GCFB Final Install and testing of Telecom, Security, Fire Alarm, Cameras & POS Tue 30-Sep-08 NE Indoor Balancing Balancing of HVAC Systems - task performed week of: Tue 30-Sep-08 General Contractor TCO for Staff & Food Occupancy - Inspectors sign off, NSO assist with Health Dept Wed 1-Oct-08 GCFB NSO Dry Goods Delivery (Food) Thu 2-Oct-08 Summary of General Requirements 4/08 01100 - 11 Building Cx Commissioning begins - Building Cx - task performed week of: Thu 2-Oct-08 General Contractor HVAC Unit Startup - Schedule Factory Reps on this date!!! Thu 2-Oct-08 GCFB NSO Perishables Delivery (Food) Fri 3-Oct-08 GCFB NSO GCFB Pep Rally (Training Begins) Sat 4-Oct-08 General Contractor CO Final - Completed Punchlist, all inspections signed off unconditionally Fri 10-Oct-08 Opening Date Tue 14-Oct-08 Groundbreaking to Serving Burgers 169 days Actual Construction Time (Groundbreaking to TCO) 156 days END OF SECTION Summary of General Requirements 01100 - 12 4/08 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: SJA and/or Owner Representative PHONE: __________________ ATTN: PROJECT: ___________________________________ SECTION NO. ARTICLE NO. SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes No B. Does the substitution affect other trades? Yes No C. Does the manufacturer’s guarantee differ from that specified? Yes No D. If you indicated “Yes” to Items A, B, or C above, attach a thorough explanation on your company letterhead. E. If there are other differences between proposed substitution and specified product, attach a thorough explanation on your company letterhead. If differences are not noted and acknowledged in writing by Owner Representative, product must comply with specification requirements. F. The proposed substitution was used within the last 24 months on the following project: Project Name Location Owner Representative Telephone No. G. Has the proposed substitution been used on a SJA Architects or Granite City Food & Brewery project within the last 12 months? Yes No If yes, which project? All questions must be answered. Incomplete forms will not be reviewed. Include a self-addressed, stamped envelope for reply. The undersigned states that the function, appearance, and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted By: ______________________________ For Use by Design Consultant Not Accepted, Not Enough Information Signature Not Accepted, Does Not Appear to be Equal Accepted Accepted as Noted Firm Received Too Late By Address Date Remarks Date _________________________________ Phone Project Management Internet Communication Requirments 2/08 01305 - 1 SECTION 01305 PROJECT MANAGEMENT INTERNET COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES A. This section contains general information that applies to all work performed under the Contract Documents. B. Contractors are to use Internet/Web-based project management software to track and manage this project. C. Use of this project management software will not replace or change any contractual responsibilities of the construction team members. D. Contractor’s Project Manager and Superintendent shall have access to the Internet and an Internet e-mail address in order to communicate with various project team members. The Contractor shall provide within 3 days of Notice of Award the names and e-mail addresses to the Owner Representative. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330-SUBMITTALS 1.03 SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENT A. Each Contractor is required to provide at both field office and home office location from where this project is managed computer hardware and software that meet the requirements of Constructware® project management software, developed by Autodesk, Inc. of Alpharetta, GA. The Constructware® software and temporary licenses to use the project database will be provided by GCFB for the duration of the project. The hardware and software required to access this system via the Internet is to be provided by the Contractor, for the Contractor’s personnel. Licenses to the GCFB’s Constructware® database will permit access only to this project, in accordance with permission levels configured by the GCFB Constructware administrator. B. Each Contractor will have 4 hours of Constructware® training at no charge for required personnel. C. The administrator for this project is the GCFB Constructware administrator. D. The Contractor shall have high speed Internet access through an Internet provider of his/her choice. E. Software requirements are as follows: 1. A 32-bit operating system such as Windows XP or Windows 2000. Older operating systems may work, but are not advised. 2. An Internet Browser that supports HTML 1.1, Tables, Cookies, JavaScript, and Frames. Internet Explorer version 6.0 or higher. F. Hardware requirements are as follows: 01305- 2 2/08 1. Pentium based (or equivalent) workstation or laptop. 2. A broadband connection to the Internet. (or equivalent speed) G. More information on Constructware® may be obtained via the World Wide Web, at www.constructware®.com or by calling (800) 374-2260. 1.04 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AND USE A. The GCFB Administrator will administer the Constructware® user account. B. All costs associated with using this system, including computer hardware, and Internet service, are the responsibility of each Contractor. 1.05 USE BY SUBCONTRACTORS A. The Owner mandates that the Contractor utilize Constructware® project management software for formal communications with Owner Representative and design consultants on issues relating from sub-contractor through owner. The Contractors Subcontractors and Material Suppliers will NOT have direct access to the system. Each Contractor shall inform all Subcontractors of the purpose of the project management system and how it can assist them in obtaining more timely information. To that end, the Contractor shall also instruct his subcontractors on how best to transmit data for upload into the system by the Contractor. 1.06 COMMUNCIATION PROCESS A. Most project communication shall take place in the Constructware® project management system by creating and distributing documents directly within the system, or by entering manually in the system dates and descriptions of items to track over time. All documents requiring formal signatures shall be printed, and their hard copies sign and distributed. To minimize mailing and printing costs, it is the intent of GCFB to utilize the documents, inquiries, responses and directives imported into and generated by the Constructware® system as formal project documentation. B. Contractors shall enter and maintain all project related documents in Constructware®. Limited exceptions may be provided to allow specific items to be distributed in the traditional manner, outside the system. The Constructware® project management system shall be used to track and expedite processing of these items. C. Contractor’s Weekly Reports, Meeting Minutes, Punch Lists, and Requests for Information (RFI) shall be entered into the Constructware® project management system. Contractors can enter an RFI and the Architect/Engineer respond to the RFI completely within the Constructware® project management system without creating a hard copy. Support documentation in hard copy format for any document in Constructware® may be scanned into an electronic file and attached in Constructware® to document. D. Contractors are required to use a minimum 4Mega-pixel digital camera in order to photo-document job progress and upload the associated images taken on a regular basis to the Internet site. Fifteen (15) progress photos shall accompany each weekly report. Locations and content of photos shall be as directed by the Owner’s Representative and will generally include wide view pictures of substantial work areas. Project Management Internet Communication Requirments 2/08 01305 - 3 E. The software uses the Internet as its method of communication. Constructware® improves construction project success by facilitating communication and collaboration among all project partners. The centralized database is continuously updated, and this ensures that all decisions are based on consistent, real-time information. Benefits of Constructware® system include: 1. Third Party Collaboration a. All users on a project communicate and share data instantly b. Real-time message tracking reduces delays and enhances project accountability c. Increases productivity while reducing the chance for legal disputes 2. Accessibility a. View project data 24 hours a day, 365 days a year b. Access the system from any computer with current Internet browsers c. Project information is never removed—report on past projects for valuable historical data 3. Centralized Database a. All project information is kept in one database 4. Security a. Each user is assigned a unique, three-step password to access the system b. Users have pre-defined security levels, limiting their access throughout the application 5. Documents created in Constructware® include: a. RFI’s b. Transmittals c. Submittals d. Purchase Orders e. Meeting Minutes f. Punch Lists g. Change Orders h. Budgets i. Schedule of Values j. Reports Part 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 APPROVED INTERNET APPLICATION SERVICE PROVIDER (ASP) A. Extranet application service provider shall be the following (no substitution) Constructware® as provided by: AutoDesk, Inc. www.constructware.com Contact: Stacey Brown Phone: (916) 783-2950 e-mail: stacey.brown@Autodesk.com Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPROVED DOCUMENT FORMATS A. Large Format Drawings 1. Plan sheets from the Design Team will be issued as PDF Documents with the following minimum Document Properties: a. Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later Compatible b. High Quality Resolution Setting c. Plotted direct from CAD software to 22 x 34 sheet size 01305- 4 2/08 d. Approximate file sizes from 700k to 2MB per sheet. 2. Full size and half size plan sheets and shop drawings should be submitted using PDF Format using the same settings as Plan Sheets issued by the Design Team. a. Other acceptable formats include DWF and DWG (in that Order) b. As a last resort, printed documents can be scanned for upload. These typically result in much larger file sizes and dramatically lower legibility due to the wide range of scanners that can be used. Use 200dpi Color or Gray Scale scanning on all scanned sheets regardless if they are only black and white. Resulting file sizes can be expected to exceed 4MB depending on the content of the sheet. 3. Letter Size and Legal size documents may follow the same rules as above, substituting the appropriate smaller sheet size. Preferred method of document generation is always to create it from a source software or download from a manufacturers website and markup using Brava Viewer within ConstructWare. END OF SECTION Submittal Procedures 4/08 01300- 1 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included: 1. Procedures 2. Construction Progress Schedules 3. Schedule of Values 4. Shop Drawings 5. Product Data 6. Samples 7. List of Proposed Subcontractors 8. List of Proposed Suppliers 9. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 1.02 PROCEDURES A. Deliver submittals to the appropriate Reviewer via Constructware. Copy the Architect on all items submitted. B. Transmit each item making certain to include the following information 1. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier. 2. Identify pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number, and specification Section number. 3. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. 4. Provide space for Owner Representative and consultant review stamps. C. Submit initial progress schedules and schedule of values within 5 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After review by Owner Representative, revise and resubmit as required. D. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal. E. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to Work progress. Coordinate submittal of related items. F. After Primary Reviewer review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal. G. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Submit horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation, identifying first work day of each week. Submittal Procedures 01300- 2 4/08 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on Contractor’s standard form or media-driven printout. B. Format: 1. Table of Contents of this Project Manual (if using A111-1997 contract, Schedule of Values shall be itemized by contract line item.) 2. Identify each line item with number and title of the major technical sections. C. Include in each line item amount of Allowances specified in Section. For unit cost Allowances, give quantities measured from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost equal to the total for the item. D. Include as one line item, the amount of Contractor’s overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list Change Orders for each application for payment submittal. Change orders shall be added to the line item which includes the affected. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings will not be accepted for review until after they have been checked and approved by the Contractor as evidenced by his approval stamp and signature. Contractor is responsible for the content of the submitted drawings; therefore, stamps that attempt to limit the responsibility of the contractor will not be accepted. If submitted with such a stamp, the responsibilities outlined in these specifications will supersede. 1. A stamp will need to be developed to be compatible with Constructware’s online review capabilities. The GCFB Constructware administrator can assist with this. B. All shop drawings shall be submitted and returned to the Contractor in digital format. Contractor shall print documents for field and other distribution if necessary. C. Submit showing system fabrication, installation drawings including plans, elevations, section details of components, and configuration between system and adjoining systems. 1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, testing compliance, warranty, and other data; supplement manufacturers’ standard data to provide information unique to the Work. Product Data will not be accepted for review until after it has been checked and approved by the Contractor as evidenced by his approval stamp and signature. Contractor is responsible for the content of the submitted drawings; therefore, stamps that attempt to limit the responsibility of the contractor will not be accepted. If submitted with such a stamp, the responsibilities outlined in these specifications will supersede. 1. A stamp will need to be developed to be compatible with Constructware’s online review capabilities. The GCFB Constructware administrator can assist with this. B. If necessary an extra sheet shall be inserted into the Product Data information to receive review stamps from the Architect and/or his consultants. C. All product data shall be submitted and returned to the Contractor in digital format. Contractor shall print documents for field and other distribution if necessary. Submittal Procedures 4/08 01300- 3 D. Submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation start-up, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. 1.07 SAMPLES A. Submission of samples is the Contractor’s option. The following outlines the policy for handling and review of all samples: 1. All samples shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative at the address listed in these specifications. A submittal item shall be logged in Constructware indicating that a submittal item is en route and for purposes of Ball-in-Court tracking. 2. The Owner’s Representative will gladly review and comment on any item that the Contractor submits. 3. The Owner’s Representative will not return samples, rather, response will be by photo or scan, whichever is most convenient, attached to the Constructware submittal item previous logged by the Contractor. 4. Although not required, it is suggested that samples be submitted for materials that requires a skilled tradesperson to mix, apply or install, as well as, other items that are not capable of being factory quality controlled or cannot otherwise be digitally reviewed online. 5. The Owner reserves the right to reject the installation of any item that has not been approved through the submittal process. B. If submitted, submit specified manufacturer’s sample of colors, textures, and patterns for Owner Representative’s selection. Submit samples for selection of finishes within 30 days after date of Contract. C. If submitted, submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing Work. D. If submitted, include identification on each sample, giving full information. E. If submitted, submit the number specified in respective specification section; sample will be retained by Owner Representative. F. Field Samples: 1. Provide field samples of finishes as required by individual technical section. 2. Install sample complete and finished. 3. Acceptable samples in place may be retained in completed Work. 1.08 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS A. Submit a list of subcontractors who will provide Work on the Project. B. The submitted list shall include: 1. Name of Subcontractor 2. Address 3. Type of work to be provided 4. Contact list for administrative and supervisory personnel. 1.09 LIST OF PROPOSED SUPPLIERS A. Submit a list of suppliers who will provide materials, equipment or components principal to the Work. Submittal Procedures 01300- 4 4/08 B. The submitted list should include: 1. Name of supplier 2. Address 3. Equipment, material or component to be provided 4. Contact list for administrative and supervisory personnel. 1.10 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS A. Submit MSDS on all products with chemical emissions and as called for in individual technical sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Earthwork 4/08 02300 - 1 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Earthwork materials including addition materials from offsite if needed: 1) Compacted fill. 2) Backfill. 3) Subslab base fill. 4) Topsoil (note: see Section 02900). 5) Drainage fill. 6) Vapor Retarder (note: see Section 03300). 2. Perform the following: a. Temporary erosion control. b. Grading and topsoil replacement. (note: see Section 02900). c. Embankment, excavation, trenching, backfilling and compaction. d. Rock excavation without blasting unless authorized. e. Test rolling of areas to be paved. (note: see Section 02545). f. Removal and legal disposal of unused excavated materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving 2. Section 02545 - Bituminous Surface Treatment 3. Section 02900 - Landscaping 4. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Explosives: Not permitted. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. Soil Materials: ASTM D2487 2. Compaction: ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. Borrow: Material brought to a site from another location. C. Excavation: Removal and subsequent disposal of materials encountered to subgrade elevations indicated. D. Unauthorized Excavation: Removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from Owner Representative or soil engineer. Earthwork 02300 - 2 4/08 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of governing authorities and referenced portions of State Specifications. B. Testing and Inspection Services: See requirements of Section 01100. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Subsurface Conditions: Data in Document 00320 are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Owner not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by Contractor. 2. Additional test borings, other exploratory operations: Contractor's option at no cost to Owner. B. Underground Utilities: 1. General: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to contact at least 48 hours prior to conducting any underground operations to ascertain the location of all existing underground utilities. Where the 48 hour notification period has elapsed and surface markings have not been made by municipalities or public utility companies known to have underground utilities in the area, the Contractor shall contact the utility Owner in question for location before digging. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in the vicinity of any such facilities which may exist in a manner that will prevent damage thereto. Neither the Owner Representative nor the Owner warrant that the size, location, or extent of utilities shown on the plans is a complete and accurate record of existing utilities which may affect the Contractor's operations. Contractor shall repair damaged utilities at no cost to Owner. 2. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Existing Piping or Utilities: Consult utility Owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies to keep services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner. C. Dust Control: Control dust on and near work and all off-site borrow areas caused by work of this section. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent nuisance of dust to public, occupants of building, neighbors, other work on or near site. D. Soils Information: 1. Soil Bearing Capacities: Refer to structural engineer's recommendation. Allow soil engineer to observe and test soils at bottom of excavations before any filling, compaction, other construction is begun. Notify Owner Representative if conditions are less than recommended. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Earthwork Materials: 1. Acceptance: Subject to acceptance of Owner and Owner Representative. a. Imported Material: Notify Owner Representative at least four days prior to intention to import material, designate proposed borrow area, provide E/A with samples if requested. b. Acceptance tests: As required to prove quality. 2. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Comply with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP. Earthwork 4/08 02300 - 3 3. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: Those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, SP-SM, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, PT and all soils with fines over 5 percent. 4. Site Grading Material: Granular, free of debris, boulders, organic material, excessive silt and clay. If not sufficiently available on site, provide from off-site sources. 5. Fill Below Water Table: Clean, coarse granular material, less than 50 percent passing #40 sieve, and less than 5 percent passing #200 sieve. 6. Other Materials: As required for complete and proper installation, selected by Contractor subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. B. Compacted Fill and Backfill: SW, SP, or SP-SM sand (Unified Soil Classification System), clean and free of organic materials obtained from excavation and cutting at site. If not suitable or insufficiently available, provide from off-site sources. C. Subslab Base Fill for Slabs-On-Grade: Reasonably well graded sand (SW or SP), clean and free of organic material, not to exceed 3/4 inch in size. Suitable material obtained from excavation at site may be used with acceptance of Owner Representative. D. Topsoils: 1. General Requirements: Black or brown earth or growing soil; natural friable loam possession characteristics of best soils of vicinity; reasonably free from subsoil, clay lumps; stones, peat, brush, objectionable weeds, other litter subject to rot or corrosion, excess acid or alkali, other substance harmful to plant growth or hindrance to fine grading, planting or maintenance operations. 2. Salvage and stockpile a quantity sufficient to cover lawn areas with 6 inch layer. Provide additional topsoil when required. 3. If quantity of stockpiled topsoil is insufficient to complete work, provide topsoil meeting specifications from other locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine area and conditions. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work before proceeding. B. Backfilling Prior to Acceptance: Not allowed. If any work is enclosed or covered up before being reviewed and accepted by the owner’s quality control agent, uncover all such work at no additional cost to Owner, and restore to condition found at time of uncovering. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Barricade at open holes and depressions. 2. Warning lights: Post on property adjacent to or with public access. Operate from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, other facilities: Protect from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout and other hazards. 4. Cold weather: Protect bottoms of excavations from frost and freezing. Do not excavate to full depth during freezing weather unless footings or slabs can be placed immediately after completion of excavation work. Earthwork 02300 - 4 4/08 5. Damage: Immediately repair and replace as necessary to acceptance of Owner Representative and Owner, at no cost to Owner. 6. Damage involving streets, curbs, walks, utilities, other site amenities: Repair to satisfaction of Owner or authority having jurisdiction over site improvement. Furnish letter to Owner Representative from Owner or authority indicating acceptance of corrective work. B. Finish Elevations and Lines: Set and establish, using services of registered civil engineer or land surveyor. C. Data and Monument Preservation: If displaced or lost, replace to acceptance of Owner Representative at no cost to Owner. D. Dewatering of Excavations and Site Construction Area: 1. General Requirements: Remove all water, including rainwater, encountered during trench, substructure work to accepted location. 2. Remove by pumps, drains, well points, sumps and other accepted methods. 3. Continue dewatering while excavations remain open. E. Access: Maintain to adjacent areas. 3.03 EXCAVATING A. Excavated material is unclassified. B. Satisfactory Excavated Materials: Transport to and place in fill or embankment areas within limits of work. C. Unsatisfactory Excavated Materials: Excavate to a distance below grade as directed by soil engineer. Replace with satisfactory materials. D. Surplus Materials: Dispose away from Site at disposal areas arranged and paid for by Contractor. E. Rocks: Take required steps to proceed with general grading operations. Remove or excavate using means that cause no additional cost to Owner, without endangering buildings or structures on or off site. Do not use explosives. F. Drainage: Excavate and backfill in manner and sequence to provide proper drainage. G. Ditches and Gutters: 1. Cutting: Accurately cut to cross sections, grades, elevations shown. 2. Leaves, sticks, trash, debris: Prevent accumulation in excavations until completion of work. 3. Disposal of excavated materials: As shown on Drawings or directed by soil engineer. Do not deposit within 3'-0" from edge of ditch. H. Additional Borrow Required: Obtain from borrow areas selected and paid for by Contractor, and accepted by soil engineer. I. Unauthorized Excavation: 1. Under footings, foundations, or retaining walls: Fill by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Earthwork 4/08 02300 - 5 2. Footing Excavations: When acceptable to soil engineer, place clean fill material in footing excavations in 6-inch lifts. Thoroughly compact to minimum standard Proctor density. 3. Trenches: Bring to specified grade and level. Compact to receive footings. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring bottom elevation to proper position with permission of soil engineer. 4. Elsewhere: Backfill and compact as specified for authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by soil engineer. J. Stability of excavations: 1. Sides: Slope to 1:1 or flatter, unless otherwise directed by soil engineer. Where sloping not possible, shore and brace. 2. Maintain sides and slopes in safe condition until completion of backfilling. K. Shoring and bracing: 1. Materials: Provide as necessary for safety of personnel and protection of work. Comply with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down as excavation progresses. 3. Contractor is responsible for design and adequacy of shoring and bracing. L. Excavating for Structures: 1. Sequence: After general site excavating, filling, and grading are complete. 2. Tolerance: Within 0.10 feet, extending sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removing concrete form work, installation of services, other construction required, and inspection. 3. Bottom of excavation: Take care not to disturb. Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before concrete is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. 4. Areas within footing forms: Compact with motorized hand compactor to consolidate loose or scarified soils until firm "skin" results and there is no further loss of elevation. Continue until natural soils in footing forms reach standard Proctor density. 5. Correction of subgrade: Where shown or required, carry excavation below footing elevation to depth shown or as required to remove unsuitable soil. Oversize excavation with a side slope no steeper than 1:1 downwards and outwards. M. Excavating for Pavements: Cut surface to comply with cross sections, elevations, and grades. N. Excavation for Trenches: 1. Width: Uniform width required for particular item to be installed, wide enough to provide ample working room. 2. Clearance: 6 inch to 9 inch on both sides of pipe or conduit. 3. Depth of trenches for piping: Carry depth to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. 4. Bottom of trenches: Beyond building perimeter, keep sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze- ups. 5. Pipes, conduit 5 inch or less in nominal size, flat-bottomed multiple-duct conduit units: Do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. 6. Pipes, conduit larger than 5 inch in nominal size, tanks, other mechanical/electrical work indicated to receive subbase: Excavate to subbase depth indicated or, if not indicated, to 6 inch below bottom of work to be supported. 7. Exterior water-bearing piping (water, steam, condensate, drainage): Except as otherwise indicated, excavate so top of piping is not less than 7.0 feet below finished grade. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. Earthwork 02300 - 6 4/08 3.04 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. General Requirements: For each classification listed, place acceptable soil material as specified in Part 2.0 in layers to required subgrade elevations. B. Backfilling: Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of work permits, but not until: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing and waterproofing. 2. Inspection, testing, acceptance, recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete form work. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, backfilling voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Placement of horizontal bracing or permanent structure on horizontally supported walls. C. Ground Surface Preparation: 1. Vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious matter: Remove from ground surface prior to placement of fills. 2. Sloped surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal: Plow, strip, or break up so fill material will bond with existing surface. 3. Existing ground surface with density less than specified under "compacting": Break up, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content. Compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placing and Compacting: 1. Loose depth of layers: Not more than 8 inch. 2. Moisture content: Moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. 3. Density: Compact each layer to required percentage maximum density for area, using heavy vibratory rollers or motorized hand compactors. 4. Placement on surfaces that are not muddy, frozen, or containing frost or ice: Place evenly adjacent to structures, and to required elevations. 5. Wedging action of backfill against structures: Prevent by carrying material uniformly around structure to same approximate elevation in each lift. 6. Basement, other underground walls having structural floors over them: Do not backfill until structural floors are in place, with sufficient strength to support walls. 3.05 PLACEMENT OF VAPOR RETARDER A. General Requirements: 1. Install under granular cushion for concrete floor slabs. Overlap sheets and seal joints with tape in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 GRADING A. General Requirements: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas: 1. Finished surfaces: Smooth to within specified tolerance. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown on Drawings, or between such points and existing grades. 2. Change of slope indicated on Drawings: Construct rolled transition section with minimum radius of approximately 8'-0", unless adjacent construction will not permit such transition, or if such transition defeats positive control of drainage. Earthwork 4/08 02300 - 7 B. Grading Outside Building Lines: 1. Areas adjacent to buildings: Grade to achieve drainage away from structures, and to prevent ponding. 2. Surfaces in general: Finish free from irregular surface changes. 3. Surface of areas under walks: Shape to line, grade, and cross-section, within 0.10 feet of required subgrade elevation. 4. Surface of areas under pavement: Shape to line, grade, and cross-section, within 0.05 feet of required subgrade elevation. 3.07 COMPACTING A. General Requirements: Control soil compaction during construction to provide minimum percentage density as specified by ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698. B. Density of Soil Material Compacted at Optimum Moisture Content: Provide as accepted by soil engineer: 1. Structures, footings, foundations: Top 8 inch of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at standard Proctor density. 2. Lawn and unpaved areas: Top 8 inch of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at standard Proctor density. Upper 12 inch of filled areas, or natural soils exposed by excavating, at standard Proctor density. 3. Walks: Top 8 inch of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at standard Proctor density. 4. Pavements: Top 8 inch of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at standard Proctor density. C. Moisture Control: 1. Subgrade or layer of soil material to be moisture-conditioned before compacting: Uniformly apply water to surface to prevent free water appearing on surface during or after compacting operations. 2. Material too wet to permit compacting to specified density: Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry. Material may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to satisfactory value as determined by moisture-density relation tests accepted by soil engineer. 3.08 PLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL A. Grade subgrade to smooth, even grade approved by Owner Representative after fill has been placed to subgrade level. Spread 6 inch layer of topsoil from stockpile evenly, and blade to smooth finish with allowable tolerance of 0.05 foot from grades on Drawings. Till to depth of 9 inch with rototiller or other approved equipment. After tilling, remove rocks and rock fragments by means of human or mechanical rock pickers or rakes. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Secure soil engineer's inspection and acceptance of subgrades and fill layers before subsequent construction is permitted. B. Testing: Provide at least the following to the acceptance of the soil engineer: 1. Paved areas: One field density test for every 2,000 square feet, but not less than three tests; 2. Compacted fill layers: One field density test for every 2,000 square feet of overlaying paved area, but not less than three tests. C. Unsatisfactory Test or Inspection Results: Provide additional compacting and testing under provisions of Section 01100. Earthwork 02300 - 8 4/08 3.10 PROTECTION A. Newly Graded Areas: Protect from traffic and erosion. Keep free from trash and weeds. B. Settled, Eroded, Rutted Areas: Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances. C. Completed Compacted Areas Disturbed by Subsequent Construction Operations or Adverse Weather: Scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.11 CERTIFICATION A. Upon completion of work, and as a condition for its acceptance, soils engineer shall deliver to Owner Representative a written report which: 1. Certifies that compaction requirements have been obtained. 2. States area of fill or embankment. 3. States compaction density obtained. 4. States type or classification of fill material placed. END OF SECTION Irrigation System 2/08 02810 - 1 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Design, construction, and testing of a complete and functioning irrigation system for the designated area. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Sanitation Foundation: 1. Standard #14 – Polyethylene Pipe Material B. ASTM: 1. D2239 – Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe 2. D1248 – Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C510 – Standard for Double Check Valve Backflow – Prevention Assembly 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Programmable for automatic operation. 2. Provide for seasonal drainage by the replacement of water with compressed air. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Coverage: Minimum 1 inch per hour for all locations within the Irrigation Area. a. Tolerances: + 1/8 inch 2. Meet manufacturer’s pressure requirements for each head. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit description and specifications for each system component. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide scaled layout Drawing indicating size and dimensioned location of all components. 2. Match scale of site drawing that shows Irrigation Area. 3. Provide installation detail Drawings. 4. Show coverage area for each head. C. Design Data: 1. Provide calculations which indicate the following: a. Anticipated discharge rate and residual pressure at each head. Irrigation System 02810 - 2 2/08 b. Anticipated flow rate and head loss in each pipe segment. D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: 1. Provide installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each component. 2. Provide instructions for overall system operation. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Provide Field Reports describing the results of all testing performed under PART 3. 2. Provide a reproducible construction record of the layout drawing that has been corrected to reflect the final installation of the system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demonstrate that the designer has successfully completed the design of 5 systems of similar size and type within the past 3 years. B. Demonstrate that the installer has successfully completed at least 5 systems of similar size and type within the past 3 years. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Area to be covered by this system is shown on Civil drawings. B. System conditions at the nearest hydrant to the point of connection to the in-place system are as follows: 1. Normal Static Pressure: 60 psi. 2. Measured Flow: 1 gpm at 50 psi (residual). 3. Calculated Flow: 1 gpm at 50 psi (residual). 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Do not begin installation until site grading has been completed. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide full warranty on components and labor for the longer of the following periods: 1. One year from project substantial completion. 2. The plant establishment period. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish 10 percent additional of each head type provided for maintenance stock. B. Maintenance Service: 1. Perform all system start-ups during warranty period. 2. Perform first winterization of system during warranty period. Irrigation System 2/08 02810 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Rainbird Irrigation system and controls. B. Hunter Irrigation system and controls. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Automatic Controller: 1. Hunter B. Heads: 1. Rainbird 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Polyethylene Pipe: 1. Flexible, nontoxic. 2. Material: NSF Standard No. 14. 3. Conform to ASTM D2239 and D1248. 4. Minimum working pressure rating: 80 psi. 5. Continuously and permanently mark with manufacturer’s name, material, size, and schedule. B. Pipe Fittings: 1. Plastic type PVC or nylon insert. 2. Brass saddle tees. 3. Clamps: Stainless steel, worm-gear type. C. Electric Control Valves: 1. Toro, Series 252 Automatic, or equal. 2. Globe/ angle configuration with female pipe thread inlet and outlet. 3. Manual flow control. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Carson Brooks, or equal. 2. Material: Plastic. 3. 11 3/4-inch by 17-inch rectangular. 4. 10-inch round. E. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Toro S700 Series, or equal. 2. Gear-driven rotors. F. Communication Circuitry: 1. Electrical Control Wires: a. No. 14 gage, single-strand, signal wire. b. UF direct bury. G. Quick Coupling Valves: 1. Toro 474-00 1-inch Standard Series, or equal. Irrigation System 02810 - 4 2/08 H. Backflow Preventer: 1. Manufacturer/Model No.: 38808 2. Size: 2 inches 3. Type: Watts 800 I. Meter: Approved by Owner. J. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. 1/2-inch to 3 inches a. Polyethelene Pressure Pipe Tubing: AWWA C901 2. 4-inch to 8-inch a. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900 b. PVC Pressure Fittings: AWWA C907 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, verify that site grading has been completed and that no surface or underground location conflicts with the proposed system exist. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The system shall irrigate all landscaped areas and planting beds within the property lines, contract limit lines and the adjacent landscaped public lands along street or streets. B. Connection to Existing Systems: 1. Pressure Tap: a. Install tap in location shown on the Drawings. b. Use approved tapping machine designed specifically for tapping under pressure. c. Install tapping sleeve and gate valve as part of assembly. d. Install blocking as required. 2. Cut-In Connection: a. Isolate segment of pipe to be cut and drain water from the line. b. Connect tee and sleeve assembly to pipe ends. c. Install blocking as required. 3. Connect to In-place Fitting: a. Isolate segment of in-place pipe and remove blocking as required. b. Remove plug and drain water from the line. c. Install blocking as required. C. Install all system components in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. D. Install controller, meter, and backflow preventer in weatherproof, lockable, above-ground enclosure. E. Excavation and Backfill: 1. Provide excavation and backfill as required for proper installation of the system. 2. Remove all rocks and other unsuitable debris from the backfill material prior to placement. 3. Install all pipe with a minimum of 16 inches of cover from the final grade. Irrigation System 2/08 02810 - 5 4. Place backfill material in 6-inch layers and compact. 5. Backfill pipe trenches when pipe is cool to avoid excessive contraction. F. Pipe Installation: 1. Cap and secure pipe stubs at the end of each workday to prevent entrance of foreign materials. 2. Double-clamp all main line connections. 3. Crossings: a. Enclose pipe and wire installations under roadways, walks, and other permanent fixtures in PVC conduit. b. Maintain minimum 18-inch vertical separation between bottom of fixtures and top of PVC conduit. 4. Flush pipes prior to head installation. G. Wire Installation: 1. Install wire in same trench as piping. 2. Provide additional 2 feet of wire at each electric valve connection. 3. Provide additional 4 feet of wire at controller. 4. Waterproof all underground splices with wire connector and direct burial splice kit. H. Valve and Boxes: 1. Install automatic electric valves in rectangular boxes. 2. Install quick coupling valves and sectional valves in 10-inch round boxes. 3. Install major wire splices in 12-inch rectangular boxes. 4. Center valves within the box in an upright position. 5. Provide minimum 2-inch space between the top of the valve and the bottom of the box cover. 6. Install each valve on 4 inches of compacted aggregate material. 7. Install quick coupling valves with a 1-inch galvanized, 3-elbow swing joint. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Operate system for a minimum of 2 hours. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust heads to meet performance requirements. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation of completed system to Owner and Owner Representative. B. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of on-site instruction and training for the operation, maintenance, and winterization of the system to the Owner’s personnel. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect heads during topsoiling, turf establishment, and plant installation. END OF SECTION 2/08 02840 - 1 SECTION 02840 SITE ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Walk, road, and parking accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Bicycle rack. b. Traffic signage: 1) Sign posts. 2) Handicap parking signage. 3) Miscellaneous signage. 4) Concrete base. 5) PVC sleeve. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 - Earthwork 2. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving 3. Section 02545 - Bituminous Surface Treatment 4. Section 02900 - Landscaping 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI: 1. A117.1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current product data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including plans, elevations, sections details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and adjoining system. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color samples with product data and shop drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide site accessory units as coordinated assemblies made from components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer for each system. 2. Manufacturer: Five (5) years experience in the manufacture of site accessories. 3. Contractor: Use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect site accessories from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver products to Site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's name and brand. C. Damaged Materials: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. 1.08 WARRANTY A. As indicated for individual accessory system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALK, ROAD, AND PARKING ACCESSORIES A. Bicycle Rack: 1. Accepted Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Model #BL1430 by Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc., Silver Lake, IN b. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by Owner Representative. 2. Components: Single loop to be embedded into concrete; plastic coated 1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch steel; rust, crack chip, peel, warp and rot resistant, flame resistant and self-extinguishing. 3. Finish: Color selected from manufacturer's standard colors (4 minimum). 4. Warranty: 5 years. 2.02 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE A. General: Type: 12 inch by 18 inch, 0.063 aluminum, or other sizes as indicated on Drawings, with standard No. 1 reflective sheet surfacing. B. Handicap Parking Sign: Comply with federal regulations and attached detail. C. Miscellaneous Traffic Signage: As indicated on Drawings. D. Concrete: See Section 02751. 2/08 02840 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE A. Installation: 1. Sign Posts: Set in a base 10 inch in diameter and 30 inch deep, made of concrete, as specified in Section 02751. 2. When signage is to be installed in a concrete slab (or area), the Contractor shall furnish and install a 6 inch diameter PVC sleeve of equal length to the proposed concrete thickness prior to placement of the concrete. 3. Signage: a. Identification Devices: Install plumb, true, square in neat, rigid, and substantial manner. b. Handicapped Parking Sign: Install as shown on the drawings, or if not indicated, install 1 per handicap parking space. B. Clean Up: After installation, clean all surfaces. END OF SECTION Landscaping 2/08 02900 - 1 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Soil preparation: 1) Topsoil. 2) Soil amendments: a) Lime. b) Peat humus. c) Manure. d) Top dressing. e) Commercial fertilizer. b. Trees, shrubs, plants, and ground covers: 1) Trees. 2) Shrubs. 3) Ground covers. 4) Plants and bulbs. c. Lawns and grasses: 1) Seed. 2) Sod. d. Landscape accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Weed barrier. 2) Landscape rock. 3) Anti-erosion mulch. 4) Wood chip mulch. 5) Landscape woodwork. 6) Wrapping. 7) Stakes and guys. e. Loose-laid concrete unit retaining wall. f. Pond liner and fountain. g. Rock features. 2. Perform the following: a. Finish grading. (see Section 02300) b. Preparation of topsoil. c. Initial maintenance of landscape materials. d. Pruning and relocation of existing plant materials. e. Reconditioning existing lawns. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02200 - Site Preparation 2. Section 02300 - Earthwork 3. Section 04200 - Masonry Units Landscaping 02900 - 2 2/08 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z60.1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Plant and Material Certifications: 1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. 2. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. 3. Label data substantiating that plant, trees, shrubs and planting materials comply with specified requirements. 4. Seed vendor's certified statement for each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, percentages by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species. B. Maintenance Instructions: Type-written instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period(s). C. Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Nursery: Ten years experience in the growth of landscaping materials. 2. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of landscaping. 3. Supervisor: Thoroughly experienced in and familiar with materials, procedures, requirements for completion of work. B. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: 1. General: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. 2. Labeling: a. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. b. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. 3. Inspection: The Owner Representative may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Landscaping 2/08 02900 - 3 Owner Representative retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site. C. Pre-installation Meetings: If requested, the installer shall meet with Owner Representative and Landscaping Supplier's Representative prior to the start of installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Protection: Protect materials before, during and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 2. Damages resulting from work: Immediately repair or replace as necessary to acceptance of Owner Representative at no additional cost to Owner. B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. C. Lawns and Grasses: 1. Seed: Deliver in original packages bearing a guaranteed analysis. 2. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips. D. Trees and Shrubs: 1. General: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Owner Representative. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery. 2. Coordination: Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. 3. Container-grown Stock: Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. B. Environmental: Work within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. C. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. D. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Owner Representative before planting. Landscaping 02900 - 4 2/08 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required: 1. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 2. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. B. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner Representative. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Lawns, Trees, Shrubs and Ground Cover: Warranty for a period of one year after date of substantial completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer's control. If weather or other conditions prevent installation before substantial completion of project is granted, warranty shall be from written date of acceptance of landscaping installation, which will not be unreasonably withheld. In the absence of written acceptance, warranty period shall not extend beyond two years from substantial completion of building. B. Replacement: Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period; unless, in opinion of Owner Representative, it is advisable to extend warranty period for another full growing season. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL PREPARATION MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Existing topsoil may be reused only with acceptance of Owner Representative. 2. Additional topsoil required: Fertile, friable natural sandy loam, without admixture of subsoil material, obtained not more than two or three feet from top of deposit, from well-drained arable site; live soil containing normal amount of decomposed organic matter, free from heavy alkaline soil, coarse sand, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, lumps, sticks, other foreign matter. B. Soil Amendments: 1. Lime: Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates with a minimum of 30 percent magnesium carbonates, ground so that not less than 90 percent passes a 10- mesh sieve and not less than 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve. (Note to Owner Representative: Use where there are a lot of oaks to neutralize soil). 2. Peat Humus: Finely divided peat, so completely decomposed and free of fibers that its biological identity is lost. Provide in granular form, free of hard lumps and with pH range suitable for intended use. 3. Sand: Clean, washed sand, free of toxic materials. 4. Sawdust: Rotted sawdust, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic substances and with 7.5 pounds of nitrogen uniformly mixed into each cubic yard of sawdust. Landscaping 2/08 02900 - 5 5. Manure: Well rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or ingredients harmful to plants. 6. Top Dressing: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs, or plants and consisting of one of the following: a. Shredded hardwood. 7. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients: a. For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash. b. For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than 1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet of lawn area and not less than 4 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent potassium. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth; at least 50 percent of nitrogen to be organic form. 2.02 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVERS A. Quality: Provide nursery plant stock of size, genus, species and variety shown and/or scheduled complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock. B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. Provide balled and burlapped stock. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock. C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous shrubs. Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. D. Coniferous and Broad leafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown: 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. 2. For small evergreens, container grown evergreens will be acceptable, subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. E. Ground Cover: Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size shown or listed. 2.03 LAWNS AND GRASSES A. Seed: 1. Products: First line product of Scott, Northrup King, or accepted equal. Landscaping 02900 - 6 2/08 2. Seed: Fresh clean "new crop" seed, 85 percent to 95 percent germination, free of noxious weed seeds, recleaned, treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing. 3. Lawn Mixture: Types and proportions of seeds recommended for climate and conditions, containing minimum 60 percent Kentucky Bluegrass, 30 percent Creeping Red Fescue, maximum 1 percent weed seed, 3.1 percent inert matter. B. Sod: 1. General: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old, free of weeds and undesirable plants, large stones, other material that might be detrimental to development of sod or future maintenance; and machine cut to pad thickness of 3/4 inch (plus or minus 1/4 inch), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant). 2. Pads: Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5 percent deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10 percent of pad will be rejected. 3. Content: At least 70 percent Kentucky Blue Grass. 4. Height: Mowed to height not to exceed 3 inch. 2.04 LANDSCAPE ACCESSORIES A. Weed Barrier: Filtration/Separation Fabric: Water permeable filtration fabric of fiberglass or polypropylene fabric. B. Landscape Rock: Water-worn, hard, durable gravel, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, and of following size range and color: 1. Size Range: a. Standard planting areas: 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4 inch minimum. b. Pond area: ‘Rock Mulch’ around pond rim: 6” to 12” native rock. c. Large boulders in front of entrance to be supplied by landscaper. Boulders to be 30” – 35” wide by 36” – 42” tall. 2. Color: a. Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Owner Representative. C. Anti-Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. D. Wood Mulch: Hardwood shredded mulch. E. Landscape Woodwork: 1. General: Of sizes shown and following wood species: a. Brown Southern Pine, pressure treated with water-borne preservative for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP- 22. 2. Stakes: Provide wood stakes of the same species, 2 inch by 2 inch by 24 inch long and with galvanized or aluminum nails for anchoring headers and edging. F. Wrapping: Tree-wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, designed to prevent border damage and winter freezing. G. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or redwood, free of knot holes and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire, not lighter than 12 gage with zinc- coated turnbuckles. Provide not less than 1/2 inch diameter Landscaping 2/08 02900 - 7 rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size to protect tree trunks from damage by wires. 2.05 CONCRETE RETAINING WALL SYSTEM A. Acceptable Wall Materials: Allan Block, Anchor Wall Systems, Keystone, or equal, approved in advance by Owner Representative. B. General Requirements: 1. Compressive strength: Minimum 28 day 3,000 psi in accordance with ASTM C90; adequate freeze- thaw protection with maximum absorption rate of 5 percent.. 2. Exterior dimensions: Uniform, consistent; maximum dimensional deviations 1/2 inch (not including textured face); average facial area of .75 square feet. 3. Retaining wall units: Provide minimum 100 pounds total weight per square foot of wall face area. Fill contained within units may be considered 80 percent effective weight. C. Base Material: Compacted sands, gravel, concrete as indicated on Drawings. Minimum 6 inch compacted base. D. Unit and Fill Drainage: 1. Free draining, granular material; gradation to include material to 3/8 inch with fine sand limited to 5 percent passing #200 sieve, and less than 50 percent passing #40 sieve. 2. Extend drainage fill minimum 12 inch behind wall to within one foot of final grade. Cap backfill with impervious material. E. Backfill: 1. Native material unless otherwise specified. When using geogrid for slope reinforcement, comply with standards set by grid manufacturer's guidelines. 2. Where additional fill required, submit sample and specifications to Owner Representative for approval. F. Retaining Wall Unit Finish: Rock finish; color: natural tan. 2.06 POND SYSTEM A. Pond and fountain information: 1. Pond should have a vinyl liner. 2. Pond fountain equipment: a. Aquascape Pro Signature Series™ Skimmer 6.0 w/ skimmer lid to match landscaping rock. b. AquascapePRO 3000 Pump c. Oase 1” Frothy Professional Nozzle and accessory system (water spray height to reach 60” min). B. Substitutions: Do not make substitutions. If specified pond material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Owner Representative, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. Landscaping 02900 - 8 2/08 B. Substitutions: Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Owner Representative, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. C. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Owner Representative's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments as may be required. B. Planting Soil: 1. Subsoil: After subgrade is established and accepted, loosen to depth of 4 inches (min.); remove sticks, stones, roots and rubbish; smooth over to remove ridges and depressions so surface is parallel to finished grade. 2. Topsoil: Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. 3. Soil Admendments: a. Mix Lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer; prevent lime from contacting roots of acid- loving plants. b. Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer (other than that constituting a portion of complete fertilizers) directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling. c. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. C. Planting Beds: 1. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches using a culti-mulcher or similar equipment. Remove stones measuring over 1-1/2 inches in any dimension, sticks, rubbish and other extraneous matter. 2. Spread mixture of planting soil and soil admendments to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of planting soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer, then place remainder of the planting soil. D. Lawns and Grasses: 1. Preparation: Prepare subsoil and lawn areas just prior to actual seeding. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of top soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil. Add specified soil amendments and mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil. 2. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil for lawn planting as follows: Till to a depth of not less than 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter: Landscaping 2/08 02900 - 9 a. If undisturbed areas contain grass or turf, prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. Dispose of such material outside of Owner's property. Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil being prepare for lawns. 3. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded. 4. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mix into upper 2 inches of topsoil. Delay application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days. 5. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. 6. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 7. Restore lawn areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise disturbed, after fine grading and prior to planting. 3.02 TREES, SHRUBS, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER A. Planting Trees and Shrubs: 1. Balled and Burlapped: Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill. 2. Container: Set container grown stock, as specified, for balled burlapped stock, except cut cans on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove after partial backfilling so as not to damage root balls. B. Backfilling: When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball; work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. C. Mulching, Pruning and Protection of Trees and Shrubs: 1. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. 2. Mulch pits, trenches, and planted areas. Provide not less than 2 inch thickness of mulch, and work into top of backfill and finish level with adjacent finish grades. 3. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Owner Representative, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees, if any. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. 4. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. 5. Wrap tree trunks of 2 inches caliper and larger. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. 6. Guy and stake trees immediately after planting, as indicated. D. Planting Ground Cover: 1. Space ground cover plants as indicated or scheduled, or if not shown or scheduled, not more than 24 inches on center. 2. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils. 3. Mulch areas between ground cover plants; place not less than 2 inches thick. Landscaping 02900 - 10 2/08 3.03 LAWNS AND GRASSES A. Seeding New Lawns: 1. Seed at time favorable to growth of grass, only at time acceptable to Owner Representative. Do not seed after rain unless ground surface thoroughly loosened. 2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. 3. Sow seed using a spreader or seeding machine. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour. Distribute seed evenly over entire area by sowing equal quantity in 2 directions at right angles to each other. 4. Sow not less than one pound of seed per one hundred fifty square feet. 5. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with a fine spray. 6. Protect seeded slopes against erosion. B. Sodding New Lawns: 1. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. 2. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 3. Anchor sod on slopes with wood pegs to prevent slippage. 4. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. C. Reconditioning Existing Lawns: 1. Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor's operations including storage of materials and equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition existing lawn areas where minor regrading is required. 2. Provide new topsoil, as required, to fill low spots and meet new finish grades. 3. Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly to provide a satisfactory planting bed. 4. Water newly planted lawn areas and keep moist until new grass is established. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK A. Weed Barrier: Lay film continuously over compacted subgrade prior to placing gravel. Overlap edges 4 inches at joints between sheets. B. Landscape Rock: Place gravel beds where indicated. Compact soil subgrades before placing gravel. Install to depth shown on drawings, or if not shown, 2 inches. All non seed/sod areas around building to have rock mulch in planting areas. C. Woodchip Mulch: Install to depth shown on drawings, or if not shown, 2 inches. Install around individual trees. D. Landscape Woodwork: 1. Install wood headers and edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes spaced not more than 3 feet on center, and driven at least 1 inch below top elevation of header or edging. Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging, and clinch point of each nail. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF RETAINING WALL A. Excavation: Excavate to lines, grades indicated on Drawings. Landscaping 2/08 02900 - 11 B. Foundation Soil Preparation: Excavate as required for base and footing dimensions indicated or as directed by Owner Representative. Verify that foundation soil strength meets or exceeds assumed design strength. Report results to Owner Representative. Remove and replace soil not meeting required strength. C. Base: Place as indicated, with minimum thickness of 6 inch: 1. Locate top of base to allow bottom wall units to be buried to proper depths. 2. Install on undisturbed native soils or suitable replacement fills. 3. Compact base with mechanical plate compactor to 95 percent standard proctor. 4. Top 3 inch may be replaced with non-reinforced concrete topping. When masonry reinforcement technique is used, check footing design in that section for further details. D. Unit Installation: 1. Place first course of concrete on prepared base with raised lip facing out and front edges together. Check units for level and alignment as they are placed. 2. Ensure full contact with base. Take care to develop straight lines and smooth curves on base course as per wall layout. 3. Fill cavities in and around block with "unit fill", and compact. Backfill front and back of base row to firmly lock in place. Check again for level and alignment. Sweep away excess material from tops of units. 4. Install next course on top of base row. Position blocks to be offset from seams of blocks below. Perfect "running bond" is not essential, but a 3 inch average minimum offset is recommended. Check each block for proper alignment and level. Fill cavities in and around block with "unit fill", and compact. Add drain fill to 12 inch depth behind block. Backfill remaining space behind second course with on site soils; compact to 95 percent standard proctor. 5. Lay up each subsequent course as above. Repeat procedure to extend of wall height. 3.06 POND SYSTEM A. Pond and fountain installation: 1. Install vinyl liner to size indicated on drawings. Include area of large rocks. 2. Pond fountain equipment: a. Connect to ¾” diameter water line and timer control (water supply by plumbing contractor). b. ‘Rock Mulch’ around pond rim: 6” to 12” native granite rock. 3. Landscaping plants should be used to hide the pump enclosure. 3.07 CLEANUP, MAINTENANCE, AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. 2. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. B. Trees, Shrubs, and Plants: 1. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants until final acceptance, but in no case, less than 60 days after substantial completion of planting. 2. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3. Water on a weekly basis to achieve an equivalent of 1 inch of rain per week minimum. Landscaping 02900 - 12 2/08 C. Lawns and Grasses: 1. Maintain lawns for not less than 60 days after substantial completion, and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. 2. If seeded in fall and not given full 60 days of maintenance, or if not considered acceptable at that time, continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn is established. 3. Sodded lawns, not less than 30 days after substantial completion. 4. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas. 3.08 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Inspection: When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, E/A will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. B. Rejected Work: When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-inspected by Owner Representative and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. See landscape drawings. B. Landscaping notes: 1. All parking islands shall have two trees equally spaced, shrubs and mulch (no sod) with sprinklers on a separate zone for frequent watering. 2. All trees to have mulch tree rings. 3. All landscape areas around building should have rock. 4. All planting beds not around building in sod areas should have mulch. 5. See electrical drawings for locations and types of lights used within landscaping around building. Ground lighting is to form scallops or shadows on building wall from plantings. Consider plant mature height when selecting. Lights to be located 20” from building. END OF SECTION Formwork 2/08 03100 - 1 SECTION 03100 FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Formwork (Contractor’s choice): 1) Dimensional wood. 2) Plywood. 3) Metal panel formwork. b. Formwork accessories including but not limited to: 1) Form release agent. 2) Form ties. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 – Earthwork 2. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 3. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork,” publication ACI 347-R. 2. U.S. Product Standard PS-1 “A-C or BB High Density Overlaid Concrete Form,” Class I. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ACI: American Concrete Institute. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Design, engineer, and construct formwork required by the work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including installation instructions, and maintenance and cleaning recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication and erection of forms for specific finish concrete surfaces. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor: Six satisfactory projects of size and scope of this work. Formwork 03100 - 2 2/08 2. Personnel: For actual installation of formwork, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Codes and Standards: Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in referenced standards. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions. Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Form Release Agent: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Debond by L & M Construction Chemical Company, Omaha, NE (402.453.6600). B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. React S by Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Company, Kansas City, KS (800.348.7351). 2. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Footing Forms: Steel or wood (2-inch nominal thickness) unless otherwise specifically accepted by Owner Representative. B. Stair Edge Forms: 2-inch nominal lumber or steel forms specifically designed for such use. C. Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, providing continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces, in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and conform to joint system indicated on Drawings, with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection. 1. Overlaid plywood complying with U. S. Product Standard PS-1 “A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form,” Class I. 2. Board Form: a. Stringers: Nominal 2-inch lumber. D. Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, other acceptable material; lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side for tight fit. E. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Formwork 2/08 03100 - 3 F. Radius Bends: Flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards as required. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the concrete surface. H. Form Sealers: Accepted quality of respective kinds. I. Form Release Agents: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. J. Grout: One part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts sand. K. Other Materials: Form release agents, etc. (not specifically described) as selected by Contractor subject to advance acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that formwork may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before concrete is placed. 2. Contact Surfaces: Coat with form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. 3. Re-use of Forms: Clean off concrete matrix residue; repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. a. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material: Not acceptable for exposed surfaces. b. New Form Coating Compound: Apply as specified for new formwork. c. Forms Extended for Successive Concrete Placement: Thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and latence, and tighten forms to close joints. Align, secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use “patched” forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Owner Representative. Formwork 03100 - 4 2/08 3.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General Requirements: 1. Construct to sizes, shapes, lines, dimensions shown; to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb finished structures. 2. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required. B. Plywood Forms: Nail directly to studs, minimizing number of joints. Make panel joints tight butt joints, edges true and square. C. Board Form Finish: 1. Construct form stringers, sized and carefully fitted to desired form; segmental backing; D. Keyways, Reglets, Recesses, etc.: Kerf wood inserts to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Exposed Corners and Edges: Chamfer using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Steep Slope: Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. G. Support vertical and lateral loads until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. H. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: 1. Set to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. 2. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. I. Joints: 1. Form joints: a. Solidly butt and provide backup to prevent leakage of cement paste. b. Wet to prevent joints opening up before concrete placed. 2. Construction joints: a. Make, locate as shown on Drawings or so as to not impair strength or appearance of construction. b. Keys: Form in cold joints as required. J. Removal Provisions: 1. Cast-in-place concrete surfaces: Design formwork to be readily removable without causing impact, shock or damage. 2. Fabricate for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 3. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may cause damage. K. Temporary Openings: 1. Where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. 2. Locate on forms at inconspicuous locations. 3. Securely brace, set tight to prevent loss of concrete mortar. L. Installation of Embedded Items: Formwork 2/08 03100 - 5 1. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. 2. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers. M. Provisions for Other Trades: 1. Provide openings, recesses, and chases to accommodate work of other trades. 2. Determine size and location from trades providing items. 3. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. N. Finishes: 1. Use materials selected by Owner Representative. 2. Provide form surfaces free of irregularities, dents, sags or holes when used for permanently exposed surfaces. O. Site Tolerances: 1. Horizontally: 1 in 200. 2. Vertically: 1 in 500. P. Form Coating Material: 1. Application: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Thinning Agent: Type, amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer’s directions. 3. Apply form release agent, if used, before reinforcement placed. 4. Excess: Do not allow to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Q. Removal of Forms: 1. Timing: a. General: Remove after concrete has reached sufficient strength to maintain designed shape, to resist superimposed live, dead, and construction loads. b. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete: Remove after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. c. Formwork supporting weight of concrete: Do not remove in less than 14 days, and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. d. Form facing material: May be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 2. Nails, Tie Wires, Form Ties: Cut flush, leave all surfaces smooth and clean. 3. Spreader Ties on Exposed Concrete: a. Remove or snap off inside wall surface, point up and rub resulting pockets to match surrounding areas. b. Holes resulting from use of spreader rods and sleeve nuts: Flush using water, solidly pack throughout wall thickness with cement grout applied under pressure with grouting gun. Apply grout immediately after removing forms. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In-Place Concrete: Test field-cured specimen’s representative of concrete location or members. Formwork 03100 - 6 2/08 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Retighten forms, bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.06 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps or debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in a neat and orderly condition. B. Remove formwork and forms from site after completion of work. END OF SECTION Concrete Reinforcement 2/08 03200 - 1 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Reinforcing steel: 1) Rebar (continuous). 2) Dowel. 3) Tie. b. Slab reinforcement: 1) Welded wire fabric. 2) Fibrous reinforcing. c. Concrete reinforcement accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Steel wire. 2) Reinforcement supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03100 - Formwork 2. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures,” publication ACI 315-65 2. “Placing Reinforcing Bars,” CRSI 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ACI: American Concrete Institute B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials C. CRSI: Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: One sepia, one blue line for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI referenced standard showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Concrete Reinforcement 03200 - 2 2/08 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Industry Standard: Comply with pertinent recommendations. B. Testing: Comply with requirements of Section 01100. Cooperate with testing laboratory in obtaining and handling samples. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed, new, free from rust and kinks. B. Slab Reinforcement: 1. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric. C. Concrete Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain cold-drawn steel. 2. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, other devices for spacing, supporting, fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place; wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, unless otherwise acceptable. 3. Supports for Slabs-on-Grade: Supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 4. Supports For Exposed-to-View Concrete Surfaces Where Legs are in Contact with Forms: ACI 315- 65 legs plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2). 5. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of concrete reinforcement, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that Concrete Reinforcement may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Surface Preparation: Clean off loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Concrete Reinforcement 2/08 03200 - 3 3.03 FIELD FABRICATION A. General Requirements: Fabricate in strict accordance with Drawings, approved Shop Drawings, and referenced standards. B. Bar No 8. and Smaller: Bend cold around pin having diameter not less than 6 times minimum thickness of bar. C. Bar No 9. and Larger: Bend cold around pin 8 times minimum thickness of bar. D. Bends for Stirrups and Ties: Make around pin not less than twice the diameter of bar. E. Not Permitted: 1. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings or otherwise required. 2. Bending or straightening steel in manner to injure material. 3.04 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Industry Standard: Comply with CRSI referenced standard. B. Displacement: Accurately position, support, secure against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. C. Support: Locate and support by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Do not support footing reinforcing on bricks or concrete blocks. D. Clear Space Between Bars: Not less than 1-1/2 times nominal diameter of round bars or less than 1-1/2 times maximum size of concrete aggregate. E. Splicing: 30 bar diameters minimum; stagger splices of adjacent bars wherever possible. F. Corners or Intersections: Provide “L” bars, complying with above splicing requirements. G. Steel Dowels: Place and securely anchor into position before all concrete is placed. Do not move or adjust position of dowels once concrete has been placed. H. Bars and Bar Placement Operations: Arrange, space and tie. I. Wire Ties: Set so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. J. Minimum Coverages: 1. Concrete against ground without use of forms: 3 inches for bars, 2 inches for mesh. 2. Concrete against ground, but placed in forms: 2 inches. 3. Concrete exposed to weather: 2 inches. 4. Slabs not exposed to ground, weather: 3/4-inches. K. Joining Pieces: Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap joining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Concrete Reinforcement 03200 - 4 2/08 L. Wire Fabric for Slabs-On-Grade: Must be supported prior to, and during placing of concrete. M. Interference of Conduits, Piping, Inserts, Sleeves, and Other Items with Work: Immediately consult Owner Representative and obtain approval of new procedure before placing concrete. END OF SECTION Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 1 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Concrete mixes: 1) Footings. 2) Slab. 3) Walls. b. Concrete materials: 1) Portland cement. 2) Aggregates. 3) Water. 4) Admixtures: a) Air-entraining. b) Water-reducing. c. Concrete accessories, including but not limited to: 1) Expansion joint filler material. 2) Control joint. 3) Moisture retaining cover. 4) Curing compound. 5) Sealants. 6) Hardeners. 7) Bonding compound. 8) Epoxy adhesive. 9) Subslab vapor retarder. 2. Installation of material furnished by other Sections, including, but not limited to: a. Embedment: 1) Anchor bolt. 3. The following is not included in this Section: a. Concrete Paving (Section 02751). b. Joint Sealants (Section 07920). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 – Earthwork 2. Section 03100 - Formwork 3. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 4. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 5. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Structural Concrete for Buildings,” ACI 301. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 2 2/08 2. “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete,” ACI 304R. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ACI: American Concrete Institute. B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data of materials used in the concrete, and maintenance and cleaning recommendations: 1. Catalog information on admixtures or agents to be included in mix. B. Concrete Mixes: Owner Representative: 1. Name and address of transit-mix concrete supplier shall be included with submissions. 2. List of concrete mix designs prepared in accordance with requirements of Part 2, at least 15 days prior to start of work. 3. Concrete mix designs: a. Designed by an approved testing laboratory. b. Paid for by Contractor. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: a. The reports of each test shall be reported to the Owner Representative. 2. Certificates: a. If transit-mix concrete is used, the transit-mix concrete supplier shall furnish proof of conformance with specifications in writing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Personnel: 1. Supervision: At least one person trained and experienced in placing types of concrete specified, to direct work. 2. Finishing of exposed surfaces: Thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman concrete finishers. B. Industry Standards: ACI 301. C. Testing: 1. General requirements: Comply with requirements of Section 01100. Cooperate with testing laboratory in obtaining, curing, and handling samples. 2. Concrete testing: a. Arranged and paid for per Section 01100. b. Concrete test cylinders shall be taken by and tested by Owner’s testing agency. c. The Contractor shall keep a slump cone on the job during all concrete operations. d. All test cylinders shall be made by the Contractor with the date and slump noted thereon. e. A set of 3 concrete test cylinders (6 inches by 12 inches) shall be made from the same concrete batch selected at random, and each set of 3 shall be considered as 1 test. f. One set of cylinders shall be made for each important concrete placement, but at least 1 set for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, minimum of 1 set each day. Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 3 g. These sets of cylinders are control cylinders and shall be cured in the laboratory at 70 degrees F. h. All cylinders shall be tested in accordance with the “Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete” (ASTM C 31). i. Of the sets, 1 cylinder shall be tested at the age of 7 days, 1 cylinder at 28 days, and the third cylinder, if either of the first 2 cylinders do not meet the strength specifications. j. Failure of the concrete tested to meet the specified strength will require a load test of test cores at the Contractor’s expense. k. Failure to meet the required live and dead loads, or to meet strength requirements of the cores, shall constitute consideration for rejection by the Owner Representative. l. The cost of all measures to make the work satisfactory shall be paid for by the Contractor. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All cast in place concrete shall be in strict compliance with: a. State Building Codes and Standards. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as specified. a. Air temperatures below or expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C): Uniformly heat water and aggregates a minimum of 3 hours before mixing to obtain concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C), not more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement. b. Do not use materials frozen or containing ice or snow. c. Do not place on subgrade frozen or containing frozen materials. d. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. e. Maintain concrete at the following temperatures for duration indicated: 1) 60 degrees F for 72 hours or 50 degrees F for 7 days. 2) Do not allow to cool more rapidly than 1 degree F per hour. 3) Do not allow the temperature within the shelter to rise above 80 degrees F. 2. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified. a. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. b. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. c. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. d. Use water-reducing admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, and other adverse placing conditions, only with written permission of Owner Representative. e. Avoid drying concrete prior to finishing operation. f. Protect concrete exposed to sun, drying winds, other adverse weather conditions during finishing process, using windbreaks, sunshades, fog sprays, other devices. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 4 2/08 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Air-entraining Admixture: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Sika AER, Sika Corporation Lyndhurst, NJ (800.433.9517). b. MB-VR, Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH (800.227.3350). c. Darex AEA, W.R. Grace & Company, Cambridge, MA (800.242.4476). d. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, IL (800.342.5976). e. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance with and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Water-reducing Admixture: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Company, Inc., Cleveland, OH (800.227.3350). b. Pozzolith, Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH (800.227.3350). c. Plastocrete 161, Sika Chemical Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ (800.433.9517). d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Company, Cambridge, MA (800.242.4476). e. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance with and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. C. Polyethylene Film: 10 mil; Complete with other accessories where required. D. Bond Compound: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Everbond, L & M Construction Chemicals, Omaha, NE (800.362.3331). b. SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Company, Inc., Cleveland, OH (800.227.3350). c. Sonocrete, Sonneborn Contech. Building Products - ChemRex, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (800.433.9517). d. Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Company, Long Beach, CA (888.287.5387). e. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance with and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. E. Epoxy Adhesive: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Sikadur 43 Patch Pak, Sika Chemical Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ (800.433.9517). b. Eucopoxy 456, Euclid Chemical Company, Inc., Cleveland, OH (800.227.3350). c. Epopatch, L & M Construction Chemical Omaha, NE (800.362.3331). d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance with and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. F. Vertical and Overhead Concrete Patching Mix: Duropatch VOH by L & M Construction Chemical Omaha, NE (800.362.3331). Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 5 G. Dissipating Curing Compound: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. L & M Cure, L & M Construction Chemical Company Omaha, NE (800.362.3331). b. Sonosil, Sonneborn Contech. Building Products - ChemRex, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (800.433.9517). c. Sil-Hard, TK. d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance with Section 01630, approved in advance by the E/A. H. Hardeners: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Seal Hard, L & M Construction Chemical Company. b. Ashford Formula. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance with Section 01630, approved in advance by the E/A. I. Bituminous Fiber Expansion Joint Filler: Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. #3710 Flexcell; Fibre Expansion Joint Brock-White 2. Fiber Expansion Joint, WR Meadows Elgin, IL (800.342.5976). 3. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance with and approved in advance by Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, one brand throughout, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner Representative. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, from single source for exposed concrete. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but which have been shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Owner Representative. C. Water: Potable, clear and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, or organic material. D. Air-entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. E. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. Calcium chloride not permitted. F. Accessories: 1. Subslab Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene Film: 10 mil; Complete with other accessories where required. 2. Bituminous Fiber Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed strips of asphalt saturated fiberboard of width and thickness as shown or otherwise required. 3. Bond Compound: Rewettable poly-vinyl acetate or acrylic base. 4. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881, 2 component, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces, material type, grade, class to suit project requirements. 5. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Comply with ASTM C171. One of the following: Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 6 2/08 a. Waterproof paper. b. Polyethylene film. c. Polyethylene-coated burlap. 6. Vertical and Overhead Concrete Patching Mix: ASTM C666. 7. Dissipating Curing Compound: Interior only, Non VOC solvent-based product, Type I, Class A. 8. Non-Dissipating Membrane Curing Compound: VOC solvent compliant water based acrylic cure sealer, dustproofer; 30 percent solids, ASTM C309. 9. Hardeners: Concrete densifier sealer to protect against dusting. 10. Sound Control Matting: Matting formed from 0.4-inch composite of nylon filaments in a three- dimensional geo-matrix with a non-woven fabric heat bonded to the upper surface. 2.03 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. General Requirements: Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete. Do not begin concrete production until Owner Representative has reviewed mixes. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with following properties: 1. Building slabs on grade, exterior walks, stairs, steps, and where otherwise indicated: 4,000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.45 maximum (air-entrained). Coordinate with Section 02751. 2. Footings or where otherwise indicated: 3,000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.46 maximum (air-entrained). 3. Where indicated: 2,500 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.67 maximum (non-air- entrained), 0.54 maximum (air-entrained). B. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: May be requested when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Owner Representative. C. Admixtures: 1. Admixtures shall be used only with the written approval of the Owner Representative. 2. Water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) as required for placement and workability. 3. Non-chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 4. Air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with tolerance of plus/minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits: a. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or subject to hydraulic pressure: 1) 5.5 percent: 1-1/2 inch maximum aggregate 2) 6.0 percent: 1 inch maximum aggregate 3) 6.0 percent: 3/4 inch maximum aggregate 4) 7.0 percent: 1/2 inch maximum aggregate 5) Other concrete: 2 percent to 4 percent air 6) Water-reducing and set-control: Use in strict compliance with manufacturer’s directions D. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: WC 0.50. 2. Subjected to deicers/watertight: WC 0.45. E. Slump Limits: At point of placement, as follows: Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 7 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch, not more than 3 inches. 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after addition of HRWR to verified 2-3 inch slump concrete. 4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. F. Job-Site Mixing: Mix in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer: 1. Mixer capacity 1 cubic yard or smaller: Continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. Mixer capacity larger than 1 cubic yard: Increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard, or fraction thereof. G. Transit-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C94: 1. Air Temperature Between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C): Reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 2. Air Temperature Above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C): Reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 3. Batch Ticket: Provide for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: 1. Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Earthwork: Coordinate with earthwork to allow installation of vapor retarder prior to placement of sub-slab base fill. 3. Notify Owner Representative and other trades at least 48 hours before placing concrete or far enough in advance to allow completion of related work. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that cast-in-place may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove debris, wood scraps; thoroughly clean areas in which concrete will be placed. Wet forms (except in freezing weather) or oil them; remove standing water. Clean transporting and handling equipment. C. Vapor Retarder: Place membrane over compacted fill prior to placement of base fill; minimum number of joints. Overlap sheets and seal joints with tape in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 8 2/08 D. Forms: 1. General Requirements: Prepare to receive concrete as specified in Section 03100. 2. Edge Forms, Bulkheads, and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION OF JOINTS A. Location: As indicated or, if not indicated, so as not to impair strength, appearance of structure, as acceptable to Owner Representative; perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Horizontal and vertical construction joints in the concrete shall be made only where approved by the Owner Representative and/or indicated on the Drawings. B. All construction joints shall be provided with suitable bonding grooves and keyways, and the surface against which new concrete is to be laid shall be thoroughly cleaned, using a stiff wire brush and a stream of water. C. Provide tongue and groove construction joints and/or sawed joints where indicated on Drawings. Sawed joints shall be cut 1-1/2 inches deep as soon as concrete is sufficiently hard, so that it will not be damaged. All construction joints shall be sawn to receive joint fill material. D. Keyways: At least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. E. Isolation Joints in Slabs: Construct at points of contact between slabs and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, columns, grade beams, elsewhere as indicated. F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs: Construct to form panels of patterns as shown, or if not shown, 15 feet on center (maximum). 1. Inserts: 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. Insert premolded plastic, hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove, clean groove of loose debris. 2. Contraction joints: May be formed by trowel cuts in fresh concrete with approval of Owner Representative. G. Expansion Joints in Slabs Against Vertical Surfaces: 1. Set 1/2-inch bituminous fiberboard joint flush with top of slab. Secure to vertical surface. 2. Where no expansion joint is called for, a layer of 30 pound felt shall be placed between slab and vertical member as a bondbreaker. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General Requirements: Set, build into work anchorage devices, other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, directions provided by suppliers. Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 9 3.06 MIXING OF CONCRETE A. The Concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of materials and the mixture is uniform in composition and consistency. Each bath shall be completely discharged before the mixer is recharged. B. “Ready-mixed” Concrete: 1. “Ready Mix” shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the “Standard Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete” (ASTM C94). 2. Owner Representative shall approve the source of the ready-mixed concrete. 3. Materials for concrete shall be placed in the mixer drum of the truck at the plant and the drum revolved continuously until the concrete is discharged. 4. No additional water shall be added after the truck leaves the plant without the approval of the Owner Representative. 5. The delivery ticket for each truck shall have the time of departure from mixing plant stamped on the ticket. There shall be a maximum of 1-1/2 hours between the time that the concrete is placed in the truck and the placing of concrete in the forms. C. No re-tempered concrete shall be used. 3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General Requirements: 1. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation or loss of material. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation of materials. B. Industry Standards: Comply with ACI 304. C. Placement: Deposit continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness. 1. If section cannot be placed continuously: Provide construction joints as specified. Deposit as close as practicable to final location to avoid segregation. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: 1. Layers: Horizontal, not deeper than 24 inches; avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Where placement consists of several layers: place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Reinforcing: Maintain in proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Consolidation: 1. Equipment: Mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. 2. Industry standards: ACI recommended practices. 3. Use of vibrators: a. Do not use to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. c. Rapidly penetrate placed layer, at least 6 inches into preceding layer. d. Do not insert into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. e. Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 10 2/08 f. This shall be not more than 20 minutes after depositing concrete into forms. F. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Slabs on the ground shall be placed on a minimum of 6 inches clean granular material. Sand shall be carefully leveled and screeds accurately set to control slab thickness. 2. Support screed rails on chairs or concrete puddle pads poured 1 day prior to slab pour. Do not penetrate vapor retarder. 3. Deposit: In continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placing of panel or section is completed. 4. Consolidate: During placing operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 5. Level and Smooth: Level slab surfaces with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3.08 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: 1. Location: Formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Description: Rub down or chip off texture imparted by form facing material, tie holes, defective areas repaired and patched, fins, other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height. B. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Location: Formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view, or to be covered with coating material or covering material applied directly to concrete. 2. Description: As-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly, symmetrically with minimum of seams. 3. Defective areas: Repair, patch, completely remove fins, other projections, and smooth. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth, finish with texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. D. Monolithic Slab Finishes: 1. Scratch Finish: a. Location: Surfaces to receive concrete floor topping, mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. b. Surface leveling: Depressions to not exceed 3/8 inch under 10 foot straightedge. Slope uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 2. Float Finish: a. Application: Surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified, slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand- bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. b. Floating: Do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin when surface water has disappeared or concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats; or both consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 11 c. Leveling: Check and level depressions to not exceed 3/16 inch under 10 foot straightedge. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Trowel Finish: a. Location: Surfaces to be exposed-to-view, curbs and sills, slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thin-film finish coating system. b. First trowel operation: After floating, use power-driven trowel. c. Final troweling: When surface produces ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface, consolidate surface free of trowel plane so that depressions do not exceed 1/8 inch under 10 foot straightedge. d. Surface defects: Grind defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 4. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: a. Location: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar. b. Application: Immediately follow trowel finish, slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. 5. Light Broom Finish: a. Location: Interior garage and exterior slabs on grade. b. Application: Immediately follow trowel finish, slightly scarifying surface by light brooming 6. Non-Slip Broom Finish: a. Location: Exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, elsewhere as indicated. b. Immediately after trowel finishing, broom perpendicular to main traffic route with fiber bristle broom. c. Coordinate required final finish with Owner Representative before application. E. Concrete Curing: 1. General Requirements: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. a. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner Representative. Cure with poly membrane only. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for at least 7 days. 3. Final Curing: Immediately following initial curing, before concrete has dried. Continue at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. 4. Curing Methods: a. Continuous water-fog spray: Keep surface continuously wet by covering with water. Cover with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Cover surfaces and edges with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. b. Moisture-Retaining Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. c. Curing and sealing compound: Apply as soon as final finishing operations complete (within 2 hours), uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating. Repair damage during curing period. d. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of methods. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 12 2/08 e. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by 1 or a combination of the following methods: 1) Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. c) Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 inch (300 mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. F. Chemical-Hardener Finish: 1. Location: Interior concrete floors of type and location indicated. 2. Application: Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions, after complete curing and drying of concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water (hardener/water as follows); apply evenly in three coats: a. First coat 1/3 strength; b. Second coat 1/2 strength; c. Third coat 1/2 strength. 3. Drying Time: 24 hours between coats. 4. Surplus Hardener: Scrub, mop with water to remove. G. Miscellaneous Concrete Items: 1. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in for passage of work by other trades, unless shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. 2. Curbs: Strip forms while concrete is still green; steel-trowel surfaces to hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, terminations slightly rounded, to provide monolithing finish. 3. Equipment Bases and Foundations: As shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations; comply with certified diagrams, templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 4. Grout: Base plates and foundations as indicated. 3.09 ADJUSTMENTS A. Defective Areas: Repair, patch with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Owner Representative. 1. Honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4-inch in dimension, holes left by tie rods and bolts: Cut down to solid concrete but, not to depth less than 1 inch; edges perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, brush-coat area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound is dry. 2. Exposed-to-view: Blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that patching mortar will match surrounding color. Test at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place, strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Defective surfaces: Remove, replace concrete if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Owner Representative, including color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins, other projections on surface; stains, other discolorations not removable by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Cast-In-Place Concrete 2/08 03300 - 13 2. Concealed formed surfaces: Repair defects that affect durability of concrete where possible. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test for smoothness, verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish; surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness using template having required slope. 2. Repair defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface defects include crazing, cracks wider than 0.01 inch or penetrating to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, other objectionable conditions. 3. High areas: Correct by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. 5. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Owner Representative. 6. Defective areas not exceeding 1 inch diameter (except random crack and single holes): a. Cut out, replace with fresh concrete. Remove to sound concrete with clean, square cuts; expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, apply bonding compound. c. Mix patching concrete of same materials as original concrete. Place, compact, finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in some manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch diameter: a. Repair by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete; clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces, apply bonding compound. c. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. d. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact mixture in place, finish to match adjacent concrete. e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 8. Structural repairs: Perform with prior approval of Owner Representative for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. D. Alternate Repair Methods: Subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 3.10 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps or debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: 1. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize soiling of other work. 2. Promptly clean surfaces soiled by cast-in-place concrete; repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during work. 3. When work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and debris. 3.11 PROTECTION A. General: 1. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer to ensure work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 14 2/08 2. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 pound per square foot by h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Curing Schedule: 1. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with tile and resilient floor coverings. END OF SECTION Architectural Precast 2/08 03450- 1 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Manufactured lightweight stone components. b. Mortar: 1) Bonding mortar. 2) Joint grouting mortar. 3) Simulated masonry accessories. c. Manufactured stone accessories: 1) Trim products. 2) Weather resistant barrier. 3) Metal lath. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM 1. C270: Specification for mortar for unit masonry. 2. C482: Shear (adhesion) Strength. B. UBC: 1. Standard No. 14-1: Kraft Waterproof Building Paper. 2. Standard No. 26-10: Test method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. C. UL: 1. UL723: Test for Surface Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Provide complete system of manufactured lightweight stone. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance and cleaning recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between Architectural Precast 03450- 2 2/08 system and adjoining system. From the Project Manual, include a copy of the specification section that applies. C. Samples: 1. Initial Color Selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard color samples for each type of finish with Product Data and Shop Drawings. 2. Color Verification: Prior to shipping, submit each type of finish indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing a full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Include notification to Owner Representative if selection is not within quoted price range. 3. Components: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware and other materials and components if requested by Owner Representative. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Fire Hazard Classification (UL 723): 1) Flame Spread Rating: 0. 2) Smoke Development: 0. E. Maintenance Manual: 1. Provide to the Owner, maintenance and warranty data in “Maintenance Manual”. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide simulated masonry units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of simulated masonry, with 6 projects of similar size, scope and type of which 3 have been in successful use for 3 years or longer. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of simulated masonry. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of simulated masonry, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Protect simulated masonry from damage during shipment, storage and construction. 2. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for job-site storage and protection. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to a minimum of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during and for 48 hours after completion of work. Architectural Precast 2/08 03450- 3 B. Coordination Requirements: 1. Scheduling: Allow no construction activity on opposite side of wall structure to which work is being applied, during and for 48 hours after completion of work. C. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit non-prorated 20-year warranty to provide and install replacement materials for defective work. B. Installers: 10-year warranty removal and replacement due to defective materials or installation failure. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide for maintenance purposes, quantity equal to 2 percent of each type, of material installed. Furnish from same production run as materials installed. Package and mark to identify building and material type and color. Deliver and store where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Exterior Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise, design is based on products of Edwards Cast Stone, Dubuque, IA. 1. Phone: 563.556.0535 2. Fax: 563.556.8906 3. 1.800.992.9323 4. http://www.edcstone.com B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Manufactured exterior Stone Components: 1. Veneers: a. Product Name: Edwards buff hammered cast stone (GCFB national vendor relationship). b. Color: Buff 2. Trim: Miscellaneous trim as detailed or required for complete, proper installation of cast masonry, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 3. Address Block: a. Color: Buff to match veneer and trim b. Texture: Smooth c. Letter Type: Engraved d. Letter Height: 6-inch Architectural Precast 03450- 4 2/08 e. Font: AGaramond f. Letter Color: Black Stained 4. Stone Emblems at Entry a. Color: Buff to match veneer and trim b. Texture: Smooth c. Engraving: “GC” Logo in relief. Rough sandblast, black stained. Artwork to be obtained by fabricator from Owner’s representative. Artwork in .EPS digital format. d. See Drawings for edge details B. Mortar: 1. Bonding Mortar: a. With Grout Joint: Use masonry or Type S mortar. 2. Joint Grouting Mortar: a. See section 04200. b. Color: Solomon Colors, Inc - SGS10H. C. Simulated masonry accessories including, but not limited to: 1. Other Materials: Materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of simulated masonry, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that simulated masonry may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s Product Data, including product technical bulletin installation instructions and details. B. Application: 1. Bonding Mortar: Apply 1/2-inch to 3/4-inch to prepared substrate or apply to each stone in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Manufactured lightweight stone components: a. Trim units to fit. b. Press units into mortar bed, causing mortar to extrude slightly around edges. c. Place units with uniform joints: Architectural Precast 2/08 03450- 5 1) Stone joints shall not be over 3/8-inch in width. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials, procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Replace damaged materials with new materials complying with specified requirements. 3.06 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps and debris arising from Work of this Section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: 1. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize soiling of other work. 2. Promptly clean surfaces adjacent to simulated masonry; repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during work. 3. Without using acid, clean exposed surfaces of simulated masonry using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 4. When work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and debris. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer’s Representative to schedule and attend meeting with Owner’s Representatives to explain: 1. Maintenance and Care Instructions. 2. Recommended Maintenance Program. 3. Warranty Requirements. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer, to ensure work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. Exterior Cast Stone. 1. Cast stone water table. 2. Cast stone window sills. 3. Cast stone column pilasters. 4. Grout joints. END OF SECTION Simulated Masonry 3/08 04700 - 1 SECTION 04700 SIMULATED MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Manufactured lightweight stone components. b. Mortar: 1) Bonding mortar. 2) Joint grouting mortar. 3) Simulated masonry accessories. c. Manufactured stone accessories: 1) Trim products. 2) Weather resistant barrier. 3) Metal lath. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM 1. C270: Specification for mortar for unit masonry. 2. C482: Shear (adhesion) Strength. B. UBC: 1. Standard No. 14-1: Kraft Waterproof Building Paper. 2. Standard No. 26-10: Test method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. C. UL: 1. UL723: Test for Surface Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Provide complete system of manufactured lightweight stone. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance and cleaning recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between Simulated Masonry 04700 - 2 3/08 system and adjoining system. From the Project Manual, include a copy of the specification section that applies. C. Samples: 1. Initial Color Selection: Submit manufacturer’s type of finish with Product Data and Shop Drawings. 2. Color Verification: Prior to shipping, submit each type of finish indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing a full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Include notification to Owner Representative if selection is not within quoted price range. 3. Components: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware and other materials and components if requested by Owner Representative. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Fire Hazard Classification (UL 723): 1) Flame Spread Rating: 0. 2) Smoke Development: 0. E. Maintenance Manual: 1. Provide to the Owner, maintenance and warranty data in “Maintenance Manual”. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide simulated masonry units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of simulated masonry, with 6 projects of similar size, scope and type of which 3 have been in successful use for 3 years or longer. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of simulated masonry. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of simulated masonry, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Pre-installation Meetings: If requested by the Owner Representative, the installer and manufacturer’s technical representative shall meet with Owner Representative prior to the start of installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Protect simulated masonry from damage during shipment, storage and construction. 2. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for job-site storage and protection. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. Simulated Masonry 3/08 04700 - 3 2. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to a minimum of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during and for 48 hours after completion of work. B. Coordination Requirements: 1. Scheduling: Allow no construction activity on opposite side of wall structure to which work is being applied, during and for 48 hours after completion of work. C. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit non-prorated 20-year warranty to provide and install replacement materials for defective work. B. Installers: 10-year warranty removal and replacement due to defective materials or installation failure. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide for maintenance purposes, quantity equal to 2 percent of each type, of material installed. Furnish from same production run as materials installed. Package and mark to identify building and material type and color. Deliver and store where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Interior Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise, design is based on products of Cultured Stone Corporation, Napa, CA. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Manufactured Lightweight Stone Components: 1. Veneers: a. Product Name: Vintage Sand Carolina Ledgestone (GCFB national vendor relationship). b. Color: CSV-7006 c. Time: provide 10 weeks for lead time in order. d. Contact: Nancy Hutchinson 1) Phone: (330) 635-8703 e. Contact: Kathy Mannoh 1) Phone: (866) 315-5081 2. Trim: Miscellaneous trim as detailed or required for complete, proper installation of simulated masonry, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. Simulated Masonry 04700 - 4 3/08 B. Mortar: 1. Bonding Mortar: a. With no Grout Joint (Stacked): Mortar mix must consist of at least two parts thin-set (or latex additive) to three parts masonry mortar. 2. Joint Grouting Mortar: a. No grout in joints. C. Simulated masonry accessories including, but not limited to: 1. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Breathing Type building paper (UBC Standard No. 14-1). 2. Metal Lath: Galvanized 2.5 pound or 3.4 pound expanded metal lath (flat or rib). 3. Other Materials: Materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of simulated masonry, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that simulated masonry may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s Product Data, including product technical bulletin installation instructions and details. B. Application: 1. Bonding Mortar: Apply 1/2-inch to 3/4-inch to prepared substrate or apply to each stone in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Manufactured lightweight stone components: a. Trim units to fit. b. Press units into mortar bed, causing mortar to extrude slightly around edges. c. Place units with uniform joints: 1) Stone joints shall not be over 3/8-inch in width. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials, procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. Simulated Masonry 3/08 04700 - 5 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Replace damaged materials with new materials complying with specified requirements. 3.06 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps and debris arising from Work of this Section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: 1. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize soiling of other work. 2. Promptly clean surfaces adjacent to simulated masonry; repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during work. 3. Without using acid, clean exposed surfaces of simulated masonry using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 4. When work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and debris. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer’s Representative to schedule and attend meeting with Owner’s Representatives to explain: 1. Maintenance and Care Instructions. 2. Recommended Maintenance Program. 3. Warranty Requirements. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer, to ensure work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. Interior Stone. 1. Stone columns. 2. Do not Grout joints. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 1 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Clay masonry: 1) Brick. a) Type “A”: Common. b. Concrete masonry: 1) Concrete masonry units: a) Type “A”. c. Mortar: 1) Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime. 2) Pre-mixed mortar. d. Masonry grout. e. Reinforcing steel. f. Joint reinforcement. g. Ties and anchoring devices: 1) Stud anchor and tie. 2) Steel framing anchor and tie. 3) Dovetail slot and anchor. h. Embedments: 1) Anchor bolts. 2) Shelf angle anchors i. Insulation: 1) Foundation/cavity wall. 2) Spray foam sealant. j. Embedded flashings: 1) Rubberized asphalt sheet flashing k. Masonry accessories, including, but not limited to: 1) Non-metallic expansion joint strips. 2) Premolded control joint strips. 3) Bond breaker strips. 4) Pipe sleeves. 5) Weep wicks. 6) Cavity drainage material. l. Masonry cleaner. 1) Detergent solution. 2. Installation of material furnished by other sections, including, but not limited to: a. Architectural precast concrete. b. Stonework. c. Loose lintels. d. Sleeves. e. Embedments: Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 2 3/08 1) Anchor bolts. 2) Bearing plates and angles. f. Hollow metal frames in masonry walls. 3. Perform the following: a. Preparation of openings in masonry for recessed items. b. Modifications of existing masonry in areas of new construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 03450 - Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel 4. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 5. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 6. Section 07210 - Building Insulation 7. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants 8. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames (Heavy Commercial) 9. Section 08410 - Aluminum Framed Storefront 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement 2. ACI 530.1: Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A307: Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. 2. ASTM A496: Specification for Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 3. ASTM A615: Specification for Deformed and Plain-Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C90: Specification for Load Bearing CMU. 5. ASTM C207: Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 6. ASTM C270: Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 7. ASTM C216: Specification for Facing Brick. 8. ASTM C578: Specification for Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM E119: Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Methods. C. Brick Institute of America: 1. BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised: Cleaning Brick Masonry 2. BIA M1: Specifications for Portland Cement-Lime Mortar for Brick Masonry. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f’m) at 28 days. a. For Concrete Unit Masonry: Based on net area: f’m = 1500 PSI (10.3 MPa). b. For Brick Unit Masonry: Based on gross area: f’m = 2500 PSI (17.2 MPa). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s Product Data for each type masonry unit, accessory, other manufactured products. Include size variation data verifying that actual range of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C216 dimension tolerances. Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 3 B. Samples: 1. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer’s verification color samples with Product Data. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating compliance of the following masonry materials with requirements indicated: a. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. b. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. c. Masonry units. 2. Certificates: As requested in “Quality Assurance.” 3. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Article. Include lists of completed, similar sized projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Owner Representative’s and owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of unit masonry. 2. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of unit masonry. 3. Personnel: For actual installation of unit masonry, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work: a. Foreman: Competent, one person in charge of work at all times, for duration of work unless otherwise permitted by Owner Representative. b. Installer of masonry units: Skilled journeyman masons. c. Mixer Personnel: Thoroughly trained, with at least 1 person with 1 year experience (minimum) mixing mortar, preferably having attended mortar workshops or seminars. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials made of components, with uniform texture and color or blend, furnished by one manufacturer for each type of masonry, mortar, aggregate and accessory. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with pertinent requirements of governing authorities and referenced portions of ACI, NCMA and SCPI industry standards. D. Certificates: 1. Fire Performance and Characteristics: Certify materials and construction are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E119 by recognized testing and inspecting organization or by other means, acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Accept materials to the job site and store until installation in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name. B. Storage and Protection: 1. General: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for job-site storage and protection. 2. Unit Masonry: a. Shrink-wrap in polyethylene film. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 4 3/08 b. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to maximum percentage specified for Type I units for average annual relative humidity reported by U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest project site. 3. Cementitious materials: Store off ground, under cover, in dry location. 4. Aggregates: Store to maintain grading, other required characteristics. 5. Masonry accessories including metal items: Store to prevent deterioration by corrosion and accumulation of dirt. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to installation at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold and Hot Weather Protection: Conform to recommendations for hot and cold weather masonry included in Uniform Building Code. a. Do not lay wet or frozen masonry units. b. Ice or snow formed on masonry bed: Carefully apply heat until top surface is dry to touch. c. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. d. If temperatures expected to fall below 40 degrees F within 12 hours, do not lay unless proper heated enclosures are provided. e. Minimum temperature of masonry: 40 degrees F for 48 hours after installation. f. In temperatures below 50 degrees F, use surface conditioner when installing flexible flashing. g. Hot weather: Keep the masonry moist until mortar has cured. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 2. Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Provide for maintenance purposes quantity unit masonry equal to 2 percent of each type of material installed. 2. Package and mark to identify building and material type and color. 3. Store as directed after completion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Clay Brick: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on United Brick and Tile; Division of Sioux City Brick, Des Moines, IA. a. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Concrete Masonry Units: Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 5 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Amcon Block and Precast Company, St. Cloud, MN (888.251.6030). 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Aggregate Industries, Eagan, MN (800.338.3943). b. Anchor Block and Concrete Company, North St. Paul, MN (612.777.7465). c. Arlington Concrete Products Inc, Arlington, MN (800.252.6749). d. County Concrete, Marathon, WI (800.289.2569). e. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. C. Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. Lafarge Corporation, Dallas, TX (214.934.7100). b. Lehigh Portland Cement Company, Allentown, PA (800.523.5488). c. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2. Premixed Mortar: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. Spec Mix, St. Paul, MN (612.688.8287). b. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. D. Joint Reinforcement: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Heckman Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL 800.621.4140. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Dur-O-Wall, Inc Arlington Heights, IL (708.577.6400). b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY (515.234.0600). c. National Wire Products Industries, Baltimore, MD (800.638.4952). d. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. E. Ties, and Anchoring Devices: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Heckman Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL (800.621.4140). 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Dur-O-Wall, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL (708.577.6400). b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY (515.234.0600). c. National Wire Products Industries, Baltimore, MD (800.638.4952). d. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. F. Embedments: 1. Anchor Bolts: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. Dur-O-Wall, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL (708.577.6400). b. Heckman Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL (800.621.4140). c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY (515.234.0600). d. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Charlotte, NC (800.849.6722). Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 6 3/08 e. National Wire Products Industries, Baltimore, MD (800.638.4952). f. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. G. Insulation: 1. Rigid Foundation/Cavity Wall Insulation: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. DiversiFoam Products, Inc., New Brighton, MN (612.663.6770). b. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI (800.441.4369). c. Pactiv Corporation, Atlanta, GA (800.241.4402). d. UC Industries, Inc. Parsippany, NJ (800.828.7155). e. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2. Spray foam sealant: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. Polycel, W.R. Grace, Inc., Cambridge, MA (800.242.5576). b. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. H. Embedded Flashings: 1. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. CCW-705-TWF, Carlisle Corporation, Sapulpa, OK (800.338.8701). b. Flashgard, Firestone Building Products, Carmel, IN (800.428.4442). c. Miradri TWF, Nicolon-Mirafi Group, Norcross, GA (800.234.0484). d. Perm-a-Barrier Wall Flashing, WR Grace, Inc., Cambridge, MA (800.242.5576). e. Safseal 6634, Safseal Innovations, Denver, CO (800.898.4842). f. Sealtight, WR Meadows, Elgin, IL (800.342.5976). g. York Seal, York Manufacturing, Sanford, ME (800.551.2828). h. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. I. Masonry Accessories: 1. Cavity Drainage Material: Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, are: a. CavClear, Lakeland, MN (888.436.2620). b. Mortar Net USA, LTD, Highland, IN (800.664.6638). c. Mortar Stop by Dur-O-Wall, Aurora, IL (630.851.8400). d. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. J. Masonry Cleaner: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of ProSoCo, Inc., Kansas City, KS (913.281.2700). 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc., Oak Creek, WI (800.323.3565). b. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Clay Brick: 1. General Requirements: Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 7 a. Provide units meeting requirements of ASTM C 216 in shapes indicated on Drawings. b. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. c. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing, or where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. d. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 2. Type: Type FBX (minimal variations). 3. Grade: SW for all exterior applications. 4. Brick Schedule: a. Brick Type “A”: 1) Brick Size: Utility (nominal 4 inches by 4 inches by 12 inches) . 2) Brick Model: Cinnamon Iron Spot. 3) Contact: a) Tammy Hansen. b) 515.254.0196. B. Concrete Masonry Unit: 1. General Requirements: Modular, hollow and solid load-bearing standard weight, conforming to ASTM Standard C90, with exception listed below, sizes and shapes indicated or required by construction; corner blocks, jamb units, bond beam units, and special sizes and shapes as indicated or otherwise required. a. Defects in exposed common CMU: Limited to 1/2-inch diameter defect in no more than 5 percent of the block. 2 defects maximum per block. b. Defects in burnished CMU: Limited to 3/8-inch-diameter in no more than 5 percent of Block. One defect maximum per block. 2. Block Types (normal weight unless otherwise specified): a. Block Type “A”: 1) Nominal Block Size: 8 inch by 16 inch face. 2) Face Style: Common. 3) Unscored where exposed and not exposed to view. 4) Block Color: Natural gray. C. Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. General: a. Contractor has option of using pre-mixed mortar indicated below. 2. Ingredients: a. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. b. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91. c. Mortar Cement: UBC Standard No. 21-14. 1) For pigmented mortars, use premixed, colored mortar cements of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer’s standard formulations. 2) Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight for mineral oxides, nor 1 percent for carbon black. d. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. e. Aggregate For Mortar: ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. f. Water: Clean and potable. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 8 3/08 3. Colorant: a. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. b. Color: Natural gray at concrete block below grade. c. Color: SGS 30A light brown at brick. 4. Pre-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this Article; combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. D. Masonry Grout: 1. Water: Clean and potable. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. 3. Aggregate for Coarse Grout: ASTM C404. 4. Mix Proportion: ASTM C476, Table 1. E. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing Bars: a. Deformed steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18. 2. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A496. F. Joint Reinforcement: 1. General Requirements: Prefabricated welded-wire units with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, straight lengths of not less than 10’-0”, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 2. Width: Approximately 2 inches less than nominal width of walls and partitions. Mortar coverage of at least 5/8 inch on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2 inch elsewhere. 3. Steel Wire Size: a. Standard: 9 gage side and cross rods. 4. Finishes: a. Exterior walls and foundations: 1) ASTM A153 Class B2 Hot Dipped Galvanized (1.5 ounces per square foot). 5. Design: a. Single-wythe masonry: Type with single pair of side rods. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches on center. b. Multi-wythe masonry: Truss design (composite construction), ladder design (cavity construction) with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches on center; number of side rods as follows: 1) Composite construction: One for each face shell of concrete masonry back-up and 1 for brick wythe. 2) Multiple-wythe concrete masonry: One for each face shell of concrete masonry back-up and of concrete masonry facing wythe. 3) Multiple-wythe brick masonry: One for each wythe. 4) Multiple-wythe of differing materials or where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of back-up: Use units with adjustable 2-piece rectangular ties. G. Ties and Anchors: 1. Structural Back-up Types: a. Concrete Block (Cavity Wall): See joint reinforcement. b. Concrete Block (veneer addition to existing masonry): Contractor’s choice of flexible tie (H&B No. 345-BT) or channel anchor (H&B No. 362&363). c. Stud: 1) Veneer anchor: screw on strap; 12 gage; 4-inch adjustment. Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 9 2) Veneer tie: 3/16-inch diameter rod. d. Steel Framing: 1) Veneer anchor: Contractor option, weld on rod; 1/4 diameter, 4-inch adjustment or weld on strap; 12 gage, 4-inch adjustment. 2) Veneer tie: 3/16-inch diameter rod. e. Cast or Precast Concrete: 1) Dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336 inch (22 gage) sheet metal. 2) Dovetail anchors: 3/16-inch diameter wire triangle with 12 gage dovetail designed to hold brick rigidly in place. f. Corrugated ties or anchors will not be allowed. 2. Finishes: a. Wire ties or anchors; Exterior walls/cavity walls/foundations; completely embedded in mortar or grout: Mill galvanized ASTM A641 Class 3 (0.80 ounce per square foot). b. Wire ties or anchors; Exterior walls/ foundations; not completely embedded in mortar or grout: Hot dipped galvanized ASTM A153 Class 2 (1.50 ounces per square foot); prime following welded fabrication. c. Sheet metal ties or anchors; Exposed to weather or earth: Hot dipped galvanized ASTM A153 Class 2 (1.50 ounces per square foot); prime following welded fabrication. d. Sheet metal ties or anchors; Completely embedded in mortar or grout: Hot dipped galvanized ASTM A153 Class 2 (1.50 ounces per square foot); prime following welded fabrication. H. Embedments: 1. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers, ASTM A307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM C153, in sizes and configurations indicated. 2. Shelf Angle Anchors a. Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated. I. Insulation: 1. Rigid Foundation/Cavity Wall Insulation (extruded polystyrene): a. General Requirements: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by expansion of polystyrene base resin in extrusion process complying with ASTM C578, type IV. b. Thermal Value: 5-year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 5 degrees F (4.4 and 23.9 degrees C), respectively. c. Density: 1.6 pounds per cubic foot minimum density, unless otherwise indicated. d. Compressive Strength (foundation insulation): 25 pounds per square inch. e. Preformed units: To fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, lengths. f. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings, or if not indicated, 2 inches. g. Adhesive: Include manufacturer’s recommended adhesive or other fasteners to make positive attachment to inner wythe or concrete masonry unit. 2. Spray Foam Sealant: Non-shrink closed cell expanding urethane. J. Embedded Flashings: 1. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: a. Self-sealing, self-healing, fully adhering composite flexible flashing, consisting of pliable, highly adhesive, rubberized asphalt, bonded completed, and integrally to multiple plies of 8 mil (minimum) high density cross laminated polyethylene film, 40 mil thick total (minimum), protected by release sheet. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 10 3/08 b. Include primer, surface conditioner, mastic, and other accessories as recommended by manufacturer. K. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: 1. Non-metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler strips, ASTM D1056, Grade RE41E1, capable of compression up to 35 percent of width and thickness indicated. 2. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 3. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, ASTM D226, Type I, (No. 15 asphalt felt). 4. Mortar Nets: Lightweight polyethylene or nylon net (90 percent open woven mesh), allowing water to flow through mortar droppings. 5. Weep Wicks: 18 inches (minimum), 100 percent, cotton-cord rope. 6. Pipe Sleeves: 3-inch diameter Schedule 40, ASTM A53, 14 inches long, at locations above ceiling as directed by Owner Representative; Provide and install as needed. 7. Pressure Treated Wood Blocking: Provide PT wood blocking as described in Section 06100, as indicated on Drawings in cavity walls. L. Masonry Cleaners: 1. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: 1. Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. a. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below. a. At or Below Grade: Type S. b. Above Grade: Type N, except as noted. 3. Grout: a. Design Mix: 3,000 psi unless noted otherwise on Structural Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that unit masonry systems may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 11 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection of Work: 1. During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. 2. Coverage: Extend cover at least 24 inches down both sides. Hold cover securely in place. 3. Uniform floor, roof loading: Do not apply for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. 4. Concentrated loads: Do not apply for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 5. Masonry to be exposed or painted: Prevent grout, mortar or soil from staining face. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. 6. Base of walls: Protect from rain-splashed mud, mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 7. Sills, ledges, projections: Protect from droppings of mortar. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Wetting Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which has ASTM C67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 square inches per minute, using methods which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Do not wet concrete masonry units. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice, other coatings from reinforcing. C. Procedures: 1. Cavity and composite walls, floors, other masonry construction: Build to full thickness shown. 2. Single-wythe walls: Build to actual thickness of masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. 3. Chases and recesses: Build as shown or required for work of other trades, with at least 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, between adjacent chases, recesses. 4. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. 5. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to opening. D. Cutting: Use motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout and Tolerances: 1. Layout in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths, accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. 2. Avoid use of less- than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and wherever possible at other locations. 3. Comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. 4. Install masonry to distance from adjoining dissimilar materials as detailed or if not detailed, 3/4-inch maximum. B. Pattern Bond: 1. Match patterns as indicated. If not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course 1/3 on units in courses above and below. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 12 3/08 2. Concealed masonry: Lay with units in wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. 3. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners, jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Step back 1/2-unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required), remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. D. Built-in Work: As work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Built-in items to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units: place layer of metal lath in joint below, rod mortar or grout into core. 2. Hollow concrete masonry units: Fill cores with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Solid brick masonry units: Lay with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints, shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Lay full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Joints: 1. Joint widths: Maintain as shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8-inch joints. 2. Masonry walls to be concealed or covered by other materials: Cut flush unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed joints: Tool brick or concrete masonry joint slightly concave using jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Masonry units disturbed after laying: Clean, reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners of jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustment required, remove units, clean off mortar, reset in fresh mortar. D. Collar Joints: After each course is laid, fill vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly and with mortar for exterior walls except cavity walls, interior walls, partitions. 3.06 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY A. General Requirements: Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes, not more than 16 inches on center vertically. B. Corners: Interlocking masonry unit bond in each course, unless otherwise shown. 1. Horizontal joints: a. Horizontally reinforced masonry: Prefabricated “L” units, in addition to masonry bonding. b. Intersecting and abutting walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints shown at juncture, horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated “T” units. Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 13 2. Vertical joints: a. Intersecting load-bearing walls carried up separately: Block or tooth vertical joint with 8 inches maximum offsets, rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4 feet on center vertically; or omit blocking, provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2 feet on center vertically. b. Anchors: Form of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2 inches by 1/4 inch by 2 feet long, ends turned up not less than 2 inches or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores. 3.07 MASONRY FILL A. Grout: Fill bond beams, block cores, voids with specified grout indicated on Drawings, where specified, or where otherwise required by construction. 3.08 CONSTRUCTION OF CAVITY WALLS A. General Requirements: Lay to dimensions and details shown, minimum 1 inch, clear and free of mortar bulges, droppings from top to bottom. Lay in bonds specified. B. Side Mortar Joint: Bevel to minimize mortar bulges or use clean-out strip to remove droppings and bulges from cavity. Spread mortar protruding into cavity on back of masonry units immediately following laying. C. Weep Holes: 1. Where weep vent is not appropriate, parge bottom of cavity with mortar, provide weep holes 24 inches on center. 2. Fill with cotton cord rope. 3. Attach wick vertically to insulation. 4. Keep clear of mortar, other obstructions throughout construction process. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Install in bottom of cavity as indicated on Drawings to allow seepage of water in cavity to weeps. E. Foundation/Cavity Insulation: 1. Securely attach to interior masonry wythe with ties or adhesives specifically recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2. Cut to fit around pipes, conduit, reinforcing, etc., using sharp knife, saws, drills as required. 3. Use spray foam sealant at joints between rigid insulation sheets and at opening to provide complete seal. F. Treated Wood Blocking: Install door and window blocking within the cavity as detailed. 3.09 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Install as indicated on the Drawings. Set reinforcing bars in grout; do not use mortar. B. Schedule: 1. Bond beams. 2. Vertical cores at each side of lintels. 3. Vertical reinforcing for walls. 4. Mitered concrete masonry unit corners, every other course. 5. Vertical reinforcing in parapets as indicated on Drawings or if not indicated 2’-8” on center. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 14 3/08 6. As indicated on Drawings. 3.10 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General Requirements: Continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. 1. Longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length with minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. 2. Lap reinforcing minimum 6 inches. 3. Cut or interrupt at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted. 5. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. 6. Cut, bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, other special conditions. 7. Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows: a. Multi-wythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcement acts as structural bond or tie between wythes: As required by code but not more than 16 inches on center vertically. b. Single-wythe walls: 16 inches on center vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Parapets: 8 inches on center vertically, unless otherwise indicated. B. Reinforcement at Openings: Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1 foot wide with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in two joints approximately 8 inches apart, immediately above lintel and immediately below sill. Extend minimum 2 feet beyond jambs of opening except at control joints. 3.11 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK A. General Requirements: Anchor devices of type indicated. Anchor to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with following: 1. Open space not less than 1 inch width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Dovetail anchors at precast concrete panels which will hold brick veneer rigidly in place and transfer wind loading back to panels. 4. Space as indicated, but not more than 24 inches on center vertically, 24 inches on center horizontally. 3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General Requirements: Vertical and horizontal expansion, control, isolation joints in masonry where shown. Joints must be unobstructed by structure, mortar, or reinforcing. Build-in related items as masonry work progresses. 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. 2. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. 3. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. 4. Build flanges of factory-fabricated expansion joint units into masonry. 5. Build in non-metallic fillers where indicated. 6. Build in horizontal pressure relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting non-metallic compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer rod. 7. Locate horizontal pressure relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer. 8. Space joints as indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated 24 feet (maximum) on center; verify location in writing with Owner Representative. Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 15 9. Offset control joints in wythes of dissimilar materials. 3.13 LINTELS AND BUILT-IN ITEMS A. Steel Lintels: Install where indicated. B. Built-in Items: 1. Install all metal frames, bolts, inserts, sleeves, bearing plates, and other items required to be set in masonry. 2. Coordinate with any other trades involved. 3. Fill all hollow metal frames with concrete unless indicated otherwise. 4. Rake out joint between frame and concrete masonry unit to create 3/8-inch reveal. 3.14 FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK A. General Requirements: Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at, or above, shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and other obstructions to divert such water to exterior. B. Preparation: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. 2. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. 3. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. 4. Extend flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. 5. Construct end dams by turning up the flashing at ends to prevent spillage. C. Extent of Flashing: Full length of lintels and shelf angles, minimum of 4 inches into masonry each end. Extend from outer edge of drip plate at exterior face of outer wythe of masonry through outer wythe, turned up minimum 12 inches, fastened with termination bar and mastic. 1. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry completely through inner wythe, turn up approximately 2 inches. 2. At heads and sills turn up ends not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 3. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by over-lapping deformations at least 1-1/2 inches, seal lap with elastic sealant. 4. Support all sheet flashings. 5. Ensure positive drainage with use of sheet metal cavity bridges as required. D. Location of Cavity Wall Base Flashing: 1. The line of flashing and weep assemblies at the bottom of all cavity walls must occur above grade, sidewalks, or adjacent construction to allow proper drainage. 2. Adjust elevation as required. E. Installation of Flashing: Comply with Drawings using only adhesives and materials specifically recommended. 1. Press flashing firmly in place using steel roller. 2. Apply mastic at top edge, laps, and seams. 3. Install specified rope wick. Cut off wick flush with wall. 4. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 16 3/08 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE A. Install in strict accordance with original design, accepted Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as accepted by Owner Representative, anchoring components firmly into position as indicated in Section 03450. 3.16 ADJUSTING A. Correction: Remove damaged masonry units and units which do not match adjoining units as intended. Replace with new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints including corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Comply with requirements of Section 01100. B. Construction Tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb: a. Vertical lines, surfaces of columns, walls, and arises: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 3/8 inch in a story height not to exceed 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. b. External corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. c. Vertical Alignment of Head Joints: Do not exceed plus/minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 1/2 inch maximum. 2. Variation from level: a. Bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, other conspicuous lines: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. b. Top surface of bearing walls: Do not exceed 1/8 inch between adjacent floor elements in 10 feet or 1/16 inch within width of single unit. 3. Variation of linear building line: a. Position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions: Do not exceed 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 foot maximum, 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. 4. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions: a. Columns and thickness of walls: Do not exceed minus 1/2 inch nor plus 1/2 inch. 5. Variation in mortar joint thickness: a. Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus/minus 1/8 inch, with maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus/minus 1/8 inch. 3.18 CLEANING A. Brick Final Cleaning: After mortar is set and cured, clean new brick masonry: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Owner Representative’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Unit Masonry Assemblies 3/08 04810 - 17 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in referenced “BIA” technical note to clean brick masonry, except use specified masonry cleaner. B. Concrete Masonry: Comply with masonry manufacturer’s directions and applicable NCMA “Tek” bulletins. 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Owner Representative’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape. 4. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in referenced “NCMA” technical note to clean concrete masonry, except use specified masonry cleaner. 3.19 PROTECTION A. At End of Working Day: 1. Brace all unsupported masonry against wind or other damage. 2. Cover top of all walls exposed to the weather with moisture-proof covering, lapping 8 inches over sides of walls. 3. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in manner acceptable to installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Structural Steel 2/08 05120 - 1 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Structural steel: 1) Columns. 2) Beams. b. Shop priming. c. Auxiliary materials: 1) Direct tension indicators. 2) Electrodes for welding. 3) Structural steel primer. 4) Cement Grout: a) Portland cement, sand. 5) Nonmetallic shrinkage-resistant grout: a) Premixed nonmetallic grouting compound, CE CRD-C621. 2. Provide the following for other sections to install, including but not limited to: a. Embedments: 1) Anchor bolts. 3. Perform the following: a. Touch-up primer paint. 4. The following is not included: a. Lintels not attached to the structural steel frame. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 2. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrication 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” AISC. 2. “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,” including “Commentary” and Supplements, AISC. 3. “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts,” approved by Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation, AISC. 4. “Structural Welding Code,” AWS D1.1. 5. “General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use,” ASTM A6. 6. “Standard Qualification Procedure,” AWS. 7. “Power Tool Cleaning,” SSPC SP-3. Structural Steel 05120 - 2 2/08 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel Lintels: Lintels are included with structural steel only if attached to the structural steel frame. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports, other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards): 1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Structural steel primer paint. B. Shop Drawings: Prepared under supervision of registered professional engineer. Include complete details, schedules for fabrication, assembly of structural steel members procedures and diagrams; details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, other data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols; show size, length, and type of weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, directions for installation of anchor bolts, other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with referenced standards, except as otherwise indicated: Delete following sentence of Paragraph 4.2.1, “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” “This approval constitutes Owner’s acceptance of all responsibility for design adequacy of any connections designed by fabricator as a part of preparation of these Shop Drawings.” B. Conflicting Requirements: More stringent shall govern. C. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes, operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure”. Provide certification that welders have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. If recertification of welders required, retesting will be Contractor’s responsibility. D. Surveys: Owner may employ services of registered professional engineer or land surveyor to verify tolerance compliance. If out of compliance, Contractor pays for services. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Ensure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Storage: Permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. C. Protection: Protect steel members, packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Do not store materials on structure in manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. D. Damaged Materials or Structures: Repair or replace as directed. Structural Steel 2/08 05120 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Materials smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes. B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. C. Cold-form Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Hot-formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A501. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, non-headed type unless otherwise indicated. F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. G. High-strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, hardened washers; quenched and tempered medium carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers; comply with ASTM A325. Direct tension indicator washers may be used. H. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. I. Non-metallic Shrinkage-resistant Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining, containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CRD-C621. Subject to compliance with requirements, products may include, but are not limited to: 1. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Crystex; L&M Construction 3. Chemicals Masterflow 713; Master Builders 4. Upcon; Upco Chemical Division, USM Corporation. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final Shop Drawings. 2. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. 3. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. 4. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Marking and Delivery: Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. C. Connections: 1. Shop connections: Weld or bolt as indicated. Structural Steel 05120 - 4 2/08 2. Field connections: Bolt, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Principal bolted connections: Provide high-strength threaded fasteners except where unfinished bolts are indicated. 4. Bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners 5. Temporary bracing: Provide unfinished threaded fasteners. D. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install in accordance with AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.” E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final Shop Drawings. 2. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. 3. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. 4. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. 5. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. General Requirements: 1. Shop paint structural steel, except: a. Members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. b. Members to receive fireproofing. c. Surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. 2. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only. 3. Apply 2 coats to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. B. Materials: 1. Typical: Red Oxide Primer with less than 100 parts per million of lead, mercury, cadmium or hexavalent chromium. 2. Members to receive fireproofing: Primer approved by fireproofing or intumescent paint manufacturer in compliance with UL or FM assemblies. C. Surface Preparation: After inspection, before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, spatter, slag, and flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC SP-3. D. Application: Apply structural steel primer immediately after surface preparation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods resulting in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. Structural Steel 2/08 05120 - 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that Structural Steel may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 ERECTION A. Surveys: 1. Employ registered professional engineer or land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel if deemed necessary. 2. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Owner Representative. 3. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Owner Representative. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: 1. Provide connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. 2. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. C. Anchor Bolts: 1. Anchor bolts and other connectors: As required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 2. Templates and other devices: As necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. D. Setting Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 4. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 5. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Structural Steel 05120 - 6 2/08 6. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. 7. Comply with grout manufacturer’s instructions. E. Field Assembly: 1. General requirements: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Allow for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on Shop Drawings. F. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. G. Gas Cutting: 1. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. 2. Cutting permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Owner Representative. 3. Finish gas-cut sections equal to sheared appearance when permitted. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch-up Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. 2. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting, by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 3. Touch up marred finishes. 4. Verify paint for areas to be fireproofed. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Comply with requirements of Section 01100. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Replace damaged materials with new materials complying with specified requirements. 3.07 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. Other Work: 1. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize soiling of other work. Structural Steel 2/08 05120 - 7 2. Promptly clean surfaces soiled by this section, repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during work. C. Structural Steel: 1. Clean exposed surfaces of structural steel using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 2. When work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and debris. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer to ensure work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Metal Fabrications 2/08 05500 - 1 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Ladder/safety cage. b. Miscellaneous framing and supports: 1) Video equipment support framing. c. Steel tube and pipe railings. d. Metal fabrication accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Rough hardware. 2) Grout and anchoring cement. 2. Install Only: a. Custom Hammered Metal railings for Dining Room Stairs and Ramp. Material provided by Kitchen Equipment Supplier (KES) 3. Provide the following for other sections to install including, but not limited to: a. Loose bearing and leveling plates. b. Loose lintels. c. Shelf and relieving angles. d. Pipe bollards. e. Metal fabrication accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Rough hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel 4. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Structural Welding Code - Steel,” AWS D1.1 2. “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Metal,” AWS D1.3 3. “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum,” AWS D1.2 4. “Metal Finishes Manual,” NAAMM 5. “Commercial Blast Cleaning,” SSPC-SP6 6. “Power Tool Cleaning,” SSPC-SP3 7. “Paint Application Specification No. 1,” SSPC-PA1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Fabrications: Items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes, castings not part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 2 2/08 B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. C. AWS: American Welding Society. D. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. E. SSPC: Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Data for products used, including paint products and grout. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication, erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of metal fabrications, their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors, bolts specified for installation under other sections. C. Calculations: Where indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, other information needed for structural analysis, signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Welder Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with specified requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E985 for structural performance based on testing performed in accordance with ASTM E894 and E935. B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Uniform load of 100 pounds per linear foot. applied nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally. b. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally. b. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 pounds applied to one square foot at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. Metal Fabrications 2/08 05500 - 3 C. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. D. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm that fabricated them. E. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel,” D1.3 “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel,” and D1.2 “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.” F. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. G. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls, other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying Work, guarantee dimensions, proceed with fabrication without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Handrails: Mount only on completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements. Mount only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, where location of concealed anchor plates clearly marked. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Fabrications Exposed to View: Provide materials selected for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A786. D. Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A569 or ASTM A36. E. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 4 2/08 F. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade as recommended by fabricator for type of use indicated. G. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed, ASTM A500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A501. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A53. H. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A570; or cold-rolled ASTM A611, Class 1; grade required for design loading. I. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, grade required for design loading. Coating designation indicated; if not indicated, G90. J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Type, grade (if applicable) selected by fabricator, as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. K. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type material, finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. L. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM 153. 2.02 PAINT A. General: 1. Typical: Red oxide primer with less than 100 parts per million of lead, mercury, cadmium or hexavalent chromium. 2. Surfaces to Receive Fireproofing. In addition to above, shop paint only with materials that are approved by the fireproofing manufacturer in compliance with UL or FM assemblies. B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd; good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion; compatible with finish paint systems indicated; capable of providing sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; comply with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content; dry film containing at least 94 percent zinc dust by weight; comply with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers. 2.03 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process, complying with: 1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A123 for galvanizing fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, forged shapes, plates, bars, and strips 0.0299 inch thick and heavier. 3. ASTM A386 for assembled steel products. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Metal Fabrications 2/08 05500 - 5 1. Comply with minimum requirements of referenced SSPC standards for exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and interiors (SSPC Zone 1A). 2. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1. 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Forming: Form from materials of size, thickness, shapes indicated, complying with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on Shop Drawings. Form exposed work true to line, level, with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. B. Thermal Movement: Allow for thermal movement for exterior assemblies resulting from maximum 150 degree change in ambient temperature in design, fabrication, installation to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, over stressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. C. Cutting and Shaping: Shear, punch metals cleanly, accurately. Remove burrs. Ease exposed edges to radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. D. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Use materials, methods to minimize distortion, develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Fuse without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. E. Joints: Form exposed connections with hairline joints flush, smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. F. Anchorage: Provide for type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate, space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. G. Joints: Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Shop Assembly: 1. Preassemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping, handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2. Cut, reinforce, drill, tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Finishes: Comply with referenced NAAMM manual. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.05 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. B. Siderails: Continuous steel flat bars, 1/2 inch by 2-1/2 inches, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 6 2/08 C. Bar Rungs: Square steel bars, 3/4 inch, spaced as shown on Drawings, or if not shown, evenly spaced (12 inches on center maximum). Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung that is filled with aluminum oxide grout. D. Support: Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5 feet on center by means of welded or bolted steel brackets. 1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches. 2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, gooseneck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. E. Ladder Safety Cages: 1. General: Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3; assemble by welding or riveting. 2. Primary Hoops: Steel bars, 5/16 inch by 4 inches, for top, bottom, and for cages longer than 20 feet, intermediate hoops spaced not more than 20 feet on center 3. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: Steel bars, 5/16 inch by 2 inches hoops spaced not more than 4 feet on center between primary hoops. 4. Vertical Bars: Steel bars, 5/16 inch by 2 inches, secured to each hoop, spaced approximately 9 inches on center 5. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction as indicated. F. Galvanizing: Galvanize ladders and cages, including, brackets and fasteners; in the following locations: Exterior locations unless indicated otherwise. Interior locations where indicated. 2.06 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication unless indicated otherwise. 2.07 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabrication: Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Sizing: Size loose lintels for equal bearing of 1 inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls unless indicated otherwise. 2.08 SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES A. Fabrication: Fabricate from steel angles of sizes indicated, for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. Metal Fabrications 2/08 05500 - 7 B. Shelf Angles: Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete framing. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING A. Toilet Partition Supports: 1. Beams: Continuous steel shapes of size required to limit deflection to L/360 between hangers, but use not less than C 8 by 11.5 channels or another shape with equivalent structural properties. 2. Hangers: Steel rods, 1/2 inch in diameter, spaced not more than 36 inches on center Thread rods to receive anchor and stop nuts. Fit hangers with wedge shape washers for full bearing on sloping flanges of support beam. 3. Braces and Angles: Steel angles of size required for rigid support of beam and for secure anchorage. B. Miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations: 1. Interior locations where indicated. 2.10 STEEL TUBE AND PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Interconnections: Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator’s option, unless otherwise indicated. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around. C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: 1. By bending. 2. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Ends: Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16-inch thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. H. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel pipe not less than 6 inches long and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve. I. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and over stressing of substrate. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 8 2/08 J. Fittings: For interior steel railings formed from steel pipe with black finish, provide nongalvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. K. Exterior Railings: For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. L. For interior steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2.11 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch minimum thickness steel base plate. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. 2.12 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Rough Hardware: Bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes required for framing and supporting woodwork, anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, dimensions required. Malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. B. Non-shrink Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, (int. ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, only) specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section. C. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, (non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying stain) with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. D. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. E. Product: One of the following or approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 1. Non-shrink Metallic Grouts: a. “Metox RM”; Chem-Masters Corporation. b. “Hi Mod Grout”; Euclid Chemical Company. c. “Embeco 885 and 636”; Master Builders. d. “Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC”; Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 2. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grouts: a. “Bonsal Construction Grout”; W. R. Bonsal Company. b. “Euco N-S Grout”; Euclid Chemical Company. c. “Kemset”; Chem-Masters Corporation. d. “Crystex”; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Metal Fabrications 2/08 05500 - 9 e. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. f. “Sonogrout”; Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 3. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: a. “Super Por-Rok”; Minwax Construction Products Division. 2.13 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process in compliance with the following requirements: a. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. b. ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier. c. Use process for galvanizing that will prepare item for painting 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning.” 3. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1” for shop painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that Metal Fabrications may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Sleeves: Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 10 2/08 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Temporary Bracing: Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 3.04 SETTING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. B. Setting: Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture. 2. Use nonmetallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Anchor supports securely to, and rigidly brace from, overhead building structure. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS, HANDRAILS A. Preparation: Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Metal Fabrications 2/08 05500 - 11 B. Securing Posts and Railing Ends: Secure posts to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts in concrete as indicated on Drawings. 2. Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. 3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. 4. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into concrete. Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing. C. Securing Handrails: Secure to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with at least 1-1/2 inches clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: 1. Bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 4. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 5. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for accurate location of backing members. 6. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. D. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at intervals not exceeding 40 feet. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches of posts. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solid with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer’s directions. Wrap bollard with bond breaker prior to installation of paving or slabs. 3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section “Painting” of these specifications. B. Galvanizing: For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION Rough Carpentry 2/08 06100 - 1 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Dimension lumber: 1) Plates. 2) Studs. 3) Blocking including, but not limited to: a) Wall mounted items, regardless of provider/installer of item. b) Casework. c) Grab bars. d) Window treatment (all windows in stud walls). e) Roof blocking. f) In walls behind all doors for bumper stops. 4) Joists. 5) Rafters. b. Boards: 1) Exposed. 2) Concealed. c. Miscellaneous lumber. d. Engineered wood products: 1) Composite wood headers. e. Plywood: 1) Plywood backing panels for all Work by Contractor and Owner/Tenant other contractors. 2) Roof sheathing. f. Oriented strand board: 1) Sheathing. g. Gypsum sheathing: 1) Water-resistant core. 2) Glass-fiber-surfaced. h. Wood treatment: 1) Pressure preservative. i. Rough carpentry accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Framing anchors and fasteners. 2) Sill sealer. 3) Air infiltration barrier. 4) Building paper. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06179 - Wood Trusses 2. Section 06400 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 3. Section 07210 - Building Insulation 4. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Rough Carpentry 06100 - 2 2/08 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “American Softwood Lumber Standard,” PS 20. 2. “Performance Standard and Policies for Structural-use Panels,” APA E445. 3. “U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood,” PS 1. 4. “Mat-formed Wood Particle board,” ANSI A 208.1. 5. “Recommended Nailing Schedule,” NFPA. 6. “Manual for House Framing,” NFPA. 7. “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction,” NFPA. 8. “APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial,” APA E30D. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ALSC: American Lumber Standards Committee. B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. C. APA: American Plywood Association. D. AWPB: American Wood Preservers Bureau. E. FRTW: Fire-retardant treated wood. F. NFPA: National Forest Products Association. G. PT: Pressure treated. 1.04 INSPECTION AGENCIES A. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. B. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. C. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. D. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. E. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Wood Treatment Data: Chemical treatment manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, installation, finishing. B. Preservative Treatment: Treatment plant certification stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, conformance with applicable standards. Rough Carpentry 2/08 06100 - 3 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage: Keep covered, dry. Protect against exposure to weather, contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks, under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar material. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, sticker between each course to provide air circulation. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe, cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Accessories: 1. Air Infiltration Barrier: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. DuPont Company; Fibers Department, Wilmington, DE. http://www.DuPont.com/ b. Raven Industries, Inc., Sioux Falls, SD. http://www.RavenInd.com/ c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber, General: 1. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20, applicable grading rules of referenced inspection agencies certified by ALSC Board of Review. 2. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements, grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 3. Nominal Sizes: As indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions; actual sizes required by PS 20, moisture content specified for each use; dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated; seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Dimension Lumber: 1. Structural Framing: Hem Fir, No. 2 or as noted on Drawings; 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches or wider. 2. Stud Framing: “Stud”, grade lumber, Hem-Fir, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches to 6 inches wide, 10 feet and shorter. 3. Other Light Framing: “Construction” grade lumber, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches or wider, any suitable species. C. Boards: 1. Exposed Boards: a. Where exposed in finished work: Moisture content 19 percent maximum, “S-DRY.” b. Where transparent, natural, or no finish indicated: Redwood, Select Heart Grade (RIS). Rough Carpentry 06100 - 4 2/08 c. Where painted finish indicated: Southern Pine, No. 2 Boards per SPIB, or Douglas Fir Construction Boards per WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Concealed Boards: Lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S-DRY), of following species and grade: a. Redwood Construction Common per RIS rules, Southern Pine No. 2 Boards per SPIB rules, or any species graded Construction Boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules. b. Redwood Merchantable per RIS rules, Southern Pine No. 3 Boards SPIB rules, or any species graded Standard or No. 3 Common Boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules. 3. Board Sizes: As indicated or, if not indicated, 1 inch by 8-inch boards. D. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. General Requirements: Wood for support or attachment of other work, of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: a. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. b. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber, any species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. E. Plywood Panels: 1. Plywood Panels: Comply with PS 1. For products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, comply with APA E445. 2. Trademark: Factory-mark each panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. Provide exterior grade plywood at all locations unless specified otherwise. 3. Concealed APA Performance-Rated Panels: Comply with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail where applicable, thickness. 4. Type of Use: a. Sheathing: 1) Grade: APA C-D, exterior glue. 2) Pressure preservative treated for roof parapet, curbs, etc. 3) Thickness as indicated but at least 5/8 inch. 4) Size: 4 feet by 8 feet. b. Plywood Backing Panels 1) Mounting Electrical or Telephone Equipment: Fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 1/2 inch nominal. 2) Grab bar mounting: APA C-D exterior glue; thickness as indicated, 5/8-inch minimum. F. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners, Anchorages: Size, type, material, finish indicated and recommended by applicable standards; comply with applicable Federal Specifications; size, type recommended by manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. Where rough carpentry work exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners, anchorages with hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A153). 2. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 15-pound type. 3. Sill Sealer: Glass fiber wool blanket, 1/2 inch thick by width of plates. 4. Air Infiltration Barrier: a. General Requirements: Complying with ASTM E1677; made from polyolefins; either cross- laminated films, woven strands, or spunbonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations to transmit water vapor but not liquid. b. Minimum Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm). Rough Carpentry 2/08 06100 - 5 c. Minimum Water-Vapor Transmission: 10 Perms (575 ng/Pa by s by square meters) when tested according to ASTM E96, Procedure A. d. Maximum Flame Spread: 25 per ASTM E84. e. Maximum Allowable Exposure Time: 3 months. 5. Plywood Sheathing Clips: Simpson PSC. G. Wood Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood indicated as PT or specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber), C9 (Plywood), and AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with AWPB Quality Mark Requirements: a. Above ground items: Pressure-treat with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. b. Wood members in contact with ground or fresh water: Pressure-treat with water-borne preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22. c. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment, comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece after drying, discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that rough carpentry may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Requirements: Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line, cut, and fitted. B. Defective Units: Discard if defects might impair quality of work, or if units are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Fastening: Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nails heads on exposed carpentry work, fill holes. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood, predrill as required. 3.03 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, SLEEPERS A. General Requirements: Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. Rough Carpentry 06100 - 6 2/08 B. Attach to Substrates: As required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts, nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Grounds: Permanent, of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide, of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. D. Blocking: 1. Provide 2 by 8 wood blocking behind all wall-mounted fixtures. 2. Window treatment blocking shall extend 8 inches minimum beyond the window opening. 3.04 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb, level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. Provide fire treated wood for all furring. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 3.05 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members: Sizes, on spacings shown, frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of NFPA “Manual for House Framing.” Do not splice structural members between supports. B. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with “Recommended Nailing Schedule” of “Manual for Wood Frame Construction” and “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction” published by N.F.P.A. C. Firestop concealed spaces of wood framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at the ceiling line of the top story. Where fire stops are not automatically provided by the framing system used, use closely fitted wood blocks of nominal 2-inch thick lumber of the same width as framing members. D. Install sill sealer under sills and where exterior wood framing abuts masonry or concrete. 3.06 STUD FRAMING A. Unless otherwise shown, use 2 by 4 or 2 by 6 wood studs spaced 16 inches on center with wide face perpendicular to direction of wall or partition. Provide single bottom plate and double-top plates 2 inches thick by width of studs. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction. B. Studs shall be doubled (one stud and one trimmer at all door and window openings) to provide 1-1/2 inch lintel bearing at each end for full width of lintel, unless noted otherwise. C. Construct corners and intersections with not less than three studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim. D. Brace all corners with 20-gage metal strap bracing. Rough Carpentry 2/08 06100 - 7 3.07 FLOOR JOISTS FRAMING A. General: Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. Install with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inch of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal connectors; frame to wood supporting members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with metal connectors. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 feet. B. Lap member framing from opposite sides of beams, girders or partitions not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking (2 inches thick by depth of joist) over supports. C. Under jamb studs at openings, provide solid blocking between joist. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Plywood Installation: 1. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, “APA Plywood Design/ Construction Guide,” Residential and Commercial,” for types of plywood products and applications indicated. Comply with “CodePlus” provisions of above referenced guide. 2. Fastening Methods: a. Roof Sheathing: 1) Nail to framing. b. Plywood Backing Panels: 1) Nail or screw to supports. B. Oriented Strand board (OSB) Installation: 1. General: Allow 1/16 inch spacing at panel ends and 1/8 inch at panel edges, unless noted otherwise by manufacturer. 2. Nails: Cement coated box nails, unless otherwise noted. Stapling of oriented Strand board not permitted. 3. Wall Sheathing: a. Place vertically with joints over studs, plates or 2-inch blocking. b. Protect panels against damage until roofing is installed. c. Stagger end joints and allow 1/8-inch space. End joints shall occur on supports. Space panel edges 1/8 inch. d. Nail 6 inches on center along panel edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. e. Use 8d coated box nails. 3.09 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Cover sheathing with air infiltration barrier as follows: 1. Apply plastic sheet to comply with manufacturer’s printed directions. 2. Apply air infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch (100 mm) overlap. 3.10 SCHEDULES A. Nailing Schedule: Comply with “Nailing Schedule” in applicable edition of Uniform Building Code, unless more stringent requirements are specified. Rough Carpentry 06100 - 8 2/08 B. Pressure Treated Wood Preservative. Where indicated on the Drawings or if not indicated, including but not limited to: 1. Sill plates in contact with concrete or masonry. 2. Roof blocking and framing used for built-up roofing and single membrane roofing. 3.11 CLEANING A. Do not allow accumulation of scraps and debris. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition at all times. END OF SECTION Wood Trusses 2/08 06179 - 1 SECTION 06179 WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Wood trusses: 1) Girder. 2) Parallel chord trusses. b. Wood truss accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Lateral bracing. 2) Fasteners, connectors, anchorage devices, bolts, clips, etc. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Timber Construction Standards” of the American Institute of Timber Construction 2. “Quality Control Manual” of the Truss Plate Institute 3. Uniform Building Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Complete materials list of items to be provided including manufacturer, specifications, and other data to prove compliance with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Complete Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330 showing species, sizes, stress grades of lumber proposed to be used, pitch, span, camber, configuration, spacing of truss, connector type thickness, size, location, design value, bearing details of trusses. Shop Drawings shall be certified by registered engineer. C. Installation Procedure: Manufacturer’s complete recommended installation procedures that will become basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation. D. Design Calculations: Submit, if required, complete design calculations for trusses as necessary to obtain building permits, other acceptance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Engineer: Manufacturer will provide services of Structural Engineer registered to practice jurisdiction and design wood trusses to sustain indicated loads, specified or required by local codes, with spans, profiles, and arrangements shown on Drawings. Wood Trusses 06179 - 2 2/08 B. Referenced Standards: Comply with pertinent provisions of reference standards. C. Qualification of Workers for Actual Installation: Only skilled workers completely familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Protection: Protect materials before, during, after installation. Protect installed work, materials of other trades. 2. Storage: Prevent contact with ground or other horizontal surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN A. Design Loads: Design to configurations shown on Drawings to resist design live load with wind load, or loads required by applicable codes and regulations whichever may be greater. Include consideration of any and all incurred dead loads. Limit deflection to 1/240 span. Fabricator is solely responsible for adequacy of truss design. B. Fabrication: Fabricate in strict accordance with Shop Drawings, referenced standards, other data accepted by Owner Representative or otherwise required. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Anchor Clips: Teco, “Trip-L-Grip” galvanized framing anchor at each truss end. B. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described, but required for complete and proper installation as selected by Contractor subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work will be performed. B. Discrepancies: Correct conditions detrimental to timely, proper completion of work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades performing Work that interfaces this Section. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install work in strict accordance with original design, accepted Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring components firmly into position. Wood Trusses 2/08 06179 - 3 B. Trusses: Hoist into position with proper bracing secured at designated lifting points. Do not bend trusses. Install temporary, horizontal, cross bracing to hold trusses plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing is installed. Install permanent bracing, related components prior to application of loads to trusses. Tighten loose connectors. Restrict construction loads to prevent over-stressing of truss members. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION Interior Architectural Woodwork 2/08 06400 - 1 SECTION 06400 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Standing and running trim, shelving and rails: 1) Wood. b. Wood paneling. c. Miscellaneous ornamental items. d. Wood door and window casing. e. Architectural woodwork accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Hardware. 2) Fasteners and anchors. 3) Joint sealant. 2. Coordination Only: a. Bar front panels and laminates at back bar wall are by Kitchen Equipment Supplier (KES). Contractor shall coordinate the Work with this installation. b. Host Stand, Bar Casework, Wait station casework and cabinet room divider furniture are by Kitchen Equipment Supplier (KES). Contractor shall coordinate the Work with this installation. c. Office Casework is by Tenant. Contractor shall coordinate the Work with this installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 08800 - Glazing 3. Section 09910 - Paint 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Industry,” AWI 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. AWI: American Woodwork Institute C. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association D. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound Interior Architectural Woodwork 06400 - 2 2/08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations for each product, process specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including plans, elevations, sections details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and adjoining system. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Quality: Submit woodwork manufacturer’s (fabricator’s) certification, stating that fabricated woodwork complies with quality grades, other requirements indicated. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide architectural woodwork units made of components of standard construction furnished by 1 manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of Architectural Woodwork. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of architectural woodwork. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of architectural woodwork, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of Work. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to latest edition of AWI referenced standard, unless otherwise specified. 2. Comply with pertinent VOC regulations in regards to: a. Adhesives. b. Finishes. C. Field Samples: If requested, furnish sample of each type of architectural woodwork to the Owner Representative for review prior to manufacture/installation. Owner Representative will forward approved sample to the Project site for installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect architectural woodwork from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Woodwork Manufacturer: a. Manufacturer shall establish optimum moisture content, required temperature, and humidity condition. Interior Architectural Woodwork 2/08 06400 - 3 b. Manufacturer shall advise installer regarding temperature, humidity requirements for woodwork installation and storage areas. 2. Installer: a. Do not install until required temperature, relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. b. Maintain temperature, humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 3. Site Condition: a. Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum temperature of 85 degrees F, and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent in spaces to receive Work outlined in this Section. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Paneling: 1. General Requirements: Custom fabricated; comply with following requirements for finish type: a. Panel: 11/16” x 4” V & Ctr. V Tongue and Groove Paneling b. Transparent finish: 1) Grade: Premium. 2) Species: Red Oak, rift sawn/cut. B. Miscellaneous Ornamental Wood Trim Items: 1. General Requirements: Custom fabricated; comply with following requirements for finish type: a. Profiles: based on Universal Wood Trim. b. Transparent finish: 1) Grade: Premium. 2) Species: Red Oak, rift sawn/cut. C. Wood Door and Window Casing: 1. General Requirements: Custom fabricated; comply with following requirements for finish type: a. Transparent finish: 1) Grade: Premium. 2) Species: Red Oak, rift sawn/cut. D. Architectural Woodwork Accessories: 1. General Requirements: Provide cabinet hardware, accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items which are specified in Division 8 section “Finish Hardware.” 2. Fasteners and Anchors: a. Screws: Material, type, size, finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. b. Nails: Material, type, size, finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06400 - 4 2/08 c. Anchors: Material, type, size, finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations, elsewhere as required for corrosion-resistance; toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 3. Joint Sealant: One part polyurethane. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in installation areas. 2. Fabrication: Fabricate to dimensions, profiles, details indicated with openings, mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware, other items and work. Ease edges to 1/16 inch radius, for corners of cabinets, edges of solid wood members less than 1 inch nominal thickness, 1/8 inch radius for edges of rails, similar members over 1 inch nominal thickness. 3. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, fitting. 4. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, similar items. Locate openings accurately, use templates or roughing-in diagrams for proper size, shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges of cutouts with water-resistant coating. 5. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements, verify dimensions, Shop Drawing details as required for accurate fit. B. Standing and Running Trim, Shelving and Rails, Wood Door and Window Frames: 1. General Requirements: Rout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. Assemble, trim railings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Standing and Running Trim, Shelving and Rails: Comply with AWI Section 300. 2.04 FINISH A. Wood Shop Finishes: 1. All trim shall be finished offsite. Contractor shall minimize the need for field touchups and refinishing. 2. Transparent Finish: Premium grade with stain with rubbed medium gloss sheet. B. Woodwork Accessories: 1. Hardware. 2. Joint Sealant: Color to be selected by Owner Representative from standard colors 2.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Chemical Composition: Interior Architectural Woodwork 2/08 06400 - 5 1. Formaldehyde: Materials, adhesives and finishes are to be in compliance with HUD 24 and California’s Proposition 65 standards. 2. VOC: Products are to be in conformance with applicable VOC standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that Architectural Woodwork may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Environmental Conditions: Verify that prevailing temperature, humidity conditions are within acceptable range prior to beginning installation. Proceed only when work which may be detrimental to woodwork is complete and all involved parties agree that acceptable environmental conditions can be maintained for duration of project. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install plumb, level, true, straight, with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level (including tops); with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. Scribe, cut to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. B. Pressure Treated Wood: Handle, store, install in compliance with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer including those for adhesives, where required for installation. C. Anchoring: Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping, blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners, blind nailing as required for complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. D. Standing and Running Trim, Shelving and Rails: 1. General: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with referenced Quality Standards for joinery. 2. Prepackaged Wood Storage Shelving: Complete assembly of units, install in areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated. E. Joint Sealant: Interior Architectural Woodwork 06400 - 6 2/08 1. Seal all base to floor and wall. 2. Seal window sills. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT A. Damaged and Defective Woodwork: Repair where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.05 CLEANING A. Woodwork: Clean exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection: Provide final protection, maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Millwork Profiles: 1. Base: Universal a. 7435 1x6 b. 7073 1/4 shoe c. 7151 cap 2. Casing: Universal a. 7346 1x4 b. 7151 cap 3. Crown: Universal a. 7229 1x6 b. 7130 cap 4. Wainscot: Universal a. 7130 trim (toilets) 5. Chair rail: Universal a. 7346 1x4 END OF SECTION Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 2/08 06620 - 1 SECTION 06620 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Plastic coated panel. b. Panel trim. c. Glass fiber reinforced plastic panel accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Fasteners and adhesives. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide glass fiber reinforced plastic panels units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of glass fiber reinforced plastic panels. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of glass fiber reinforced plastic panels. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of glass fiber reinforced plastic panels, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect glass fiber reinforced plastic panels from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Do not deliver to the site until the building is enclosed or other enclosed storage is available. Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 06620 - 2 2/08 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Plastic Coated Panel: 1. Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise design is based on products of Marlite Company, Dover, OH. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Crane-Kemlite, Joliet, IL. b. Glasteel, Collierville, TN. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Panel Trim 1. Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise, design is based on products of Marlite Company, Dover, OH. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Crane-Kemlite, Joliet, IL. b. Glasteel, Collierville, TN. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Plastic Coated Panel: 1. Panels: 4 by 12, of embossed Marlite FRP, Class C, non-fire rated, 3/32 inch thick, USDA approved. 2. Color: White P-100. B. Panel Trim: 1. Trim: Standard trim pieces by Marlite Company. 2. Battens: 8 foot lengths, flat batten No. M365 FP. 3. Ceiling trim: 8 foot lengths, inside corner No. M350 FP. 4. Edge trim: 8 foot lengths, edge trim No. M370 FP. 5. Outside corners: 8 foot lengths of outside angle No. M360 FP. 6. Outside corners guard: 8 foot lengths of outside corner guard No. M960 FP. C. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panel Accessories: 1. Fasteners and adhesives: a. Mechanical fasteners: Countersunk screws. b. Adhesive: Marlite purpose construction adhesive No. C-375. 2. Sealant: Marlite silicone construction sealant No. MS-250. 3. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of glass fiber reinforced plastic panels, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 2/08 06620 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that glass fiber reinforced plastic panels may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panel vertically over substrate. 1. Apply adhesive beads to face of wall and back of panels. 2. Use minimum number of trim pieces. 3. Minimum length of trim is 4 foot. 4. Adhesive-apply flat batten strips and inside and outside corners. 5. Use bead of silicone sealant at all corners, tops, bottoms of panels. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials, procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust units to operate in proper manner and easily without binding. 3.06 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: 1. Clean exposed surfaces of glass fiber reinforced plastic panels using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 2. In event of spilling or splashing compound of finish material onto other surfaces, immediately remove spilled or splashed material and all trace of residue to acceptance of Owner Representative. END OF SECTION Building Insulation 2/08 07210 - 1 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Batt insulation: 1) Thermal. 2) Acoustical. b. Rigid insulation. c. Spray foam sealant. d. Vapor retarder. e. Accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Tape. 2. The following is not included in this section: a. Foundation insulation (Section 04810). b. Cavity wall insulation (Section 04810). c. Roof insulation (Section 07540). d. Rigid insulation included with stucco (Section 07246). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 4. Section 07242 – Fiber Reinforced Stucco 5. Section 07840 - Fire Stopping 6. Section 07540 - Thermoplastic Roofing 7. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. C272: Water Absorption 2. C518: Thermal Transmission 3. C578: Standard Specification 4. D1621: Compressive Properties 5. D2126: Dimensional Stability 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Building Insulation 07210 - 2 2/08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide building insulation systems made of components of standard construction furnished by 1 manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of building insulation. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of building insulation. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of building insulation, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect building insulation from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; if conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 2. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Batt Insulation: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Toledo, OH. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. CertainTeed, Valley Forge, PA b. Schuller, Denver, CO. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Rigid Board Insulation: 1. Extruded Polystyrene: a. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of UC Industries, Parsippany, NJ. Building Insulation 2/08 07210 - 3 b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1) Pactiv Corporation, Atlanta, GA. 2) Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI. 3) Minnesota Diversified Products, Inc., Rockford, MN. 4) Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. C. Spray Foam Adhesive/Sealant: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on Contech PL300 Foam Board Adhesive by Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc., Minneapolis, MN. 2. Other acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Pro-Series PR-225 by Ohio Sealants, Inc., Mentor, OH. b. Maxbond by H.B. Fuller, Inc., Palatine, IL. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. D. Laminated Vapor Retarder: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on Rufco Super Sampson 400SSB by Raven Industries, Sioux Falls, SD. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Griffolyn Type 105 by Reef Industries, Inc., Houston, TX. b. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. E. Accessories including, but not limited to: 1. Tape: a. Standard of Quality: Design is based on #8086 Contractor Sheathing Tape by 3M, St. Paul, MN. b. Other acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1) Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: 1. Thermal glass fiber batts of thickness indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASTM C665 Type I, non- combustible under ASTM E136. 2. Sound Attenuating Insulation: a. Fiberglass sound control batts, STC of 49 when used with wall type indicated. Batt thickness, unless stated differently on Drawings, as recommended by manufacturer. B. Rigid Board Insulation: 1. General: Use preformed Units to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 2. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by expansion of polystyrene base resin in extrusion process complying with ASTM C578 for type indicated; five year aged R-values (ASTM C518) 5.4 and 5 per Building Insulation 07210 - 4 2/08 inch at 40 and 5 degrees F (4.4 and 23.9 degrees C), respectively; dimensional stability (ASTM D2126) of 1.0 percent; Water absorption (ASTM C272) of 0.15 percent (maximum). a. Below Grade Insulation: 1) Product: Formular 250 2) Type: IV 3) Minimum Density: 1.6 pounds per cubic foot unless otherwise indicated. 4) Compressive Resistance: 25 pounds per square inch. b. Above Grade Insulation: 1) Product: Formular 150. 2) Type: X. 3) Minimum Density: 1.35 pounds per cubic foot unless otherwise indicated. 4) Compressive Resistance (ASTM D1621): 15 pounds per square inch. C. Adhesive: Product approved for this purpose by Manufacturer of insulation. D. Spray Foam Sealant: Non-shrink closed cell expanding urethane. E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 1. ASTM D4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq.m). 2. Laminated High Density Polyethylene Sheet: Complete with other accessories where required. F. Accessories: All other materials not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation of building insulation subject to acceptance of Owner Representative including, but not limited to: 1. Tape: 2 inches wide. 2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Content: 1. Chemical Composition: a. Rigid Board Insulation: Shall not contain chloroflurocarbons (CFCs). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that building insulation may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Batts: Install snug fitting to completely fill cavities; fit to exterior side of electrical devices and pipes. Fill voids around windows, door frames, and miscellaneous exterior openings. Where necessary, fasten to Building Insulation 2/08 07210 - 5 inside of gypsum sheathing board using 9/16-inch staples with divergent points (staple at corner and center of each batt). B. Rigid Board Insulation: Attach with adhesive specifically recommended for such use. Anchor with fasteners recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Owner Representative spaced 12 inch on center maximum. Use expanding form sealant between insulation panels. Fill holes and openings. C. Vapor Barrier: 1. Walls: Apply full height continuous vapor barrier over warm side face of studs. Temporarily attach to ceiling deck with tape or other suitable material until interior covering is applied. Where necessary to lap vapor barrier, lap minimum 2 stud spaces and tape. 2. Roofs: a. Insulation Above Deck: Apply continuous vapor retarder with minimum number of laps on roof deck prior to installation of insulation. Where necessary to lap vapor retarder, lap minimum of 6 inches and tape. D. Other Insulation: Apply as indicated on Drawings or required by construction in such a manner to provide continuous barrier to movement of heat and air. 3.03 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of installation, visually inspect each insulated area, verify that insulation is complete and properly installed. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean construction area of all scrap insulation at the end of each working day. END OF SECTION Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 2/08 07246 - 1 SECTION 07246 FIBER-REINFORCED STUCCO PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Weather resistive barrier. b. Lath. c. Fiber-reinforced stucco system: 1) Base coat. 2) Finish coat. 3) Water. 4) Sand. d. Fiber-reinforced stucco accessories including but not limited to: 1) Fasteners. 2) Corner reinforcement. 3) Beads and joints. 4) Decorative shapes and forms. a) Molded Polystyrene. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 3. Section 07210 - Building Insulation 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. A653: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. 2. C144: Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. C847: Specification for Metal Lath. 4. C926: Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster. 5. C1063: Specification for installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement- Based Plaster. 6. D226: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 7. D4216: Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Related Plastic Building Products Compounds. B. UBC: 1994 Edition. Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 07246 - 2 2/08 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance and cleaning recommendations. B. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer’s standard color and texture samples of finish with Product Data. 2. Color Verification: Prior to shipping, submit 12 inch by 12 inch (minimum) samples for each type of finish indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing a full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Include notification to Owner Representative if selection is not within quoted price range. C. Maintenance Manual: 1. Provide to the Owner, maintenance and warranty data in “Maintenance Manual” at Substantial Completion. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Six projects of similar size, scope and type of which 3 have been in successful use for 3 years or longer. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of fiber-reinforced stucco. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of fiber-reinforced stucco, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Certifications: Provide to the Owner Representative, certification of the Installer from the manufacturer of fiber-reinforced stucco. C. Pre-installation Meetings: If requested by the Owner Representative, the installer and Manufacturer’s technical representative shall meet with Owner Representative prior to the start of installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect fiber-reinforced stucco from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Do not deliver to the site until enclosed storage is available. Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing manufacturer’s name, mixing instruction, quality control batch number, and ICBO Research Report Number. C. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply if ambient temperature cannot be kept above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) during application and drying period; Prior to installation, the wall shall be free of residual moisture. Provide heat if temperatures are below 40 degrees F. Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 2/08 07246 - 3 2. Do not apply if ambient temperature exceeds 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) within 24 hours of application. Protect stucco from uneven or excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.07 WARRANTY A. 1 year material and installation. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide for maintenance purposes, record of each type of material installed. Mark to identify type, and color including quality control batch number. Include with Maintenance Manual. B. Maintenance Service: Provide minimum of one inspection of fiber-reinforced stucco within 1 year of Final Completion of system. Provide maintenance as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Parex Inc., Redan, GA. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Sto Industries, Atlanta, GA. 2. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Weather Resistive Barrier: Minimum Grade D kraft building paper complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 14-1 or asphalt -saturated rag felt complying with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15), non-perforated. B. Lath: Expanded metal lath complying with ASTM C847 for material, type, configuration and other characteristics listed below: 1. Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from structural-quality, zinc coated (galvanized) sheet steel complying with ASTM A653, G60 minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or schedules. 2. Type: Diamond-mesh lath. Woven-wire lath will not be allowed. 3. Configuration: Self-furring; 3.4 pounds per square yard (1.4 kilogram per square meter). C. Fiber-Reinforced Stucco: 1. Base Coat: Factory-prepared mixture of Type I, II, or III Portland cement complying with U.B.C. Standard 19-1 (Part I), Type E glass fibers and proprietary additives. 2. Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: Factory-mixed formulation of acrylic emulsion, colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates specifically recommended by acrylic-based finish manufacturer for use Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 07246 - 4 2/08 over base coat. Provide colors selected from Owner Representative from manufacturer’s full range of colors; provide minimum of 2 colors in pattern as indicated on Drawings. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Sand Clean and free from deleterious amounts of loam, clay, silt, soluble salts and organic matter; comply with ASTM C144 and manufacturer’s requirements. D. Accessories including but not limited to: 1. Fasteners: Minimum No. 11 gage galvanized nails, having 3/8 inch diameter head or No. 15 gage galvanized staples, either having sufficient length to penetrate wood framing not less than one inch; staples to have a minimum crown width of 7/8 inch (O.D.). 2. Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large mesh, diamond metal lath fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475 inch (1.2 mm) diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of Portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. 3. Beads and Joints: a. General: 1) Coordinate depth with thickness of plaster coat. 2) Materials shall be approved for required fire ratings 3) Comply with ASTM C1063 for material, type, configuration and other characteristics listed below: b. Material: 1) Galvanized Steel: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G40 minimum coating designation; minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick. 2) Plastic: Approved by the manufacturer complying with ASTM D4216, high-impact polyvinyl chloride (PVC) for building products; minimum 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick. c. Components: 1) Corner beads: Small nose Corner beads fabricated with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. 2) Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges. 3) Curved Casing Beads: Square-edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated. 4) Control Joints: Prefabricated from either a folded pair of non-perforated screed in M-shaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges, or pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to provide slip-joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch (3 to 16 mm); provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. 5) Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer’s standard profile designed for use at sill plate to form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from zinc- coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 6) Reveal Beads, Other Special Shapes: As indicated on the Drawings. a) AMICO chamfered stucco reveal. b) 7/8” ground and 1” reveal. c) AMCSR780-1000. d. Forms: (contractor option for wood board forms or insulation forms) 1) Forms my be hand framed with blocking material and sheathing. 2) Molded polystyrene insulation: a) rigid cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold, complying with ASTM C578 for Type I. b) Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 inches by 48 inches and thickness and shapes required to form cornice and belt lines. 4. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of fiber-reinforced stucco, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 2/08 07246 - 5 2.03 MIXES A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s requirements and ASTM C926 for base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that fiber-reinforced stucco may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean substrates and plaster bases for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substance that may impair the work. 2. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces. 3. Coordinate with Division 6 Sections for permanent wood grounds, if any, and with Division 7 Sections for flashing, if any. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Weather Resistive Barrier: Place 2 layers of weather-resistive barrier over substrates except for EPS board where the barrier may be behind the board. B. Lath: 1. Provide metal lath type, configuration and weight indicated, complying with referenced ASTM lathing installation standards. 2. Provide sufficient clearance between lath and substrate to allow embedment in the coating. 3. Staples are permitted only in Group II species. 4. Care must be taken to avoid over driving the fasteners. C. Accessories: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of each type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install securely to plaster base with tight joints and in alignment. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations: 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement. 2. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated and at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by the Owner Representative if not indicated at such locations: a. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in substrate directly behind plaster membrane. Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 07246 - 6 2/08 b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 16 feet (4.9 m) in either direction or a length to width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. c. Wall Areas: Not more than 144 square feet (13 square meters). d. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 square feet (9 square meters). e. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. D. Plaster Application: 1. General: a. Apply plaster materials, compositions and mixes in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and ASTM C926. b. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. c. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as plaster grounds, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. d. Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with corner beads or square and true with plaster faces. 2. Base Coat: a. The exterior cementitious coating is applied by hand troweling or machine spraying in one or two coats to as minimum of 3/8 inch thickness. b. The lath must be embedded in the minimum coating thickness and therefore cannot be exposed. 3. Finish Coat: a. The finish coat must be applied within 24 hours after the base coat unless the latter is spray/brushed with an acrylic-bonding adhesive, or a bonding treatment is added to the finish- coat stucco mix prior to application. b. Finish (Parex 500 Series): 1) Smooth, and Sand Fine or Course: Using clean stainless steel trowel, apply a uniform coat slightly thicker than largest aggregate size. Follow with a horizontal motion to level and to finish to an application no thicker than the largest aggregate size of the finish material. To texture finishes, use a clean plastic float, wipe frequently and apply moderate pressure with consistent appropriate motion, rolling the aggregates to obtain desired texture. Finish coat to match Owner Representative’s approved sample. c. Curing: 1) Moist cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C926 including written instructions for time between coats and curing in “Annex A2 Design Considerations.” 2) Keep stucco moist for at least 48 hours by lightly fogging surface when needed; keep fogging after plaster takes initial set. 3) Do not spray surface with high pressure water for at least 72 hours. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION A. Sequence of Operations: Sequence plaster application with installation or other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. B. Site Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from as true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 foot (3 m) straightedge placed at any location on surface. 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials, procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. Fiber-Reinforced Stucco 2/08 07246 - 7 B. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. 3.06 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: 1. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. 2. Promptly remove plaster from surfaces not to receive plaster; repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plaster work. 3. Clean exposed surfaces of fiber-reinforced stucco using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 4. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and debris. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer’s Representative to schedule and attend meeting with Owner’s Representatives to explain: 1. Maintenance and Care Instructions. 2. Recommended Maintenance Program. 3. Warranty Requirements. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in as manner acceptable to manufacturer to ensure work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. Tower wall with reveal accent joints. B. Banner wall with reveal accent joints. C. Bar wall with joints above windows. D. Belt line shape and forms. E. Cornice line shape and forms. END OF SECTION Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 1 SECTION 07540 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide: 1. Fully adhered thermoplastic waterproofing membrane system. a. TPO. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roofing insulation. a. Extruded polystyrene. 4. Recovery board. a. Glass fiber-faced gypsum board. 5. Single-ply membrane roof accessories including, but not limited to: a. Substrate Board. b. Membrane Walkway. c. Protective Mat. d. Pipe seals. e. Adhesives, Tapes, and Sealants. f. Flashing. 6. Roof Specialties: a. Roof Drains. b. Manufactured Curbs. B. Perform the following: 1. Installation of new roofing: a. Installation of new, single-ply membrane roofing over new building area. b. To be compatible with existing roofing system. 2. Modifications to existing roof: a. Single-ply membrane compatible to existing system. b. Tie-in to new roof. 3. Removal and legal disposal of existing roofing, insulation, and flashing, including obtaining, preparing, and filing of PCA documentation. 4. Removal, replacement of existing roof-top equipment. 5. Seal roof for weather tightness until modifications can be made. C. The following is not included in this section: 1. Roof drains (Division 15). 2. Manufactured curbs (Division 15). D. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 3. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers 4. Section 10430 – Exterior Illuminated Signage 5. Division 15 – Mechanical Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 2 2/08 6. Division 16 – Electrical 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. C36: Gypsum Wallboard 2. C208: Cellulosic (Wood) Fiber Insulating Board 3. C552: Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation 4. C553: Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation 5. C578: Foamed Plastic Insulations. 6. C728: Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. 7. C1177: Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate 8. C1289: Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board 9. D448: Ballast used in Single-Ply Roofing 10. D573: Internal Reflection Spectoscopy 11. D751: Coated Fabrics 12. D1204: Stretching at Elevated Temps 13. D2136: Low Temp Bend Test 14. D2137: Brittleness Point of Plastics and Elastomers 15. D4397: Standards for Poly Sheeting 16. D4637: Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane Applications 17. D5036: Standard Practice for Application of PVC Sheet Roofing 18. D6878: Standard for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing 19. E96: Water Vapor Transmission 20. E108: Fire Tests for Roof Coverings 21. E838: Accelerated Outdoor Weathering B. Federal Specifications: FS HH-I-1972/2: Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyisocyanurate C. Factory Mutual Global: 1. Class I-90 Rating 2. FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 3. FMG 4450 and 4470, Membrane Roofing System Approval Guide D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: Class A Fire Rating. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. B. TPO: Thermoplastic Polyolefin. C. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI’s “Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing System,” before multiplication by a safety factor. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 3 1. Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight and resist exposure to weather without failure. 2. Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as approved by roofing manufacturer. 3. Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7. 4. Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FMG’s “Approval Guide” for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. a. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, maintenance recommendations, and copy of warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication; installation drawings; roof insulation plans indicating layout, slopes, average R-value, base flashings and membrane terminations; fastening patterns; roof seaming plan; details of components, within system and between system and adjoining system. D. Component Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard components, including vapor retarder, roof insulation, membrane, membrane flashings, securement devices, walkway pads or rolls, pavers, and ballast, if any, with Product Data and Shop Drawings. E. Where products contain recycled content and are intended to meet Project Environmental Goals for material content, submit documentation certifying recycled (PI or PC) content, total cost of products, and where required, total volume of materials. F. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Reports: Manufacturer’s representative written observation reports. 2. Maintenance and care instructions for O& M Manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain primary flexible sheet roofing from a single manufacturer. 2. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. 10 years experience in the manufacture of thermoplastic membrane roofing. b. ISO 9002 Certification. 2. Contractor: 3 years experience in the installation of thermoplastic membrane roofing. 3. Personnel: For actual installation of membrane roofing, use personnel skilled in Work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of Work. C. Regulatory Requirements: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 4 2/08 1. EPA Energy Star ratings. D. Certifications: Provide to Owner Representative, certification of the installer from the manufacturer of thermoplastic membrane roofing. E. Manufacturer’s Observation: 1. Manufacturer’s agent shall visit site while roofing work is in progress as necessary, including final inspection for warranty requirements, to observe procedures and methods, keep log of time, instructions given, actual procedures, field conditions, etc. 2. Submit 2 copies of report to Owner Representative. F. Notification: Notify Owner Representative at least 24 hours before performing seaming operations. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. C. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. D. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. E. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather: Proceed when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements. B. Drawings do not purport to show actual field dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of Work. Field-verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide 10- year non-prorated manufacturer’s total system warranty including repair or replacement, materials and labor at no cost to Owner. Failure includes roof leaks. B. Contractor’s Maintenance Warranty: 1. During a period of 5 years from the date of final acceptance of the Work, maintain the roof system, including wood blocking, vapor retarder, insulation, roof membrane, and flashing, in a watertight condition, and repair all defects which result from faulty workmanship or defective materials, without further cost to the Owner, including replacement of any wet insulation caused by such defects. 2. Excluded from this warranty: a. Damage to roof, buildings and contents caused by acts or omissions of the Owner. b. Fire, lightning, winds of peak gust speeds of 55 mph or higher measured at 10 meters above the ground, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of the elements. c. Movement or failure of the supporting building structure that causes membrane or flashing failure. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 5 d. Vapor condensation beneath the roof. 3. Before expiration of the warranty period, inspect the roof in the presence of the Owner and make necessary correction of deficiencies. 4. The warranty shall remain in force until necessary repair work has been done. 5. Use form at end of this Section for 5-year Contractor’s Warranty. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Provide for maintenance purposes, quantity equal to 2 percent of each type of material installed. 2. Furnish from same production run as materials installed, except for those products subject to “shelf life.” 3. Package and mark to identify location, material type, and color. 4. Deliver and store where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. TPO Membrane Roofing System: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of GAF Materials Corporation, Wayne, NJ 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Carlisle Syn Tec Inc. b. Firestone Building Products Company, Carmel, IN c. GenFlex Roofing Systems d. DuroLast Roofing, Saginaw Michigan e. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by Owner Representative. B. Insulation: Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by membrane manufacturer, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Extruded Polystyrene: a. DiversiFoam Products, Inc. b. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI c. Owens Corning, Toledo, OH d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by Owner Representative. 2. Wood (Cellulostic) Fiberboard: a. Firestone FiberTop b. International Bildrite Fiberboard 3. Substrate/Recovery Board: a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1) Dens-Deck Prime by Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 2) Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by Owner Representative. C. Vapor Retarder: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 6 2/08 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Carlisle Coatings b. Grace Ice and Water Shield by Grace Construction Products c. Polyguard d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by Owner Representative. D. Roof Accessories: 1. Accessories for membrane system to be provided by or approved by membrane manufacturer. E. Roof Specialties: 1. Rubber Pads: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Roof-Gard Pads by Humane, Baraboo, WI b. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by Owner Representative. 2.02 TPO ROOFING SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced TPO: Uniform, flexible, internally glass reinforced. 1. Thickness: 45 mils. 2. Exposed Face Color: White. 3. Physical Properties: a. Breaking Strength: 1500 psi, machine direction; 1300 psi cross-machine direction; ASTM D412. b. Ultimate Elongation: 500 percent ASTM D412. c. Tensile Set: 15 percent, maximum; ASTM D412. d. Tearing Strength: 340 pound/foot per inch; ASTM D624. e. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 degrees F. f. Ozone Resistance: 166 hours at 104 degrees F, wrapped around 3-inch-diameter mandrel: No cracks g. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 degrees F; ASTM D573. h. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours immersion at 158 degrees F; ASTM D471. i. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent: ASTM D1204. 2.03 VAPOR RETARDER SYSTEM A. Cold-applied self-adhering membrane: 1. Comply with ASTM D4397. 2. 10 mil polyethylene. 2.04 ROOF INSULATION A. Insulation system shall have a minimum average R-value = 25 at 75 degrees F or R-value = 22.2 at 75 degrees F. B. Provide minimum of 2 layers, staggered in each direction. C. Provide factory-tapered insulation fabricated to slope indicated on Drawings. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 7 D. Minimum thickness: 2 inches built-up to thickness as indicated on Drawings. E. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: 1. Meet ASTM C1289. 2. Maximum 4 foot by 4 foot boards. 3. All packages to have RIC/TIMA label. 4. Type 1: Class 1, aluminum foil on both surfaces. 5. Type II: Felt or glass fiber mat on both surfaces. 6. Type III (Composite): Perlite on one side and felt or glass fiber mat on other. 7. Type IV (Composite): Cellulose fiber insulation board on one side and felt or glass fiber mat on other. 8. Type V (Composite): OSB on one side and felt or glass fiber mat on other. 9. Minimum 2 layers. Contractor has option to substitute tapered isocyanurate insulation for tapered expanded polystyrene insulation. F. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.05 ROOFING ACCESSORIES A. Substrate Board: 1. ASTM C1177, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, non-combustible, 1/4 -inch thick. B. Protective Mat: 1. Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric mat. 2. Resistant to ultraviolet degradation. 3. Chemically resistant. 4. Type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer. C. Recovery Board: 1. Use if compressive strength of insulation is less than 23 pounds per square foot. 2. Verify with membrane manufacturer that warranty will accept cover board. 3. ASTM C1177, glass mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, non-combustible, 1/4 -inch thick. D. Membrane Walkway: 1. Molded walkway pads or walkway rolls adhered to membrane. 2. Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured pad or roll. 3. Furnished or approved by membrane manufacturer. 4. 30 inches wide and approximately 3/16-inch thick. E. Control Joint Tube: Schuller Expand-O-Flash or approved equal. F. Adhesives and Sealants: 1. Splicing cement, lap sealant, bonding adhesive, water cutoff mastic, as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2. Sealing Compound for Temporary Sealing of Membrane (water cutoffs): Carlisle Sure-Seal Nite Seal. 3. Adhesives for insulation directly to roof decks, other insulation boards, and smooth built-up roof surfaces (non graveled), where mechanical fastening is not acceptable: a. Elastomeric: 1) Foamable, elastomeric. 2) VOC compliant, contains no solvents, no flame hazard. 3) Product: Weather-Tite by Millennium Adhesives, or equal. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 8 2/08 4) Use Weather-Tite Primer for re-cover applications under foamable adhesive. b. Polyurethane adhesive. 1) Provide adhesive with no odor or building height restrictions. 2) Do not use: a) On insulation boards larger than 4 feet by 4 feet. b) In inclement weather or below 40 degrees F, or on wet surfaces. c) On active asphalt. d) UL Class A rating. 3) Product: Insta-Stik Adhesive, or equal. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer’s standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8-inch thick, with anchors. H. Metal Battens: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05-inch thick, prepunched. I. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer’s recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. J. Fasteners: 1. Factory Mutual and membrane manufacturer approved. 2. Membrane attachment: a. As recommended and supplied by membrane manufacturer. b. Length to penetrate 1-1/2 inch wood deck minimum of 1 inch, but not through bottom of deck. c. Length to penetrate through plywood deck minimum 3/4-inch. 3. Flashing to lumber: Galvanized 1-1/2 inch barbed roofing nails through 1-inch metal discs. 4. Scupper flanges to wood blocking: 1-3/4 inch galvanized roofing nails. 5. Metal decks: Deckfast Sentry corrosion resistant fastener. 6. Concrete decks: Gripcon nail, by Reach Plastics. K. Flashing: As recommended by membrane manufacturer, with associated adhesives. L. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Verify: 1. Roof deck is completely installed. 2. Surface is free of debris, sharp projections, gross irregularities, unnecessary holes. 3. Required openings through deck are cut and finished, and pipes and similar work projecting through deck are in place. 4. Substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition. B. Do not proceed until conditions which would result in an unsatisfactory installation are corrected. 1. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. 2. Commencing work shall be construed as acceptance of roof deck and adjoining surfaces as acceptable to receive membrane sheet roofing. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 9 C. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of Work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. D. Compatibility: Verify that membranes and flashings are chemically compatible with nailers and blocking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with other trades so other work available and roofing can be built in without delay. 2. Plan work so work can be carried on continuously to completion. 3. Coordinate application of membrane to provide protection of underlying materials from wetting or other damage by the elements on a continuous basis. C. Do not install more insulation than what can be covered by membrane before the end of the work day. D. Completely install sheet metal sleeves, caps, or enclosures on a daily basis. E. Reset or replace existing fasteners for materials exposed but left in place that are loose, deformed, damaged, or corroded. F. Fill insulation joints wider than 1/4 inch with insulation cut to fit. G. Back out existing screws from deck. H. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors, and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. I. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. J. Perimeter wood blocking, insulation, and sheet metal installation shall be in accordance with recommendations of Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, June 1985 (minimum). 3.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Perform work in strict conformance with applicable provisions of manufacturer’s current published specifications, application instructions, recommended details, and standards of practice. B. Install according to manufacturer’s written instructions and ASTM D5036. C. Install in presence of roofing membrane manufacturer’s personnel. D. Accurately align roofing membrane without stretching and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. E. Stagger end laps. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 10 2/08 3.04 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Bonding Adhesive: 1. Solvent-based: a. Apply to substrate and underside of membrane as required by manufacturer. b. Allow to partially dry. c. Do not apply to splice area of membrane. 2. Water-based: a. Apply as required by manufacturer and immediately install roofing membrane. b. Do not apply adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. B. Fasten or adhere membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing, according to ANSI/SPRI RP-4. C. Shingle side laps with slope of roof deck where possible. D. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. 3.05 SEAMS A. Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps according to manufacturer’s instructions to ensure a watertight seam. B. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. C. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of membrane. D. Verify field strength of seams with tack claw and repair seam sample areas. E. Repair deficiencies. 3.06 VAPOR RETARDER SYSTEM A. Seal joints with tape or sealant. B. Repair punctures before installing insulation. C. Apply only in fair weather when air, substrate, and membrane are at temperatures of 40 degrees or higher. Surfacing materials must also be placed at temperatures of 40 degrees or higher. 1. For application in temperatures below 40 degrees, store materials in a heated storage area, in a manner that does not pose a fire hazard, when ambient temperatures fall below 40 degrees. 2. Do not remove material from storage areas until ready to install. D. Start at the low point of the roof area and progress upslope, running the membrane perpendicular to the slope in shingle fashion so there are no laps against the flow of water. E. Peel back 1 to 2 feet of release paper, align the membrane, and place the first 1 to 2 feet. F. Roll laps firmly with a hand roller and lap ends and edges a minimum of 6 inches. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 11 G. Totally envelope roof insulation and seal to underside of membrane roofing. H. Repair fishmouths. 3.07 INSULATION A. General: 1. Lay with long dimension perpendicular to metal deck flutes or precast joints. 2. Cut, fit neatly against wood blocking and vertical surfaces. 3. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. 4. Fill voids greater than 1/8 inch with foamed-in-place insulation compatible with rigid material. 5. Install tapered insulation to drain to scuppers and roof drains. 6. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 7. Stagger insulation boards 50 percent from row to row. B. Fully Adhered Roofing Insulation: Mechanically fasten insulation with specified fasteners in a Factory Mutual approved pattern. C. Layers: 1. Place in at least 2 layers. 2. Stagger joints in both directions in adjoining courses, stagger end joints between layers at least 24 inches. 3. Butt each panel tightly to adjoining panels, but do not force. 4. Embed second and subsequent insulation layers in full mopping or steep asphalt applied at rate of 25 to 30 pounds per hundred square feet. D. Cover (Recovery) Board: 1. Install over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. 2. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 3. Loosely butt cover boards together. 4. Fully adhere recovery board. E. Protection: 1. Keep insulation dry. 2. Protect from damage after installation. 3. Lay no more insulation than can be covered with completed roof membrane on same day. 4. Protect exposed edges of insulation with water cut offs at end of each day’s work. 5. Remove water cut offs completely before resuming work. 3.08 ROOF ACCESSORIES A. Walkway Pads: 1. Install according to membrane manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Install foil protection layer underneath membrane if required by manufacturer. 3. Space pads to allow for drainage. 4. Space recycled rubber minimum 2 inches to allow for hot weather expansion. 5. Test for water-tightness. 6. Clean surfaces and adhere according to manufacturer’s specifications. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 12 2/08 B. Base Flashing: 1. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. 3. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. 4. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 5. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Field pullout tests shall be conducted on membrane fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s installation requirements. C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer’s technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Owner Representative. D. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.10 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Site Cleaning: 1. Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. 2. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. 3. Immediately upon satisfactory completion of work, remove debris, equipment, excess materials from Site. B. System Cleaning: 1. Prevent misplacing roofing materials and adhesives on adjacent surfaces. 2. Immediately remove traces of such materials. C. Protect completed roof system from damage. 1. Use plywood walkways, wood planking, other precautions as necessary. 2. Institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. 3. Confine traffic over roof to necessary areas, hold to minimum. 4. Repair damage immediately. D. When construction completed and roofing no longer at risk of construction damage, remove temporary protective measures, reinstall ballast to satisfaction of Owner and manufacturer of existing roofing. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 2/08 07540 - 13 3.11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Minimize waste generated from construction, renovation, and demolition. B. Divert construction, demolition, and land clearing debris from landfill disposal. C. Reduce and recycle packaging waste associated with the construction process. 3.12 DEMONSTRATION A. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer’s representative (not installer) to schedule and attend meeting with Owner’s representatives to explain: 1. Maintenance and Care Instructions. 2. Recommended Maintenance Program. 3. Warranty Requirements. END OF SECTION Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07540 - 14 2/08 ROOFING WARRANTY Project: Project Address: Project No: Date of Final Acceptance: Owner: Address: Roofing Contractor: Address: Phone No: This warranty stipulates that the above-named contractor(s) shall, during a period of 5 years from the date of final acceptance of the work, maintain the roof membrane and flashing systems in a watertight condition and repair all defects which result from faulty workmanship or defective materials, without further cost to the Owner, including replacement of any wet insulation caused by such defects. Excluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, the building(s) or their contents, caused by acts or omissions of the Owner; fire, lightning, winds of peak gust speeds of 55 mph or higher, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of the elements; movement or failure of the supporting building structure that causes flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath the roof. Exclude from this warranty any damages to the building(s) or the contents. Before expiration of the above warranty period, the roofing contractor shall inspect the roof in the presence of the Owner’s representative and make necessary correction of all deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shall remain in force until the necessary repair work has been completed. ROOFING CONTRACTOR Signed: Title: Date: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2/08 07620 - 1 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Metal counter flashing and base flashing. b. Exterior wall flashing and expansion joints. c. Exposed metal trim and facia units. d. Reglets. e. Grease pan for kitchen hood vent. f. Sheet metal accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Joint sealants for sheet metal flashing. 2) Fasteners. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 3. Section 07540 - Thermoplastic Roofing 4. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants 5. Division 15 - Mechanical 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. A525, G90 2. D659 3. D2249 B. Industry Standards: “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,” Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 2 2/08 C. Samples: 1. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard color samples with Product Data and Shop Drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of sheet metal flashing and trim. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of sheet metal flashing and trim, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect sheet metal flashing and trim from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; if conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 2. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer: 1. Coverage: Non-prorated 20-year warranty in writing covering fade, chalking and film integrity including labor and material through the 20th year. 2. Performance: a. Color Change (ASTM D2244): Not greater than 5 NBS color units. b. Chalking (ASTM D659): Not in excess of 8. B. Contractor: Sheet metal system and related flashing shall be warranted in writing stipulating that the Contractor agrees to maintain metal flashing system in a watertight condition for a period of 5 years at the Contractor’s own expense. Warranty shall cover any condition caused by defective material and the installation and ordinary wear and tear. Warranty does not cover damage due to natural disaster not covered by insurance, accidents, misuse or vandalism. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2/08 07620 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Design is based on Colorclad by Vincent Metals Goods, Minneapolis, MN. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Berridge Manufacturing, Houston, TX. 2. PacClad, Peterson Aluminum Corporation, Elk Grove Village, IL. 3. UnaClad, Copper Sales, Inc., Minneapolis, MN. 4. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Standard open hearth copper bearing steel with “Paint-Grip” galvanized coating meeting requirements of ASTM A93, 24 gage (minimum). For use as keepers or when otherwise covered. B. Pre-painted Galvanized Sheet Metal: 1. General: Pre-painted sheets of hot-dipped galvanized steel of commercial weight (ASTM A525, G90 designation). Painted side shall be covered with a factory applied strippable film. 2. Gages: As indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, minimum gages: a. Facias, coping, and other roof edge flashing exposed view with an exposed vertical face of 8 inch or less: 24 gage. b. Hook strips and keepers: 24 gage. c. Gutter hangers and downspout straps shall be 16 gage. d. All other sheet metal work: 24 gage. C. Sheet Metal Accessories: 1. Nails and Fasteners: Galvanized nails and cadmium-plated screws and washers in connection with galvanized iron and steel, which will not stain, produce electrolytic reaction or be detrimental. 2. Solder: 50 percent lead-50 percent tin solder conforming to ASTM B32-76. Commercial soldering flux. 3. Joint Sealant: As specified in Section 07920, 20-year silicone. 4. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of sheet metal and flashing, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 FINISHES A. Coating system: Two-coat system of organic coating on the face side consisting of fluorocarbon base top coat applied over quality matched primer with white wash coat applied to back side for additional protection. B. Colors: Two colors will be selected by Owner Representative from standard range of “smooth” finishes as noted on drawings. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 4 2/08 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that flashing and sheet metal may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. 3.02 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: Accurately form with brakes, straight, true, and sharp; plain surfaces free from warps and buckles. Match profiles exactly at connections. Exposed edges to be beaded or returned for strength and appearance. B. Reinforcement: Provide ribs, cleats, and reinforcement necessary to make sections rigid and substantial. Fabricate pre-painted sheet metal with protective coating in place. Allow for expansion and contraction. C. Seams, Joints: 1. Overlap in direction of flow. Finished width of lock seams and soldered lap seams at least 1 inch finished width of unsoldered lap seams at least 3 inches. 2. Locate joints of roof edges, other sheet metal work exposed to view with respect to precast tee stems, control joints, other architectural features as indicated on Drawings or as directed by Owner Representative. Use concealed cover plates. 3. Where appearance is not a factor, sheet metal work may be fabricated in eight or ten-foot lengths. 4. Generally, solder or lap, rivet and solder shop joints to be single-locked. 5. Design field joints to permit expansion. 6. Use joint covers or lapped joints with “s” clips; do not solder. 7. Shop form corners. Lap, rivet and solder internal corners where exposed to view. Lock and solder where appearance is not a factor. 8. Locate field joints at least 12 inches nor more than 3 feet from actual corner. D. Soldering: 1. Pre-tin edges of sheet metal to be soldered with solder on both sides, width of pre-tinning at least 1- 1/2 inches. 2. Solder slowly with well heated coppers to thoroughly heat sheets and completely sweat solder through full width of seam. Use ample solder. Show at least 1 inch evenly flowed solder at seams. 3. Wherever possible solder work in flat position. 4. Solder seams with a slope greater than 45 degree a second time. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Work of Other Trades: 1. Coordinate work with roofing, other contractors; properly schedule sheet metal work. 2. Furnish metal base flashings, gravel stops, other work required to be built into roofing and flashing promptly so roofing operations may be carried on continuously to completion without delay. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2/08 07620 - 5 B. Installation: 1. Install work neatly, securely anchor in place. Anchor work and form joints properly to permit expansion and contraction. 2. Overlap seams in direction of flow and slope all horizontal surfaces for drainage. 3. Finished work to be water, weather tight. 4. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through metal, in no case shall nails, rivets, or screws be exposed on “outside” of facias, copings, etc. 5. Do not place dissimilar metals in contact nor in position where drainage will occur across them. C. Joint Sealants: Apply wherever required to insure watertight installation of sheet metal flashing after removing protective film. 3.04 CLEAN UP A. After completing work, remove film from all surfaces and clean sheet metal surfaces so as to be suitable to receive finishes which it is specified to receive. END OF SECTION Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 6 2/08 SHEET METAL WARRANTY Project:___________________________________________________________________________________ Project Address:____________________________________________________________________________ Project No:________________________________________________________________________________ Date of Final Acceptance:____________________________________________________________________ Owner:___________________________________________________________________________________ Address:__________________________________________________________________________________ Sheet Metal Contractor:______________________________________________________________________ Address:__________________________________________________________________________________ Phone No:_________________________________________________________________________________ Roofing Contractor:_________________________________________________________________________ Address:__________________________________________________________________________________ This warranty stipulates that the above-named contractor(s) shall, during a period of 5 years from the date of final acceptance of the work, maintain the sheet metal flashing systems and repair all defects which result from faulty workmanship or defective materials, without further cost to the Owner, including replacement of any wet insulation caused by such defects. Excluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, the building(s) or their contents, caused by acts or omissions of the Owner; fire, lightning, winds of peak gust speeds of 72 mph or higher, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of the elements; movement or failure of the supporting building structure that causes flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath the roof. Exclude from this warranty any damages to the building(s) or the contents. Before expiration of the above warranty period, the contractor(s) shall inspect the sheet metal in the presence of the Owner and make necessary correction of all deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shall remain in force until the necessary repair work has been completed. SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR ROOFING CONTRACTOR Signed: Signed: Title: Title: Date: Date: Joint Sealants 2/08 07920 - 1 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Sealant: 1) Exterior construction joints. 2) Exterior concrete slab joints. 3) Aluminum, sheet metal, glass, glazing, and curtain wall joints. 4) Interior joints. 5) Paving joints. 6) Fire resistant joints. 7) Acoustical. b. Backup materials: 1) Exterior joints. 2) Interior joints. 2. The following joint sealant is not included in this section: a. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (Section 07620). b. Aluminum Framed Storefront (Section 08410). c. Aluminum Windows (Section 08520). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Section 06400 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 4. Section 06620 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 5. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 6. Section 07840 - Fire Stopping 7. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 8. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows 9. Section 09300 - Tile 10. Section 09910 - Painting 11. Section 10430 - Exterior Illuminated Signage 12. Section 10705 - Exterior Sun Control Devices 13. Section 15000 - Mechanical 14. Section 16000 - Electrical 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01300. Joint Sealants 07920 - 2 2/08 B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide joint sealants units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of joint sealants. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of joint sealants. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of joint sealants, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Pre-installation Meetings: If requested, the Installer and Manufacturer’s Technical Representative shall meet with Owner Representative prior to the start of installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect joint sealants from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: If below 40 degrees F ambient temperature, refer to manufacturer’s recommendations. Contractor must insure joints are frost-free. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; if conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 2. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Joint Sealants: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Tremco, Beachwood, OH. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Sonneborn Building Products, Chemrex Inc., Minneapolis, MN. b. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. Joint Sealants 2/08 07920 - 3 B. Backup Filler Materials: Acceptable Manufacturers; subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Exterior Joints: Non-absorbent; Sof-Rod by A.E.T. 2. Interior Joints: Open-cell; Den-verfoam. 3. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Do not use materials stored longer than their maximum recommended shelf life. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Exterior Construction Joints: a. General Requirements: Multi-component epoxidized polyurethane polymer meeting ASTM C920-89, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, A, O. b. Product: 1) Dymeric 511 by Tremco. 2) NP-2 by Sonneborn. 2. Exterior Concrete Slab Joints: a. General Requirements: Multi-component polyurethane joint sealant; ASTM C-920; Type “M,” Grade P, Class 25 and TT-S-00227E, Type 1, Class A. b. Product: 1) Self Leveling: THC 900 by Tremco 2) Slope Grade: THC-901 by Tremco 3. Aluminum, sheet metal, glass, glazing and curtain wall joints: a. General Requirements: Neutral cure, one-part, high performance, medium modulus, silicone sealant meeting Federal Specification TT-S-00230C(COM-NBS), Type II, Class A, TT- 001543A(COM-NBS), Class A and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, G, A, O. b. Product: Spectrum 2 by Tremco. 4. Interior joints: a. General Requirements: Fast setting acrylic latex sealant meeting ASTM C834 and 19-GP-21m. b. Product: Tremco Acrylic Latex 834 by Tremco. 5. Fire-resistant joint sealant: a. General Requirements: Manufacturer’s standard sealant and accessory materials with fire- resistance rating indicated which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing per ASTM E119 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other jurisdiction. b. Accessory materials for fire stopping sealants: Provide forming, joint-fillers, packing, other accessory materials required for installation of fire-stopping sealants as applicable to installation conditions indicated. c. Product: Dymeric and Cera-blanket System by Tremco. 6. Acoustical Sealant: a. General Requirements: Non-hardening, non-drying, non-bleeding; shall meet ASTM D217 requirements. b. Product: Acoustical Sealant by Tremco. C. Backup Filler Materials: 1. General Requirements: Non-oily, non-staining, non-gassing, back-up filler or other filler completely compatible with sealant, approved by sealant manufacturer: Joint Sealants 07920 - 4 2/08 D. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of joint sealants, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Only that which is specifically recommended for use by manufacturer of sealant being installed. 2.04 FINISHES A. Colors: As selected from manufacturer’s “Fast Pak” colors for each of the different building materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that joint sealants may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to be Caulked: Verify that surfaces are sound, thoroughly dry, clean, free of oil, grease, laitance, rust, and other foreign material that would prevent proper adhesion, and that concrete and mortar are thoroughly cured. B. Masonry Cleaning: Complete before surface preparation is begun. 1. Clean, prepare joints, surfaces to receive sealants according to sealant manufacturer instructions. 2. Rake and clean out joints to full depth and width. 3. Clean concrete, masonry, other porous materials by brushing, grinding, other mechanical means, to provide sound, clean surface. 4. Remove dust, dirt, loose particles resulting from mechanical cleaning by vacuuming or blowing out joints with compressed air. 5. Clean glass, metal, and non-porous surfaces. 6. Remove protective coatings on metal using solvent that leaves no residue. Use clean white cloths or lintless paper towels to apply solvent, and wipe surfaces dry with dry cloths or paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. 7. Mask joints as necessary to protect adjacent surfaces. Apply masking tape in continuous strips and carefully align with edge of joint. Remove masking immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled. Joint Sealants 2/08 07920 - 5 3.03 BACK-UP MATERIALS A. Verify compatibility of filler material with sealant before installation. Use filler about 1/3 to 1/2 wider than width of joint so filler exerts sufficient pressure to provide substantial resistance to displacement. 3.04 SEALANT PRIMER A. Apply as recommended by manufacturer of sealant to surfaces or materials where required. 3.05 APPLICATION OF SEALANT A. Apply strictly according to manufacturer’s instructions, using nozzle of sufficient size to fill joint completely. Caulk wide joints with three passes. Run a bead at each inside corner, fill joint with third pass. Tool joints immediately after application of material to ensure full contact with adjacent surfaces. Strike off excess material. Finished bead is to be flush with adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove masking, excess material, smears as work progresses. Leave adjacent surfaces clean and free of sealant and primer. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. All door frames and other weather openings not sealed by the Stucco system sealant shall be neatly caulked of color that will blend with final finish or color adjacent. Also, seal all joints between dissimilar exterior materials. B. Provide sealant joint at extruded aluminum sills located at aluminum windows and Stucco window infill panels. C. Provide sealant at all masonry control joints. 1. Color: Sonneborn Redwood Tan. D. Provide interior sealant as follows: 1. All base board to be sealed with white paintable sealant with 1/8” bead at top and Dow Adobe Tan or color to match wood trim at bottom. Paintable sealant shall be applied to trim prior to installation of Tuscan Finish. 2. Seal around edges of bathroom mirrors with clear sealant. 3. At locations noted on the drawings not provided by others. E. This work shall include openings for pipes, conduits, vents, etc. by other Contractors. F. All sealant color to match adjacent materials and color will be selected from standard manufacturer’s color pallet. (Sonneborn colors - Near brick: Redwood Tan; Near Stucco: Off White). END OF SECTION Steel Doors and Frames (Institutional) 2/08 08115 - 1 SECTION 08115 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES (INSTITUTIONAL) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Steel doors: 1) Flush door. b. Steel frames: 1) Door. 2) Interior lites. c. Steel door and frame accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Glazing beads. 2) Door silencers. 2. Provide the following for other sections to install including, but not limited to: a. Masonry anchors (Section 04810). 3. Perform the Following: a. Prepare the door for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Section 08210 - Wood Doors 3. Section 08710 - Finish Door Hardware 4. Section 09910 - Paint 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames,” SDI-100 2. “Standard for Fire Doors and Windows,” NFPA 80 3. “Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,” ASTM E152 4. “Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware,” Door and Hardware Institute 5. “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames,” SDI-105 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials C. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association D. SDI: Steel Door Institute Steel Doors and Frames (Institutional) 08115 - 2 2/08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical Product Data that substantiates compliance with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation. Include details of frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, louvers, details of joints and connections. Show anchorage, accessory items. Provide door, frame schedules using same reference numbers as on contract Drawings. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames, stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with SDI-100. B. Fire-rated Door Assemblies: NFPA 80; tested, listed, labeled in accordance with ASTM E152 by nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Hollow Metal Work: 1. Protect during transit and job storage. Package as required. 2. Inspect for damage. Repair minor damages if refinished items will be equal to new work and acceptable to Owner Representative; otherwise, remove and replace as directed. 3. Store at building site under cover. Place on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking, with 1/4-inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. Avoid use of non-vented plastic, canvas shelters that would create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove immediately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Accepted Manufacturers: 1. Ceco Corporation 2. Curries Manufacturing Company 3. Mesker Industries, Inc. 4. Pioneer Builders Products Corporation 5. Steelcraft Division/American Standard Company 6. Trussbilt, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot-rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled; comply with ASTM A569, ASTM A568. B. Cold-rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel; comply with ASTM A366, ASTM A568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon, commercial quality; ASTM A526, ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating; mill phosphatized. Steel Doors and Frames (Institutional) 2/08 08115 - 3 D. Supports, Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts, Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units, except hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Primer Paint: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, air-drying or baking, suitable as base for specified finish paints. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Steel Door and Frame Units: Rigid, neat in appearance, free from defects, warp or buckle. Where practicable, fit and assemble in manufacturer’s plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment to assure proper assembly at project site. B. Exposed Faces of Doors and Panels, Including Stiles, Rails of Nonflush Units: Only cold-rolled steel. C. Frames, Concealed Stiffeners, Reinforcement, Edge Channels, Louvers, Moldings: Cold-rolled or hot- rolled steel at fabricator’s option. D. Exposed Fasteners: Countersunk flat phillips heads unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish Hardware Preparation: 1. Doors, Frames to Receive Mortised and Concealed Finish Hardware: In accordance with final finish hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 2. Doors, Frames to Receive Surface-Applied Hardware: Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site. Reinforce all frames for closers whether scheduled or not. 3. Finish Hardware: Locate as indicated on final Shop Drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with referenced door and hardware institute standard. F. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, paint exposed surfaces of units, including galvanized surfaces. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, other foreign materials. Correct minor irregularities with metallic putty sanded smooth before application of paint. Apply shop coat prime paint of even consistency to provide uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 2.04 STANDARD STEEL DOORS A. Materials and Construction: 1. Doors and panels: Cold-rolled furniture steel, exterior doors 14 gage face sheets, interior doors 18 gage face sheets; doors with continuous reinforced inner core full height and width, spot-welded to face sheet 3 inch on center vertically, 2-3/4 inches on center horizontally. 2. Flute or reinforcement: Sound insulated with 6 pound density rock wool insulation; interior doors with 18 gage top and bottom channels; exterior doors with 14 gage top and bottom channels; top and bottom of exterior doors flush. 3. Where scheduled, fabricate doors, panels, frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of galvanized doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16 gage inverted steel channels providing flush closure. B. Hardware Reinforcements: 1. Hinge reinforcements: 3/16 inch to 1-1/2 inches by 9 inches. Steel Doors and Frames (Institutional) 08115 - 4 2/08 2. Lock front and flush bolt reinforcement: 3/16 inch by 1/2 inch by 3 inches. 3. Cylindrical lock reinforcement units. 4. 12 gage one piece channel closer reinforcement 14 inches long, or to suit closer length; 12 gage reinforcements for other mortise hardware. 5. Drilled and tapped screw holes for mortise hardware. 6. Reinforce only (no screw holes drilled and tapped) for surface hardware. C. Accessories: 1. Internal 18 gage steel glass molds with removable 18 gage molding fastened with #8-16 O.H.S.M.S. screws approximately 16 inches on center. Doors to maintain flatness tolerance of 0.030-inch including diagonal direction. 2. Meet all requirements, as set forth by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for all label classifications. UL Laboratories, Inc. requirements shall take precedence in all cases. 2.05 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES A. General Requirements: Types, styles shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate of minimum 16-gage cold-rolled furniture steel at integral locations and 14 gage cold-rolled steel at exterior locations; with mitered and continuously welded and backwelded corners (through the stops). Where scheduled, fabricate with hot-dipped galvanized steel. B. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames, 2 silencers on heads of double-swing frames. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install in accordance with final Shop Drawings, manufacturer’s data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with SDI-105 unless otherwise indicated: 1. Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place prior to construction at enclosing walls and ceilings. Set accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, braced securely until permanent anchors set. Remove temporary braces and spreaders after wall construction is completed, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. 3. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set, secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 4. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 5. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches, wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. 6. Where frames require existing opening anchors, “dimple” to receive countersunk flathead expansion anchor screws, setting screw heads below surface of frame. Fill countersink with metal putty, grind smooth to match adjacent surface. Prime affected area to match shop finish. C. Door Installation: Fit accurately in frames within clearances specified in SDI-100. Place fire-rated doors with clearances specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. Steel Doors and Frames (Institutional) 2/08 08115 - 5 3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat; apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check, readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION Wood Doors 3/08 08210 - 1 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Premium grade flush wood doors: 1) Type of face: a) Wood veneer faced. 2) Cut of face: a) Rift cut. 3) Species: a) Red Oak. b. Prehung wood door assemblies. c. Stile and rail door assemblies. d. Wood door accessories including, but not limited to: a) Glazing frames. 2. Perform the following: a. Modifications of existing wood doors for new construction. b. Bevel doors. 3. The following is not included in this section: a. Drywall Frames (Section 08112). b. Wood trim except as indicated above (Section 06400). c. Finish Door Hardware except as indicated above (Section 08710). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06400 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 2. Section 08112 - Drywall Frames 3. Section 08710 - Finish Door Hardware 4. Section 08800 - Glazing 5. Section 09910 - Paint 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. E152: Methods of fire tests and assemblies. B. NFPA: 1. 252: Standard methods for fire assemblies. C. Underwriters Laboratories: 1. UL 10(b): Fire tests for door assemblies for neutral pressure. 2. UL 10(c): Fire tests for door assemblies for positive pressure. D. Uniform Building Code: Wood Doors 08210 - 2 3/08 1. UBC 713: Fire resistive assemblies for protection of openings. 2. UBC Standard 7-2: Requirement for positive pressure opening assemblies. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute C. MDO: Medium Density Overlay D. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories E. WHI: Warnock Hersey Institute F. WDMA: Windows & Door Manufacturers Association I.S.1-A Series 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including schedules, elevations, sections, details of components. Show location, size, and hand of each door, location and extent of hardware blocking, and fire ratings for fire doors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide wood door units made of components of standard construction furnished by 1 manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of wood doors. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of wood doors. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of wood doors, use journeymen carpenters skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with UBC 713 and UBC Standard 7-2. C. Industry Standards: Comply with latest edition AWI and WDMA standards for labeled doors, conform to UL/WHI testing. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver before building is enclosed, warm and dry. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. Wood Doors 3/08 08210 - 3 C. Protect products before, during, and after installation. D. Protect installed work of other trades. In event of damage, immediately repair, replace to acceptance of Owner Representative, at no additional cost to Owner. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Door Manufacturer’s Warranty: 1. Submit written agreement on door manufacturer’s standard form signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that warp (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42- by 84-inch section, or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. a. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. b. Warranty shall be in effect during the following periods or time after date of Substantial Completion. 1) Solid Core Exterior Doors: 2 years. 2) Solid Core Interior Door: Life of Installation. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Provide Owner with 1 sample bottle of cleaning solution recommended by manufacturer of wood doors. B. Maintain humidity of 30 to 60 percent during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Premium Grade Flush Doors: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Algoma Hardwoods, Algoma, WI. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Eggers Hardwood Products, Two Rivers, WI. b. Weyerhauser. c. Graham. d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Prehung Flush Wood Door Assemblies: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Bayer Built Woodwork, Belgrade, MN. b. Donlin Company, St. Cloud, MN. c. Trimpac, Inc., Sauk Rapids, MN. d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Architect. C. Stile and Rail Door Assemblies: Wood Doors 08210 - 4 3/08 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Algoma Hardwoods, Algoma, WI. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Eggers Hardwood Products. b. Weyerhauser. c. Graham. d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Flush Doors: 1. Wood Veneer Doors: a. Solid Core Type: 1) Particleboard Core. 2. Doors to Receive Transparent Finish: a. Species: 1) Red oak. b. Cut: 1) Rift cut. c. Grade: Premium; AA veneer. d. Match: 1) Book Match. 2) Pair and Set Match. Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. e. Veneer Thickness: 1/50 inch (minimum) prior to field sanding. B. Stile and Rail Door Assemblies: 1. Doors to Receive Transparent Finish: a. Species: Red Oak; rift cut. b. Grade: Premium; AA veneer. C. Wood Door Accessories: 1. Glass Stops: Wood veneer beading; species to be the same as the face veneer, and complying to UL/WHI requirements for 20 minute or higher rated doors. 2. Other Materials: Materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of wood doors, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Solid Core Flush Doors: 1. General Requirements: Comply with referenced standards for grade, type, label specified. a. Provide stave blocking reinforcement inner blocking at the top rail to eliminate through bolting of hardware or laminated strand lumber. b. General: 1) Labeled doors must comply with neutral pressure plane testing per UBD 7-2 and UBC 713. 2. Non-Labeled Doors: PC-5 hot pressed, 1-3/4 inches thick, 2 ply 1-1/2 inches after trimming, compatible hardwood stiles bonded to core, and sanded for uniform thickness, before applying cross bands or plastic laminate. 3. UL/WHI Labeled Wood Doors: Provide doors with labels where indicated on door schedule: a. For positive pressure requirement: No intumescent is allowed on the frame. Only smoke gasketing applied around the perimeter of the frame to meet the “S” rating is permissible. Wood Doors 3/08 08210 - 5 b. 20-minute rated doors: PC-5 hot pressed, 1-3/4 inches thick, 2 ply 1-1/2 inches after trimming, compatible hardwood stiles bonded to the core, and sanded for uniform thickness, before applying cross bands or plastic laminate. c. 1-3/4 inches thick, 1 hour, and 1-1/2 hour wood doors: PC-5 hot pressed, laminated, reinforced compatible stiles, bonded to the core. Reinforced blocking at top rail, lock areas, and bottom rail to eliminate through bolting of hardware. 4. Wood Veneered Doors: a. Prefit to openings with clearance of 1/8 inch at top and sides, 1/2 inch at bottom. Bevel both stiles 1/8 inch in 2 inches. b. Factory seal top and bottom rails. c. Factory machine for locksets, butts, and other related hardware, using templates furnished by the hardware supplier. Include pilot holes for hinge screws and lock fronts. d. 1/4 inch nominal outer stile of same species of face veneer. e. Veneered stile edge not acceptable. B. Prehung Flush Wood Door Assemblies: 1. Doors: a. Core: Solid. Veneer: Red Oak quarter cut. Grade: Custom. Thickness: 1-3/8 inches. 2. Frame: a. Thickness: 3/4 inch (with veneer and applied stops to match door). b. Width: Coordinate with wall thickness. 3. Casing: standard profile species to match door. 4. Hardware: a. Butts: 1) Quantity: 1-1/2 pair per door leaf. 2) Size: 3-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches. 5. Finish: Match finish specified in Section 08710. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that wood doors may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. DO NOT proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Failure to comply indicates acceptance of existing conditions. D. Reject doors with defects. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Comply with pertinent codes, regulations, original design, referenced standards. Contractor shall install hardware according to approved hardware schedule for proper location. B. Installation: Square, plumb, straight, firmly anchored into position. Adjust hardware and door for proper function and smooth operation, proper latching, without force or excessive clearances: Wood Doors 08210 - 6 3/08 1. Fire-rated doors: Install in accordance with the requirements of the labeling agency. NFPA No. 80 and No. 101 and UBC Standard 7-2. a. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. C. Coordination: Coordinate installation of any glass and glazing. D. Prehung Flush Wood Door Assemblies: 1. Factory assembled units consisting of doors, frames, and butts. 2. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors for cylinder lock/latchset with 2-3/8 inch backset unless noted otherwise on Hardware Schedule. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Use fine grain sandpaper to completely eliminate scratches, abrasions, etc. in the finished surface. Set nails and fasteners for putty; firmly putty holes. Doors shall show no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION Aluminum Framed Storefront 2/08 08410 - 1 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Framing system: 1) Storefront-type framing system. 2) Frames for entrances. b. Doors: 1) Exterior entrance doors. c. Hardware: d. Aluminum storefront accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Joint sealants for aluminum entrances and storefront. 2) Weather stripping. 2. Install Only a. Decorative Door Handles provided by Kitchen Equipment Supplier (KES). Do not prep doors for standard pulls. 3. The following is not included in this section: a. Lock cylinders (Section 08710). b. Glazing (Section 08800). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants 2. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows 3. Section 08710 - Finish Door Hardware 4. Section 08800 - Glazing 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA: 1. 1503.1: Voluntary test method for thermal transmittance and condensation resistance of window, doors, and glazed wall sections. B. ADA: 1. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." C. ASTM: 1. C1401, Appendix X2: Destructive Test Method A to test structural sealant compatibility and adhesion. 2. E283: Test method for determining the rate of air leakage through exterior windows, curtain walls, and doors under specified pressure differences across the specimen. 3. E331: Test method for structural performance of exterior widows, curtain walls, and doors by uniform static air pressure difference. Aluminum Framed Storefront 08410 - 2 2/08 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. AA: Aluminum Association B. AAMA: American Architectural Manufacturers Association C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials D. CFM: Cubic feet per minute E. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers F. PSF: Pounds per square foot 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrances and storefront systems from 1 source and from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide entrances and storefront produced by a manufacturer with not less than 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of assemblies of the type and quality required. C. Installer’s Qualifications: Entrances and storefront shall be installed by a firm that has not less than 5 years successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required. 1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Structural Performance: Design framing systems for maximum deflection of 1/175 span, safety factor of 1.65, able to resist following loads (applied and/or combined in accordance with latest edition of Uniform Building Code: 1. 30 PSF live load (horizontal projection, including snow load, etc.) plus dead load. 2. 30 PSF wind-load (vertical projection, including uplift and shape factors as required) plus dead load. 3. Thermal load of approximately 100 degrees from ambient temperature. B. Test Requirements: 1. Aluminum Storefronts: a. Air Infiltration: No more than 0.06 CMU per square foot fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 pounds per square foot. b. Water Penetration: No penetration (excluding operable door edges), when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at inward test pressure differential of 6.24 pounds per square foot. c. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are “thermal-break” construction, provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1988 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 50. d. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U-value of not more than 0.65 BTU/(hour x square feet x degrees F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. C. Design to comply with ADA accessibility guidelines. Aluminum Framed Storefront 2/08 08410 - 3 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit to Owner Representative for approval in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: 1. Manufacturer’s standard details and fabrication methods. 2. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. 3. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. C. Shop Drawings by manufacturer for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: 1. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. 2. Elevations at 1/4 inch scale. 3. Detail sections of typical composite members. 4. Anchors and reinforcement. 5. Hardware mounting heights. 6. Provisions for expansion and contraction. 7. Glazing details. D. Hardware schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish. Include item name, name of manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials covered to prevent damage to factory finishes. Store in clean, dry area away from construction traffic. 2. Storage: Protect installed materials from damage by adjacent work. Cover aluminum members to protect finished surfaces. Protect against scratching and falling debris or equipment. 3. Damages resulting from work: Immediately repair or replace as necessary to acceptance of Owner Representative at no additional cost to Owner. 1.08 WARRANTY A. General Requirements: 1. Provide 3-year, non-prorated manufacturer’s warranty, providing materials and labor, including reglazing, to repair or replace defective units at no cost to Owner. 2. Warranty starts at date of substantial completion. 3. Failures: Include, but are not limited to: a. Failure to meet design criteria stated in this section. b. Faulty operation of door hardware supplied by this section. c. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. e. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. f. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. Aluminum Framed Storefront 08410 - 4 2/08 g. Failure of operating components to function properly. B. Warranty debridged poured urethane thermal breaks for life of the Aluminum-Framed Storefront. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront (Heavy Commercial Grade): 1. Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise, design is based on products of Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. EFCO Corporation, Monett, MO (800.221.4169). b. CMI Architectural Products, Inc., Minneapolis, MN. c. Tubelite Division, Indal Inc. d. Member of AAMA, manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Aluminum-Framed Storefront (Interior Thinline): 1. Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise, design is based on products of CMI Architectural. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Member of AAMA, manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Entrance and Storefront Members: 1. Aluminum Members: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B221 alloy G.S. 10A-5) for extrusions and ASTM B209 for sheet or plate. 2. Carbon Steel Reinforcement Members: Provide members that comply with ASTM A36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. 3. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other materials, (ASTM A164) warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 4. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts. 5. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For the application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. 6. Concealed Flashing: Provide 26-gage minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. 7. Brackets and Reinforcements: Where feasible, provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; otherwise provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123. Aluminum Framed Storefront 2/08 08410 - 5 8. Compression Weather Stripping: Provide the manufacturer’s standard replaceable compressible weather stripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D2000. 9. Sliding Weather Stripping: Provide the manufacturer’s standard replaceable weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. 10. Glazing Panels: a. Provide structural sealant complying with ASTM C1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system components, specifically formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant. 1) Color: As selected by Owner Representative from manufacturer's full range of colors. b. Provide weatherseal sealant complying with ASTM C920 neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which is comes in contact. 1) Color: Matching structural sealant. 11. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Provide concrete and masonry inserts fabricated from cast-iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123. B. Hardware: 1. General: a. Refer to Section 08710 for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. b. Provide manufacturer’s heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 2. Ball-Bearing Butts: Provide 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1; provide 4 hinges per door leaf for doors up to 10 feet in height. Provide nonferrous hinges where exposed to weather. 3. Surface-Mounted Overhead Closers: Provide modern type surface-mounted overhead closers, with cover, for parallel arm type mounting, installation’ comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of closer, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Include the following: a. Hold-open arm. b. Delayed-action closing. 4. Keyed Cylinders: a. Supplied under Section 08710. 5. Panic Hardware: a. Provide concealed-rod type panic exit devices actuated by full-width crash bar; comply with UL 305. 6. Push-Pull Plates: Provide standard aluminum push-pull plates of style indicated. 7. Pull Handles: Provide standard aluminum pull handles of style indicated. 8. Thresholds: Provide extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor-concealed closers. Install with double bead of joint sealer. 9. Kickplates: Provide stainless steel kickplates door width less 2 inches. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include sub-frames and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. Aluminum Framed Storefront 08410 - 6 2/08 1. Exterior Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. 2. Interior Frame: EFCO S-401 or equal B. Stile-and-Rail Type Aluminum Doors: 1. Frame: a. Exterior: To be EFCO S-960 or Kawneer Encore. b. Interior: To be EFCO S-401 c. Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts. d. Bottom Rail: As indicated on the Drawings (12 inch minimum). 2. Doors: (NOTE: DO NOT PREP DOORS FOR STANDARD PULLS. Field install custom pulls provided by KES) a. Door 105: EFCO A300 medium style with 1 light or equal. b. Door 101A: EFCO A500 wide style with 2 lights each door or equal. c. Door numbers listed are for prototypical projects. Verify door numbers with Owner’s representative on a Non-Conforming buildout. 3. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non- removal. 4. Design: Provide 1-3/4 inch thick doors of design as indicated. C. Thin Line Type Aluminum Frames: 1. Frame: a. Interior: To be CMI Architectural – CTS or equal 2. Glazing: Fabricate to facilitate replacement of glass or panels. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops. 3. Design: Provide 1-3/4 inch thick and 1 ¾” high frame of design as indicated. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on Drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. End Closures: Close off top and bottom of doors with end closure channels, flush top, and inverted bottom. C. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate storefront (not entry doors or entry door frame) framing system with integrally concealed, low conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact. Use manufacturer’s standard construction that has been in use for similar projects. D. Prefabrication: 1. Before shipment to the project site, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Aluminum Framed Storefront 2/08 08410 - 7 2. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, welding forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes. 3. Pre-glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. 4. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 5. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. E. Tie Rod: Use 3/8 inch diameter tie rod construction throughout. F. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. 1. Frames: Provide primed 1-1/4 inch by 1-1/4 inch by 3/16 inch steel reinforcing angle at hinge jambs of door frames for full height of frame. 2. Doors: Provide continuous primed 1-1/4 inch by 1/8 inch steel bar reinforcing at hinge edge of door. G. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other separator that will prevent corrosion. H. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. I. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. J. Weather Stripping: 1. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. Provide EPDM or vinyl blade gasket weather stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 3. At interior doors and other locations without weather stripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. 2.05 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes: 1. Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Anodic Finish: 1. Color Anodized Finish: Provide AA-M12C22A44, Class 1 (non-specular as fabricated mechanical finish; chemical etch, medium matte; minimum thickness 0.7 mil), integrally or electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating. a. Color: 1) Dark Bronze. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems: Perform quality control procedures complying with ASTM C1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and system fabrication reviews and checks. Aluminum Framed Storefront 08410 - 8 2/08 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Examine substrates and supports for: a. Compliance with requirements indicated. b. Installation tolerances. c. Other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. 2. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. B. Installation: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation. 2. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch. 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials: 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint wood or similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with 2 coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant: E. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weather tight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. F. Refer to Section 08800 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not pre-glazed by manufacturer. 3.02 JOINT SEALERS A. Joint sealers for the entrance and storefront systems are the responsibility of this Section. See Section 07920. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weather tight closure. Aluminum Framed Storefront 2/08 08410 - 9 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the Section 08800 section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: See Section 08710 for additional hardware required by aluminum framed storefront. B. Door Hardware: Group A – Exterior Patio 1 Continuous hinge Markar, FM300, Stainless Steel. 1 exit device Corbin/Russwin ED4200-FO3, US10B 1 pulls By KES, Installed by Contractor 1 pull plates By KES, Installed by Contractor 1 closer LCN 4110 SPRINGCUSH (100°), Match door color. 1 sweep Manufacturers standard sweep, color matching. 1 threshold ADA conforming manufacturer’s standard aluminum threshold. Note: Do not pre-drill pair of doors 101A for door pulls and pull plates. Group B – Exterior Vestibule 2 continuous hinges FM 300, Stainless Steel 1 exit device ED4800-FO1, US10B 1 exit device ED4800-FO3, US10B (no outside trim) 2 pulls By KES, Installed by Contractor 2 pull plates By KES, Installed by Contractor 2 closers 4110 SPRINGCUSH (110°) 2 sweeps Manufacturers standard sweep, color matching. 1 threshold ADA conforming manufacturers’ standard aluminum threshold. Note: Do not pre-drill pair of doors 101A for door pulls and pull plates. END OF SECTION Finish Door Hardware 3/08 08710 - 1 SECTION 08710 FINISH DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Finish door hardware: 1) Hinges. 2) Locksets/latchsets. 3) Exit devices. 4) Closers. 5) Door trim: a) Push/pulls. b) Kickplate. 6) Stops and holders. 7) Thresholds, weather stripping, gasketing, and rain drips. 8) Bottom and edge protection strip. b. Key storage cabinet. c. Fire Department access box. 2. Provide the following for other sections to install including, but not limited to: a. Finish door hardware (Section 08710). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames (Heavy Commercial) 2. Section 08210 - Wood Doors 3. Section 08410 - Aluminum Framed Storefront 4. Division 16 - Electrical 1.02 REFERENCES A. ADA B. ANSI: 1. A117.1 Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. 2. A156.4: Door Controls-Closers 3. 156.15: Life Safety Closer Holder Release Devices 4. 156.18: Materials and Finishes 5. 156.19: Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors C. ASTM B117: Method of Finish Corrosion Testing D. NFPA: 1. No. 80: Fire Doors and Windows 2. No. 101: Life Safety Code Finish Door Hardware 08710 - 2 3/08 E. UBC F. UL: Door Closers-Holders, with or without Integral Smoke Detectors 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ADA: Americans With Disabilities Act B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials D. LDW: Less Door Width E. NRP: Non-Removable Pin F. UBC: Uniform Building Code G. UL: Underwriter Laboratory H. WH: Warnock Hersey 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including individual catalog “cuts” and installation instructions. B. Manufacturer’s Templates: Finish door hardware Supplier shall provide manufacturer’s templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of the hardware, and to the jobsite for site installation of the hardware. C. Suppliers Hardware Schedule: 1. Coordination: Coordinate finish door hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. 2. Content: Submit final hardware schedule organized into “hardware groups” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Name and manufacturer of each item. b. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. c. Fastenings and pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on the Drawings both on the floor plans and in the Door/Frame Schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 3. Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., aluminum entrances) which is critical in the project construction schedule. D. Keying schedule: Submit detailed Keying Schedule indicating Owner’s instructions from pre-submittal meeting. Finish Door Hardware 3/08 08710 - 3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide similar units furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of finish door hardware. 3. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the project’s vicinity (100 mile radius) for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about the project’s hardware requirements, to the Owner, Owner Representative, and Contractor. 4. Installer: Three years experience in the installation of finish door hardware. B. Certifications: Provide UL or WH listed hardware as required for doors scheduled to be fire rated in door schedule. C. Regulations: 1. ADA: Interior, non-rated doors shall have 5 pounds operating force (maximum). D. Post-installation Inspection: Upon completion of hardware installation, the Hardware Supplier shall meet the Contractor and Owner Representative at the jobsite to insure proper installation, adjustment and operation of the hardware. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect finish door hardware from damage during shipment, storage and construction. Pack each item complete with necessary pieces and fasteners, properly wrapped and cushioned to prevent scratches during delivery and storage. B. Identification: Furnish finish door hardware, each unit clearly marked or numbered in accordance with hardware schedule. C. Delivery: All hardware shall be delivered to the jobsite and/or door and/or frame manufacturers in the manufacturer’s original cartons. D. Scheduling: Deliver templates and/or physical hardware in timely manner to ensure orderly progress of total work. E. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Guarantee workmanship and material provided against defective manufacture. Repair or replace defective workmanship and material appearing within a period of 1 year after substantial completion. B. Provide 10 year factory warranty on door closers against defects in material and workmanship from date of occupancy of project. Finish Door Hardware 08710 - 4 3/08 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENERS A. General: Furnish finish hardware with necessary screws, bolts, other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position for long life under hard use. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts, hex bolts, other anchors approved by Owner Representative, according to material to which hardware is to be applied and recommendations of hardware manufacturer. B. Provide self-tapping fasteners (Tek for weather stripping). C. Design: Harmonize fasteners with hardware as to material and finish. 2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturer: The following is a list of butt types which are considered acceptable: Hager Lawrence McKinney Stanley Type 1 BB1199 BB5151A T4B3386 FBB199 Type 2 BB1168 BB5151T4 B3786 FBB168 Type 3 BB1279 BB4101T B2714 FBB179 Type 4 1279 4101 T2714 F179 Type 5 BB1191 BB4101A TB2314 FBB191 NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED B. Ball Bearing Butts: Ball bearing butts shall be furnished for all exterior doors, doors equipped with door closers, and all doors over 3 feet wide. C. Types: Butt types shall be furnished as follows (unless otherwise indicated): 1. Exterior out-swinging doors: Type 1 by NRP 2. Interior doors over 3 feet wide and ALL vestibule doors: Type 2 3. Interior doors thru 3 feet wide: Type 3 or 4. 4. Where noted: Type 5. D. Quantities: Butt quantities shall be as follows: 1. Two butts for doors up to 5 feet high. 2. Provide 1 additional butt for every additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof over 5 feet. 3. Four butts for Dutch Doors. 4. Four butts for all aluminum entrance doors. E. Sizes: Butt sizes shall be as follows: 1. 1-3/4 inch doors: 4-1/2 inches by 4-1/2 inches. F. Butt Width: Provide proper butt width to clear trim and allow full 180 degree swing. 2.03 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Finish Door Hardware 3/08 08710 - 5 1. Markar, 300 Series 2. Stanley, 600 Series 3. McKinney, 300 Series 4. No substitutions allowed. B. Provide 1 of the above series of continuous hinges. Type to be listed in hardware groups. It will be the hardware supplier’s responsibility to coordinate this with the door supplier. C. Hinges and astragals that wrap the door are to be applied with the "Adjusta-Screw" mounting method, to allow for proper adjustment of the door in the opening. 2.04 LOCKSETS AND LATCHES A. Acceptable Manufacturers, Series and Design: Mortise Locks Manufacturer Series Design Corbin Ruswin ML2000 NSA No Substitutions Allowed Non-Ferrous Locksets Manufacturer Series Design Corbin Ruswin ML2000 M26 NSA No Substitutions Allowed B. Cylinders: Heavy duty removable core for all exit devices and locksets. C. Throw: Locksets and latchsets shall have latchbolt throw of the lengths required to meet fire label requirements and shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch. D. Lip Length: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. E. Hazardous Locations: Furnish knurling on outside levers that lead to loading platforms, stages, mechanical and electrical rooms stairs other than exit stairs, and other hazardous locations, in accordance with UBC, Section 1340.0900. F. Keying: 1. Construction Keying: Provide method independent of final keying system for securing building during construction in accordance with Owner’s security requirements. 2. Final Keying: Locks and cylinders shall be keyed to the Owner’s requirements. Keying shall include but is not limited to Grand Master keying, Master keying and keying in groups. 3. Furnish 6 Grand Master keys marked “Do Not Copy.” Furnish Master keys marked “Do Not Copy” for each Master key set. Furnish 2 Change keys for each lock or cylinder. Ship keys to the Owner or the Owners representative via registered mail. 4. Systems: All locks and cylinders shall be keyed to a new master key system. 2.05 EXIT DEVICES A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Series: Finish Door Hardware 08710 - 6 3/08 1. Corbin/Russwin, ED4200 2. Von Duprin, 99 Series/33 Series 3. Precision, Apex DL1100 4. No substitution allowed. B. Certifications: Exit devices shall be UL listed for safety requirements and Fire Label requirements. C. Mounting: Verify need for through-bolting with door manufacturer. Provide through-bolt mounting if required at Fire Labeled wood doors. D. Provide keyed removable mullions as scheduled in materials to match frame. 2.06 DOOR CLOSERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Series: 1. LCN, 4010/4110 Series 2. Sargent, 281/281-P10 Series 3. No substitutions allowed. B. Sizes: Furnish closers non-sized, adjustable to meet opening force requirements of ADA. C. Accessories: Closers shall be supplied complete with all plates, adapters and accessories as necessary to suit conditions. D. Mounting: 1. Closers shall be mounted as follows unless details or other conditions dictate otherwise: a. Parallel arm on all closers. 1) Room side of corridor doors. 2) Stair side of stair doors. 3) Built-in stop on exterior and vestibule doors. b. If conflict arises, verify with Owner Representative. 2. Verify need for through-bolting with door manufacturer. E. Adjustment: Closers shall have separate adjusting valves for sweep speed, latching speed and back check. F. A.D.A.: All closers shall meet A.D.A. requirements for barrier free accessibility. 2.07 DOOR TRIM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hiawatha 2. Rockwood 3. Equal approved by Owner Representative prior to bidding. B. Push Plates: 1. Equal to Hiawatha 200H for flush doors and 200F for doors that will not accept 6 inch plates. 2. Exterior front entry: pull plates by owner, installed by contractor. C. Pulls: 1. Equal to Hiawatha 658B at exterior and 658A at vestibule doors and 536B at interior doors (unless otherwise indicated). Finish Door Hardware 3/08 08710 - 7 2. Exterior front entry: pulls by owner, installed by contractor. 3. Recessed pull: 1459C D. Kickplates and Armor Plates: 1. Gage: 16-gage (0.050). 2. Width: 2 inches LDW on single doors and 1 inch LDW on pairs of doors and 12 inches high. Size of armor plates shall be as indicated. 3. Beveled: Four edges. 4. Countersinking. 2.08 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Glynn-Johnson 2. Equal approved by Owner Representative prior to bidding. B. Locations: Furnish a stop or holder for each door as follows (unless otherwise indicated): 1. Doors scheduled for a stop or holder shall have one of the following as required by surrounding conditions: 50W, 60W, WB11, WB11A, RB3, RB4, RB6, W20, W20A, 410 or 450. 2. Furnish a 450 series where wall stops are unsuitable, and for all doors equipped with regular arm surface mounted closer that is capable of swinging more than 145 degrees before striking a wall. Provide through-bolt mounting if required at Fire Labeled wood doors. a. NOTE: Wall stops shall not be mounted on casework, cabinet work, or equipment. 3. Furnish a stop arm or a stop arm/holder at doors with a parallel arm door closer requiring an overhead stop or stop/holder. 2.09 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING, GASKETING, AND RAIN DRIPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Guard 2. Pemko 3. Reese 4. Equal approved by Owner Representative prior to bidding. B. Thresholds and Weather Stripping: As listed below at each exterior door, unless noted otherwise: 1. Thresholds: National Guard 8425. 2. Sweeps: National Guard B606. 3. Drip/Sweeps: National Guard C627A. 4. Weather Stripping: National Guard 700N. 5. Sound Seal: National Guard 5050 gasket. 6. Rain drip: National Guard 16A full frame width. 2.10 DOOR BUMPERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Rockwood 2. Bommer 3. No substitutions allowed. B. Floor: Heavy duty 467. Finish Door Hardware 08710 - 8 3/08 C. Crash: 175-32 2.11 LATCH PROTECTORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Glynn Johnson B. Where latch protectors are specified in Hardware Groups, provide Glynn Johnson LP1, or approved equal. Latch protectors shall be stainless steel of the type required to work with the specified latch. 2.12 CYLINDERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Medeco, series 10 w/ Medeco key Control 2. No substitutions B. Where latch protectors are specified in Hardware Groups, provide Glynn Johnson LP1, or approved equal. Latch protectors shall be stainless steel of the type required to work with the specified latch. 2.13 OTHER MATERIALS A. Other materials, not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation, to be new, first quality of their respective kinds, subject to approval of Owner Representative. Provide stops as required. 2.14 DOOR HARDWARE FINISHES A. Unless otherwise indicated, finishes shall be as follows: 1. Butts (exterior): US32D 2. Butts (interior): US26D 3. Continuous hinges (exterior): US32D 4. Flushbolts: US26D 5. Locksets: US26D 6. Latch guards: US32D 7. Closers: Powder coat Aluminum. 8. Overhead controls (exterior): US32D 9. Overhead controls (interior): US26D 10. Exit devices: US26D 11. Pushes, pulls, kick plates: US32D 12. Stops, holders: US26D 13. Miscellaneous items: US26D 14. Weather stripping: Aluminum 15. Cylinders: US26D for all except Aluminum Doors which are US10B 2.15 KEY STORAGE CABINET A. Provide key cabinets by Lund Equipment, Telkee, Incorporated, or Key Control. Lund Deluxe wall type cabinet, Series 1200. Provide cabinet with one hook for each lock or cylinder plus at least 50 extra hooks. Provide each hook with one non-removable security key tag and one snap-on link duplicate key tag. Provide tools, instruction sheets, and accessories required to complete installation. Owner will place keys in the key cabinet and complete index cards furnished with key system. Finish Door Hardware 3/08 08710 - 9 2.16 FIRE DEPARTMENT ACCESS BOX A. Provide an access box with anti-tamper contacts. Coordinate the keying requirements with the authority having jurisdiction. Verify surface or flush mount box with Owner Representative. B. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Knox-Box, 3200 Series. 2. Dama, S3 (surface-mount) C. Finish: Corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERIES A. Stockpile items sufficiently in advance to ensure their availability; make necessary deliveries in timely manner to ensure orderly progress of total work. 3.02 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions at mounting heights as described in the Door and Hardware Institute’s “Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” unless otherwise noted. If doors and frames are custom, use “Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames” unless otherwise noted. B. Installation: Holes and mortises in wood doors for locks and other hardware shall be cut with a jig approved or provided by the manufacturer of the item applied. All locks shall be mounted so the key enters the cylinder with the smooth side down. After hardware has been fitted, escutcheons and face- applied hardware shall be removed until final painting has been completed. Hardware shall be reinstalled after painting is complete, properly adjusted, tested and left in perfect working condition. C. Key Envelopes: After each lock has been reinstalled, the installer shall seal its keys in one of the supplied envelopes. The keys shall be delivered to the Owner together with surplus envelopes. 3.03 HARDWARE GROUPS AND SUFFIXES A. General: The following schedule of hardware groups shall be considered a guide only and the supplier is cautioned to refer to the general conditions, special conditions, and the preamble to this section. It shall be the hardware supplier’s responsibility to furnish all required hardware. All hardware shall be supplied in compliance with all fire and building codes. 3.04 THRESHOLDS A. Set exterior thresholds in 2 beads of polyurethane joint sealant to prevent moisture from entering the work. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Finish Door Hardware 08710 - 10 3/08 1. Furnish items in amounts indicated on Drawings or required for complete and operable facility. Verify quantities and suitability of fasteners. Coordinate Schedule with Drawings and notify of any door not scheduled for hardware. B. Hardware Groups: Group 1A and 1B – Atrium Door and Exterior Entry Pair 1 cylinder Series 10 Group 2 – Vestibule Pair 2 continuous hinge FM 300, Stainless Steel 2 pulls 658A 2 pull plates L shaped, 5-1/4W x 16H vertical & 34W x 6H horizontal. Install with short vertical leg up. 2 push bars 1081 LBP –33 2 push plates L shaped, 5-1/4W x 16H vertical & 34W x 6H horizontal. Install with short vertical leg up. 2 closers 4111 CUSH (90°) 2 kick plates 34W x 12H 1 set weather-strip 29310DP 2 wall stops 406 Group 3 – Kitchen door 1 floor bumper Rockwood Heavy Duty 3” Door Stop 467; no substitutions. Position on floor directly centered under corner of handsink Remaining hardware to be provided and installed by KES. Group 4 - Toilet Room Door – Push Pull 3 butts FBB 179 – 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 push plate 6W x 16H 1 pull 536B 1 pull plate 6W x 16H 1 wall stop 406 1 closer 4040 1 kick plate 34W x 12H Group 5 - Toilet Room Door - Privacy 3 butts FBB 179 – 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 lockset ML2030 1 closer 4130 (180°) 1 kick plate 34W x 12H Group 6 – Mechanical/Electric Room Door 4 butts FBB 179 – 5 x 5 1 cylinder 1 exit device ED4200 – F09 1 closer 4111 CUSH (90°) 1 kick plate 34 W x 12H 1 exit device ED4200-F09 Finish Door Hardware 3/08 08710 - 11 Group 7 – Service Door 1 continuous hinge FM 300, Stainless Steel 1 exit device ED4200 – F09 (thru-bolt reinforcement) 1 cylinder 1 closer 4110 HOSPRINGCUSH (110°) extension. (thru-bolt reinforcement) 1 set weather strip 312CR 1 sweep 315CN 1 threshold 253X3AFG 1 head drip 346C 1 kick plate 46W x 48H (outside) 1 crash bumper Bommer 175-32 Group 8 – Liquor Storage Door 3 butts F 179 – 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 lockset ML2057 1 cylinder 1 overhead stop 104H (90°) 1 kick plate 34 W x 12H Group 9 – Storage Room Door 3 butts F 179 – 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 lockset ML2010 1 wall stop 50C 1 kick plate 34 W x 12 H Group 10 – Exit Only Door 3 butts FBB 199 – 5 x 5, NRP 1 exit device ED4200 – F01 1 flush pull 1459C 1 closer 4111 HOSPRINGCUSH (90°) extension. 1 set weather -strip 312CR 1 sweep 315CN 1 threshold 253X3AFG 1 head drip 346C 1 kick plate 34W x 12H Group 11 – Office Door 3 butts F 179 – 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 lockset ML2051 1 wall stop 50C 1 kick plate 34 W x 12 H Finish Door Hardware 08710 - 12 3/08 Group 12 – Brewery Exterior Door 4 butts FBB 179 – 5 x 5, NRP 1 mortise bolt DL4013 1 push plate 6W x 16H 1 recessed pull 1459C 1 closer 4110 HOSPRINGCUSH (90°) 1 set weatherstrip 312CR 1 sweep 315CN 1 threshold 253X3AFG 1 head drip 346C Group 13 – Brewery Interior Door 4 butts FBB 179 – 5 x 5 1 mortise bolt DL4013 1 push plate 6W x 16H 1 pull 536B 1 pull plate 4W x 16H 1 closer 4040 CUSH (90°) 1 kick plate 40W x 12H Group 14 – Exterior Patio Gate 3 butts Hager 1150–32D, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 END OF SECTION Glazing 2/08 08800 - 1 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Primary glass products: 1) Clear float. 2) Patterned: b. Heat-treated glass products: 1) Tempered. 2) Spandrel. c. Sealed insulating glass units. d. High performance coatings (Low “E”). e. Mirrors: 1) Unframed mirror. f. Glass and glazing accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Glazing sealants. 2) Preformed glazing tapes 3) Glazing gaskets. 4) Setting blocks, spacers, and compressible filler rods. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06400 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 2. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames (Heavy Commercial) 3. Section 08410 - Aluminum Framed Storefront 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. “Glazing Manual,” 1997 Edition, FGMA 2. “Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials,” U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission, 16 CFR 1201. 3. SIGMA No. 65-7-2, 1973 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. GANA: Glass Association of North America C. SIGMA: Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association Glazing 08800 - 2 2/08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including plans, elevations, sections details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and adjoining system. From the Project Manual, include a copy of the specification section that applies. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide glass and glazing units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of glass and glazing. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of glass and glazing. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of glass and glazing, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ASTM: Glazing for rated assemblies shall be identical to those tested per ASTM E152 or E153, labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies. 2. Consumer Products Safety Commission: Glazing shall comply with 16 CRF Part 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect glass and glazing from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide 10-year written warranty, beginning at date of substantial completion, covering labor, materials for replacement of spontaneous failure of all tempered glass used on project. For any glass requiring replacement under this warranty, provide a new minimum 5-year warranty commencing at date of acceptance of replacement glass by Owner and Owner Representative. Glazing 2/08 08800 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable fabricators and products are: 1. HGP, Inc., Morristown, NJ. 2. Hoffer, Wausau, WI. 3. Viracon, Owatonna, MN. 4. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Patterned Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Saint Gobain Glass. 2. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. All glass shall be from the same manufacturer. B. Primary Glass Products: 1. Clear Float Glass: 1/4 inch thick, Glazing A quality; conforming to Federal Specification ASTM C1036. C. Heat-Treated Glass Products: Conform to quality equal to ASTM C1036 and strength equal to ASTM C1048: 1. Tempered Glass: Provide tempered glass required by safety of CPSC 16 CFR 1201, other codes and regulations, elsewhere as indicated in Construction Documents. D. Sealed Insulating Glass: 1. Conform to referenced SIGMA standards. 2. 1 inch thick, Low “E” insulating glass; organic sealed edges; 2 panels 1/4 inch thick, Glazing Select quality, float glass each side or similar thickness tempered glass where codes prohibit use of float glass and where shown on Drawings. 3. Manufacturer’s option of hard or soft coat. 4. U value of 0.33 (winter) or better. E. Spandrel Glass: 1. Heat-strengthened or fully-tempered glass, as required by code or indicated on Drawings. 2. Ceramic frit paint, selected by Owner Representative from manufacturer’s standard colors, on surface No. 3 or 4. F. Patterned Glass: 1. Winterlake pattern run vertical. a. Laminate 2 sheets back to back (texture out). b. Coordinate to fit edge into CTS aluminum frame. 2. Equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. Glazing 08800 - 4 2/08 G. Mirrors: 1. Unframed Mirror: 1/4 inch thick glass conforming to Federal Specification ASTM C1036, select quality, slivered, electrocopper plated and coated with an organic protective coating. Provide polished eased edges and brushed stainless steel (Type 302) mirror clips similar to KV277 at the bottom and ASTM C1036. KV278 at the top. H. Accessories: Glazing accessories, other material not specifically called for, to be new, first quality of respective kinds, subject to approval of Owner Representative. 1. Sealant: G.E. 1200 Series silicone sealant. 2. Glazing Tape: G.E. glazing tape. 1/8 inch at interior lites in hollow metal frames. 3. Glazing Gaskets: Where indicated on Drawings, neoprene glazing gaskets of profiles indicated, manufactured from virgin neoprene compounded to meet physical properties of ASTM C542; gaskets and lock strips with premolded corners (cut strips of gasket material not acceptable); products of Standard Products Company, F. H. Maloney, or equal product accepted in advance by Owner Representative. 4. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy aluminum extrusions for glazing gasket frame sections; finish architectural Class I anodic coating AA-M12 C22 A42-black. 5. Setting Blocks: Neoprene with Shore A hardness of 70-90 durometer; not less than 3 inches long nor more than 8 inches long, length such that loading is 15 psi; full width of rabbet where possible. 6. Spacer Blocks: Neoprene with Shore A hardness of 40-50 durometer, 1 inch to 3 inches long. 7. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of glass and glazing, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 FINISHES A. Colors of glazing materials exposed to view in finished work shall be as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that glazing may be done in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Glazing: Set glass in true plane, tight, straight, with proper, adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam edges. Install in accordance with referenced standards. Install aluminum gasket frames in bed of acoustic sealant. Glazing 2/08 08800 - 5 B. Mirrors: Install as shown on Drawings to be level, true, at proper height, securely anchored. 3.04 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. Glass and Glazing: Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean glass surfaces, correct imperfections, replace damaged glass, leave labels on glass until it has been inspected and approved. Remove labels immediately thereafter. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Entrances and Storefront: 1 inch thick insulating unit, clear glass. B. Interior Vestibules and Storefront: 1/4 inch thick unit, clear glass. C. Mirrors: 1/4 inch plate glass. D. Doors: Tempered or wire glass. E. Patterned Glass: 2 layers laminated 1/4 inch patterned (vertical). END OF SECTION Metal Support Assemblies 2/08 09100 - 1 SECTION 09100 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Steel studs and furring material: 1) Studs (1’-4” on center U.O.N.). 2) Runners. 3) Blocking: a) Wall hung items. 4) Light gage reinforcement. 5) “Slip-head” channel including systems for fire rated assemblies (14 gage U.O.N.). b. Accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Clips, screws, and other fasteners. 2. The following is not included in this section: a. Suspension system for acoustical ceiling panel system (Section 09512). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. A641 2. C645 3. C754 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. UL: Underwriters Laboratories 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including plans, elevations, sections details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and Metal Support Assemblies 09100 - 2 2/08 between system and adjoining system. From the Project Manual, include a copy of the specification section that applies. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: UL reports indicating approval for use in fire rated assemblies. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide metal support system units made of components of standard construction furnished by 1 manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of metal support systems. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of metal support systems. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of metal support systems, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect metal support systems from damage during shipment, storage, and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 2. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Carefully coordinate requirements for support backing of items to be mounted on finished walls and ceilings. Carefully coordinate requirements for pipes, ducts, cabling, other services in soffits, plenums, other items designed to be housed within partition, wall, or soffit system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Steel Studs and Furring Materials: a. Dietrich Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. b. Gold Bond Products Division of National Gypsum. Metal Support Assemblies 2/08 09100 - 3 c. Unimast, Inc., Franklin Park, IL. d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Steel Studs and Furring Materials: 1. Studs: a. Screw type, drywall studs formed of galvanized steel, conforming to ASTM C645. b. 25 gage nominal, 3-5/8 inch studs except as indicated on Drawings; with cut-outs for pipe and conduit. c. 20 gage nominal studs at 16 inches on center at mortar (tile) backer board and cement backer board at exterior soffit system. d. 20 gage behind large wall hung cabinets. e. 16 gage at each side of door jambs. 2. Runners: Formed from galvanized steel, same gage as studs, conforming to ASTM C645. 3. Slip Head Channel: a. General: System compatible with enough depth to allow for required deflection (verify with structural engineer). b. Fire rated assemblies: UL approved. 4. Tie Wire: Galvanized, soft annealed steel wire; hanger wire to be galvanized steel wire; zinc coating to be not less than Class I as set forth in Federal Specification QQ-W-461G. B. Accessories: 1. Clips, Screws, and Other Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard type for intended use. 2. Other Materials: Not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation, to be new, first quality of respective kinds, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that metal support systems may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Steel Studs and Furring Members: 1. General: Extend steel stud partitions to structure above where indicated on Drawings. Securely attach floor runners with concrete stub nails or powder-driven anchors spaced not over 24 inches on center. Set runners in two 1/4 inch beads of specified acoustical sealant. Attach runners to structure above with connection allowing for structure movement as indicated in partition type legend bound in this manual. Do not bridge building expansion joints. Metal Support Assemblies 09100 - 4 2/08 2. Studs: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840; anchor studs to runner channels with screws or other positive fasteners; double studs at hollow metal frames. Securely anchor to jamb and head anchor clips at hollow metal frames with screws or bolts. Install runner track with web and flanges bent down at each end across head of hollow metal frames; screw each flange to vertical studs. Install jack studs above frame. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or if none available, with “Gypsum Construction Handbook,” published by United States Gypsum Company. 3. Sliphead Channel: Securely attach to roof structure or deck. Locate where walls extend to roof structure or deck to allow for deflection, allowing wall head channel to slip as deflection occurs. 4. Auxiliary Framing: Provide all auxiliary framing required to continuously support all ends and edges of gypsum panels. Brace walls above windows, doors, and other openings 4 feet on center, maximum. 5. Reinforcement: Reinforce partitions as necessary to receive and support casework and other items to be mounted on walls. Provide 20 gage minimum galvanized sheet metal plate reinforcing for attachment of light items to partitions. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Special Situations: 1. Chase Walls: Construct with double studs. Brace double studs with 12 inch high, 1/2 inch thick gypsum board braces spaced not over 48 inches on center, screwed to studs with not less than three screws on each side of wall; or brace with 2-1/2 inch studs spaced not over 48 inches on center. 2. Where Ceilings Return to Higher Ceiling: Form vertical surfaces with metal studs suspended from structure above. Space studs not over 24 inches on center. Brace studs with diagonal bracing spaced not over four feet on center as required. B. Interface with Other Work: 1. Where Main Runners, Cross Runners Interrupted by Light Fixtures, Grilles, Registers or Other Openings: Install additional runners to frame openings. Reinforce grillage as necessary to support light fixtures, grilles, registers, other items mounted in ceiling. C. Site Tolerances: 1. Vertically: 1 in 500. 2. Horizontally: 1 in 200. 3. Ceilings: Maximum allowable deflection of 1/360 of span. END OF SECTION Gypsum Board 2/08 09250 - 1 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Gypsum drywall: 1) Fire-rated gypsum board. 2) WR gypsum board. b. Backer board panels: 1) Cementitious. c. Corner beads and trim: 1) “J” trim. 2) Control joint. d. Joint treatment. e. Drywall accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Sound attenuation blanket. 2) Acoustical sealant. 3) 15# felt. 4) Access panels. 5) Fasteners. 6) Adhesives. 2. Installation of material furnished by other sections: a. Thermal Insulation (Section 07210). b. Vapor retarder (Section 07210). 3. Installation of material furnished by Owner: a. Toilet Equipment B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 07210 - Building Insulation 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. C36: Specification for Gypsum Wallboard B. Gypsum Association: 1. Fire Resistance Design Manual (GA-600-Latest Edition). 2. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish (GA-214-Latest Edition). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials Gypsum Board 09250 - 2 2/08 B. GA: Gypsum Association C. STC: Sound Transmission Class D. UL: Underwriters Laboratories 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide drywall systems units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of drywall systems. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of drywall systems. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of drywall systems, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect drywall systems from damage during shipment, storage, and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturers name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Joint Treatment: Control heating, ventilating during finishing operations to ensure maintenance of 55 degrees F minimum temperature. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Gypsum Drywall: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of United States Gypsum Company. Gypsum Board 2/08 09250 - 3 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Gold Bond Building Products Division. b. National Gypsum Company. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Backer Board Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Cementitious: a. GlasCrete, Inc. Lithia Springs, GA b. Durabond Division, USG Industries, Inc. c. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. C. Acoustical Sealant: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Tremco 2. USG 3. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Drywall: 1. Fire-rated Gypsum Board: All gypsum board, unless indicated otherwise: a. Partitions: 5/8 inch Firecode Sheetrock b. Ceilings, Soffits: 5/8 inch Firecode Sheetrock. 2. Water Resistant Panels: In addition to above requirements, Sheetrock WR-panels where indicated on Drawings. B. Cementitious Backer Board: Proprietary backing and underlayment panels composed of concrete core with glass fiber mesh reinforcing on both faces covered with portland cement treatment; average weight 3.4 pounds per square foot; thickness, 7/16 inch or 1/2 inch as standard with manufacturer. C. Corner Beads and Trim: 1. General: a. Must be approved for use in required rated assemblies. b. Unless indicated otherwise, trim at dissimilar materials to be USG 200-Series or vinyl break- away bead (zip-strip). 2. Corner Bead: USG Dura-bead 3. Control Joint: USG #093 4. Flex Corner Bead: USG #4-A. 5. “J” Bead: USG #200-A. 6. Resilient Channel: RC-1. D. Joint Treatment: 1. Interior Panels: USG ready-to-use joint compound (taping, topping, general purpose). E. Drywall Accessories: 1. Sound Attenuating Insulation: Owens Corning or Schuller fiberglass sound control batts, STC of 49 when used with wall type indicated. Batt thickness, unless stated differently on Drawings, as recommended by Manufacturer. Gypsum Board 09250 - 4 2/08 2. Acoustical Sealant: a. General Requirements: Non-hardening, non-drying, non-bleeding; shall meet ASTM D217 requirements. b. Product: Acoustical Sealant. 3. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 15 pound type. 4. Access Panels: One drywall access panels 24 inches by 24 inches; style “DW” manufactured by Milco, Inc., or equal product of other manufacturers accepted in advance by Owner Representative. 5. Fasteners: a. Metal Studs, Furring Strips: USG Type S bugle head screws of lengths required. b. Cementitious Backer Board: Screws specifically designed and recommended by manufacturer for application of cementitious backer board. c. Other Fasteners: Screws, clips, fasteners specifically designed for application of gypsum drywall panels. 6. Adhesives: Non-bituminous base adhesive recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for type of installation and material to receive gypsum wallboard. Conform to ASTM C557. 7. Other Materials: Not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of gypsum drywall, to be selected by installer subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that gypsum drywall may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Drywall: 1. General Requirements: Install with true, even surfaces, straight sharp corners. In general, install gypsum board on ceilings before walls. Use full length boards where possible. a. Cutting: Score and break or saw, working from face side. Smooth cut ends, edges of panels as necessary to obtain smooth joint. Make cut-outs in panels for pipes, fixtures, other small openings by sawing or other method to not fracture core or tear covering, so that plates, escutcheons, trim will cover edges. b. Loosely butt joints to be taped; firmly butt joints to be left untreated. c. Construct ceilings, perpendicular to framing, fire-resistive (hourly rated) partitions with long dimension of gypsum board applied to studs as recommended by assembly. Gypsum board for other walls, partitions, furring may be applied either parallel or at right angles to supports. d. Install flat panels plumb, level, with vertical joints on bearing. Gypsum Board 2/08 09250 - 5 e. Stagger end joints, joints between panels to achieve maximum of bridging, minimum of continued joints; offset joints in panels on opposite sides of same partition. f. Use water resistant board on fixture walls in toilet rooms. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated on Drawings. 2. Attachment: a. Screw to framing. b. For walls with gypsum board applied vertically, space screws 8 inches on center, along edges, 12 inches on center in field. c. For walls with gypsum board applied horizontally and ceiling construction, space screws 12 inches on center. d. Space screws according to rated design for fire-resistive partitions, ceilings. e. Fasten gypsum board beginning at center, work towards outer edges. Hold board firmly against supports while fastening. f. Locate fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges; locate at edges of boards 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch from edge. 3. Sealing: a. Seal partition perimeter joints with acoustical sealant where indicated on Drawings. b. Seal joints in backer board occurring behind control joints. c. Seal around pipes, ducts, conduit, other items extending through gypsum board partitions or ceilings. d. Seal backs, sides of electrical boxes. e. Seal joints, cut edges, nail and screw heads, punctures in water-resistant gypsum backing board with waterproofing sealant recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. B. Adhesive Installation of Gypsum Drywall: Where indicated on Drawings, install gypsum board directly on concrete or masonry using adhesive. Before installation, verify that concrete and masonry surfaces are thoroughly cured, clean, dry, reasonably smooth, free of fins and projections which would prevent proper bonding of gypsum board, free of release agents (from oil). Apply adhesive according to manufacturer’s instructions. Apply gypsum board vertically with joints neatly fitted. Temporarily support gypsum board as recommended by manufacturer. Allow at least 24 hours after installation before treating joints. C. Metal Trim: 1. General Requirements: Drawings are not intended to show all metal trim required. Verify with Owner Representative precise locations, types of trim to be used. 2. Installation: a. Carefully inspect Drawings and verify location metal trim required. b. Install corner reinforcing at external corners, install casing beads where gypsum board abuts other materials. c. Control joints: Install where indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, locate in walls, partitions not over 30 feet on center. Locate above door frames where possible, construct one control joint above each jamb of door. d. Install metal trim plumb, level, true to line, with firm attachment to supporting members. D. Access Panels: Install in ceilings, soffits, walls where directed by Owner Representative, in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Cementitious Backer Board: Wherever ceramic wall tile is indicated at “wet” locations, install specified backer board over 20 gage nominal steel stud framing (16 inches on center maximum). Pre-cut board to required sizes, make necessary but-outs. Fit ends, edges closely but not forced together. Install with 1/4 inch space above receptors or other surfaces. Fasten boards to steel studs with 1-1/4 inch Type S screws 6 Gypsum Board 09250 - 6 2/08 inches on center. Apply 2 inch glass-fiber tape over joints and corners; embed with mortar or adhesive used to set tile. 3.04 TAPING AND FINISHING A. Finish: painted rooms. 1. General: Level 5, as specified by GA-214-90. a. First Coat: 1) Spread compound evenly over joints, using suitable tools designed for purpose. Fill joint recesses, metal trim. 2) Center reinforcing tape on joint, press into fresh compound, wiping down with sufficient pressure to remove excess compound but leaving sufficient compound under tape for proper bond. 3) Feather edges, leave surface free from blisters, tape wrinkles. 4) Apply compound to fastener recesses, leaving flush with adjacent surfaces. 5) Fold reinforcing tape along its centerline, apply to interior angles, following same procedure as for joints. b. Second and Third Coat: 1) Apply coat to joints, feathering approximately 3 inch beyond edges of tape. Apply to fastener recesses; allow to dry. c. Third and Fourth Coat: 1) Apply coat, feathering approximately 2 inches beyond second coat. 2) Coat fastener recesses, metal trim, interior angles; allow to dry. 3) Carefully sand to uniformly smooth surface completely free from irregularities visible to unaided eye at distance of 5 feet. d. Skim Coat: 1) A thin skim coat of joint compound or material manufactured especially for this purpose shall be applied to entire surface. 2) The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. B. Textured Wall Finish: 1. Location: a. See Room Finish Schedule for location. 2. First Coat: a. Apply with drywall flat finishers or drywall knife, leveling ridges. When coating entire area, keep moving in one direction, overlap previous application. b. Level, smooth surfaces before compound dries. 3. Second Coat: a. Apply, smoothing carefully before surface hardens. b. When thoroughly dry, sand to smooth, level surface. c. Very rough or uneven surfaces may require more than 2 coats. Apply additional coats as described for second-coat application. d. When dry, sand to smooth, level surface, remove sanding dust. 4. Finish: After walls has been taped and sanded, apply textured finish in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and so as to produce texture matching sample accepted by Owner Representative. 3.05 CLEANING A. Do not allow accumulation of scraps and debris arising from Work of this Section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. In event of spilling or splashing compound or finish material onto other surfaces, Gypsum Board 2/08 09250 - 7 immediately remove spilled or splashed material and all trace of residue, to acceptance of Owner Representative. END OF SECTION Tile 3/08 09300 - 1 SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install a. Interior Tile: 1) Floor Tile over concrete slab: a) Glazed quarry tile. b) Unglazed paver tile. 2) Wall tile over gypsum wallboard: a) Glazed wall tile. 3) Wall Tile over backer board (wet areas): a) Glazed wall tile. b. Tile accessories, including but not limited to: 1) Matching trim units. c. Setting materials. d. Setting accessories, including but not limited to: 1) Corrugated polyethylene matting for floor/slip sheet/uncoupling. 2) Cementitious backer board. 3) Metal reducer transition strip. e. Grout. f. Elastomeric sealants. g. Sealer. 2. The following is not included in this section: a. Cementitious backer board (Section 09250). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI: 1. 118 Series: Tile Materials 2. A118.4: “Specification for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar” 3. A137.1: “American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile” B. Industry Standards: 1. “The Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation,” TCA 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute Tile 09300 - 2 3/08 B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials C. TCA: Tile Council of American, Inc. D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Samples: 1. Verification: Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations expected. a. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. D. Qualification Data: Qualification data for firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide tile made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of tile. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of tile. B. Codes and Standards: Comply with pertinent codes and regulations. Manufacture tile in accordance with provisions of TCA A-137.1-latest edition. Install tile in accordance with recommendations contained in latest edition of referenced standard. C. Grade Certificates: Submit Master Grade Certificates for tile upon request. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect tile from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Handling: Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. D. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. Tile 3/08 09300 - 3 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Venting: Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. 2. Temperature: Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer’s instructions. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; if conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide for maintenance purposes, quantity equal to 3 percent of each type of material installed. Furnish from same production run as materials installed. Package and mark to identify building, material type, and color. Deliver and store where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Tile “A”: Quarry Floor Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Dal-Tile Corporation, unless otherwise noted. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. American Olean Tile Company, Inc. b. Lone Star Ceramics c. United States Ceramic Tile Company d. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Tile “B”: Toilet Floor Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Dal-Tile Corporation, unless otherwise noted. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. C. Tile “C”: Bar Floor Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Impronta Italgraniti USA, Inc, unless otherwise noted. 2. Contact: Visit website for a provider in your area http://www. Impronta-Italgraniti.com 3. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. D. Tile “D”: Dining Floor Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Dom Ceramic, unless otherwise noted. 2. Contact: John Henry at The Tile Shop (763-541-9720). Tile 09300 - 4 3/08 3. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. E. Tile “E”: Kitchen/Brewery Wall Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of The Tile Shop, unless otherwise noted. 2. Contact: John Henry at The Tile Shop (763-541-9720). 3. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. F. Tile “F”: Toilet Wall Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Dal-Tile Corporation, unless otherwise noted. 2. Contact: Dal-tile (800-253-1380 ext #109) 3. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. G. Tile “G”: Wall Tile 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Dal-Tile Corporation, unless otherwise noted. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. H. Setting Accessories: 1. Metal reducer transition strip: a. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements are: 1) Schluter Systems, L.P., Plattsburgh, NY (800.472.4588). 2) Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2. Uncoupling and Waterproof Matting: a. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements are: 1) Schluter Systems, L.P., Plattsburgh, NY (800.472.4588). 2) Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Quarry Tile: 1. Tile Type “A”: Quarry Floor Tile (kitchen, work areas, brewery) a. Type: Abrasive (Non-abrasive at base) square-edged flat tile. b. Size: 6 by 6 inches. c. Thickness: 1/2 inch nominal. d. Face: Plain face. e. Product: Brick red color. f. Grout: #96 Quarry Red Clay. g. Pattern: running bond. B. Glazed Paver Tile: 1. Tile Type “B”: Toilet Floor Tile a. Type: Porcelain flat tile. b. Face: 13 by 13 inches. c. Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal. Tile 3/08 09300 - 5 d. Face: Plain face with square edges. e. Product: Paraiso Caienna PS52. f. Grout: Misty Gray H144. g. Pattern: running bond. 2. Tile Type “C”: Bar Floor Tile a. Type: Porcelain flat tile. b. Size: 14 by 14 inches. c. Thickness: 1/2 inch nominal. d. Face: Plain face with square edges. e. Product: Impronta Intalgraniti African Stone; color Nigeria. f. Grout: Misty Gray H144. g. Pattern: diagonal 45 deg at bar front, vertical at bar base, running bond at interior bar. 3. Tile Type “D”: Dining Floor Tile and Bar Path Tile a. Type: Porcelain flat tile. b. Size: 20 by 20 inches. c. Thickness: 1/2 inch nominal. d. Face: Plain face with square edges. e. Product: Dom Ceramic Nepal Red. f. Grout: Misty Gray H144. g. Pattern: running bond. C. Porcelain Tile for Walls: 1. Tile Type “E”: Production Kitchen/Brewery Wall Tile a. Type: Interior type body, flat tile. b. Size: 6 by 8. c. Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal thickness. d. Face: Patterned face with standard edge. e. Product: Toscana Carmel 2918. f. Grout: Mobe Pearl H145. g. Pattern: running bond. 2. Tile Type “F”: Toilet Wall Tile a. Type: Interior type body, textured tile. b. Size: 6 ½ by 6 ½ wall tile. 4 by 13 inches coved base tile c. Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal thickness. d. Face: Stone face with standard edge. e. Product: Castle De Verre CV11 Chalice Gold. f. Grout: Mobe Pearl H145. g. Pattern: stack bond. D. Glazed Wall Tile: 1. Tile Type “G”: Private Toilet Wall Tile a. Type: Interior type body, flat tile. b. Size: 4 by 4 inches. c. Thickness: 5/16 inch nominal thickness. d. Face: Plain face with modified square edge. e. Product: Artic White 0190. f. Grout: #381 Bright White. g. Pattern: running bond. Tile 09300 - 6 3/08 E. Tile Accessories: 1. Matching base and trim units. F. Setting Materials: 1. Portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.1. 2. Dry-set portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.1. 3. Latex-portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.4. G. Setting Accessories: 1. Membrane waterproofing under tile. a. Ditra by Schluter at floor. b. Kerdi by Schluter at wall. 2. Cementitious tile backer board. 3. Metal reducer transition strip: Aluminum. H. Grout: 1. Commercial portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6. (wall tile) 2. Chemical-resistant epoxy grout, ANSI A118.3. (floor tile) I. Elastomeric Sealants: 1. One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant for non-traffic areas. 2. Multi-part pourable urethane sealant for traffic areas. J. Silicone Sealer: 1. TEC TA-257 Silicone Group Sealer with non-gloss finish. a. This sealer may enhance grout color after 48 hours. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150-77, Type I, gray or white. 2. Hydrated lime: ASTM C206-76, Type S. 3. Sand: ASTM C144-76, washed, cleaned and graded; fine sand shall pass No. 16 sieve. 4. Water: Clean, potable, and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. 5. Latex-portland cement mortar: ANSI Referenced standard 6. Latex adhesive: HB Fuller Tec Crete or Laticrete International Laticrete No. 3701 or No. 4237. 7. Organic adhesive: ANSI Specification A136.1, Type II. 8. Mortar pigment: Alkali resistant, non fading color pigment. 2.04 MIXES A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Either job mixed Portland cement-sand mortar mixed with latex additive, or prepared dry set Portland cement mortar mixed with latex additive. Job mixed mortar to be one part Portland cement to one part fine sand. Mix strictly according to additive manufacturer’s instructions. Do not dilute latex additive. B. Grout: Hydroment joint filler of color as selected or comparable products of Atlas Minerals and Chemicals Division, H.B. Fuller Company, or equal. Tile 3/08 09300 - 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that work may commence in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Surface Preparation: Protect tile with temporary coating as required by manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TILE A. Ceramic Floor Tile on Slab on Grade: Install in accordance with TCA Method: F115-98. B. Ceramic Floor Tile for Kitchen Quarry/Paver Tile: Install in accordance with TCA Method: F133. C. Ceramic Wall Tile on Gypsum Board, Organic Adhesive: Install in accordance with TCA Method: W243- 98. D. Ceramic Wet Wall Tile on Backer Board: Install in accordance with TCA Method: B415. E. Grout Joints: 1. Coordinate floor and wall tile so that grout joints align. F. Control Joints: 1. Floor: a. 12 feet on center maximum. b. At the perimeter of the floor plane next to the wall. 2. Wall: a. 12 feet on center maximum. 3.04 GROUTING A. Preparation: Soak or dampen joints of tile to be grouted with Portland cement grout. Soak or dampen other joints as recommended by grout manufacturer. B. Porcelain Stoneware Tile: Grout same day that tile is set. C. Tile Set with Organic Adhesives: Use latex-mixed grout. Tile 09300 - 8 3/08 D. Joints: Force grout into tile joints completely filling with compacted grout and covering mortar. Finish joints of square-edged tile flush with surface. Strike or tool joints of cushion-edged tile to depth of cushion. Fill gaps and skips, and retool. E. Curing: Damp cure Portland cement mortar bed installations, latex-Portland cement thin-set installations and grouts containing Portland cement for minimum 72 hours. 3.05 SEALING A. Seal all grout joints with Silicone group sealer after grout has cured 28 days. 1. Use adequate ventilation. 2. Cloth used with this product is combustible and should be discarded in closed, metal containers outside the building. 3. Clean surface thoroughly. Dry and cure prior to application. 4. Maintain surface temperature between 50 degrees to 80 degrees. 5. Use full strength. Apply with paint brush, cloth, or grout seal applicator. 6. Remove any excess sealer from tile surfaces immediately with a soft, dry cloth. 3.06 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials and procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. 3.07 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: Clean exposed surfaces of tile using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer’s Representative to schedule and attend meeting with Owner’s Representatives to explain: 1. Maintenance and Care Instructions. 2. Recommended Maintenance Program. 3. Warranty Requirements. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Prohibit foot and wheeled traffic from using newly tiled floor for at least 3 days. 3.10 SCHEDULE A. Kitchen Office/Back Work Areas: Quarry Floor Tile & Base: 1. 6 x 6 x ½” floor and 6” high coved base, in Brick Red color with abrasive floor tile content as Manufactured by Dal-tile, American Olean, Summitville or equal. Tile base does not need to be non- skid. Tile to be square edged. Place in running bond aligned with room. Grout color - #96 Quarry Red Clay. Tile 3/08 09300 - 9 B. Rooms 125 & 126: 1. Walls: 6 ½” x 6 ½” Castle de Verre CV11 chalice gold (Dal-tile) Placed with field stack bond. Mobe Pearl, H145. 2. Base: 6” x 13” cove base. Castle de Verre CV11 chalice gold (Dal-tile). Align joints with floor. Grout color: Mobe Pearl, H145. 3. Floors: 13 in x 13 in, Paraiso PS52 Caienna (Daltile). Placed in running bond aligned with room. Grout color: Misty Gray, H144. C. Room 115: 1. Walls: 4 in x 4 in, Semi-gloss, Dal-tile, Artic White (0190) or equal. Placed in running bond. Grout color - #381 Bright White. 2. Floors & Base: Quarry Tile & Base as indicated in 1 above. D. Rooms 110, 128 & 130: 1. Walls: 6 in x 8 in, Toscana Carmel (2918 per Tile Shop). Placed with field running bond aligned with room. Grout color - Mobe Pearl, H145. 2. Floors & Base: Quarry Tile & Base as indicated in 1 above. E. Room 107: 1. Bar Perimeter Floor: 14 in x 14 in, Impronta-Intalgraniti - African Stone color Nigeria. Placed at 45 degrees to bar stack bond (see drawing detail). Grout color- Misty Gray, H144. 2. Bar Curb and Bar Curb Interior Base: 14 in x 14 in, Impronta-Intalgraniti -African Stone color Nigeria. Placed with vertical joints perpendicular to floor. Grout color – Misty Gray, H144. 3. Back Bar Floor:14 in x 14 in, Impronta-Intalgraniti -African Stone color Nigeria. Placed in running bond aligned with bar. Grout color - Misty Gray, H144. 4. Back Bar Base:14 in x14 in, Impronta-Intalgraniti African Stone color Nigeria placed with vertical joists perpendicular to floor. Grout color - Misty Gray, H144. 5. Booth Platform14 in x 14 in, Impronta-Intalgraniti African Stone color Nigeria. See drawings for layout of tile. Grout color - Misty Gray, H144. 6. Walk path: 50 cm x 50 cm (20”), Nepal Red Porcelain (SKU 66625), Dom Ceramic, Italy. Placed in running bond aligned with room (90-degrees off Dining Room). Grout color Misty Gray, H144. F. All other Ceramic Tile Floors: 1. 50 cm x 50 cm (20”), Nepal Red Porcelain (SKU 66625), Dom Ceramic, Italy. Placed in running bond aligned with room. Grout color Misty Gray, H144. G. Nepal Red Porcelain (SKU 66625) can be purchased from: The Tile Shop from John Henry at (763)541- 9720. H. To locate distributor of Impronta-Intalgraniti African Stone Nigeria, contact: Impronta Italgraniti USA, Inc, 7200 F Fullerton Road, Springfield, VA 22150, Phone: 703-455-9200, Fax: 703-455-4619, Email: us@improntaitalgraniti.com I. Castle de Verre can be purchased from: Dal-tile Distibutor 1-800-253-1380 ext #109 END OF SECTION Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 2/08 09512 - 1 SECTION 09512 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide and install: a. Ceiling panels: 1) Painted mineral base: a) Reveal edge. b) Square edge. 2) Scrubbable mineral base with membrane face: a) Square edge. b. Metal suspension systems: 1) Non-rated suspension system. c. Accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Edge moldings/trim. 2) Hanger wire. 3) Hold down clips. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 2. Division 15 - Mechanical 3. Division 16 - Electrical 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. E1264: Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Samples: 1. Color samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard color samples with Product Data and Shop Drawings. Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 09512 - 2 2/08 2. Product samples: One 12 inch by 12 inch sample of each type of acoustical ceiling tile. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide acoustical ceiling panel system units made of components of standard construction furnished by 1 manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of acoustical ceiling panel system. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of acoustical ceiling panel system. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of acoustical ceiling panel system, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with pertinent codes and regulations, and recommendations published by the ceiling and interior systems contracting associations. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect acoustical ceiling panel system from damage during shipment, storage, and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Field dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide for maintenance purposes, quantity equal to 2 percent of each type of material installed. Package and mark to identify building and material type and color. Store as directed after completion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of USG Interiors, Inc., Chicago, IL. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Armstrong Architectural Products. b. Celotex Building Products Division, Tampa, FL. c. Ecophon. Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 2/08 09512 - 3 d. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. B. Metal Suspension Systems: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Donn, Chicago, IL. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Chicago Metallic, Chicago, IL. b. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: 1. Painted Mineral Base: a. Type 1 (mineral base) meeting requirements of ASTM E1264. b. Form 1 (Cast) or Form 2 (Water Felted). c. Class 25. d. Flame spread/smoke developed: 25/10 or less. e. Fire Rating: Nonrated. f. Product: Cirrus angled tegular, reveal edge (pre-painted dark brown prior to install). g. See schedule at end of section. 2. Gypsum scrubbable base with vinyl face: a. Type 2 (Gypsum base with vinyl face), meeting requirements of ASTM E1264. b. Form 1 (Cast) c. Class 25. d. Flame spread/smoke developed: 25/10 or less. e. Faced with plastic. f. Fire Rating: Nonrated. g. Product: ClimaPlus vinyl faced, square edge. h. See schedule at end of section. 3. Painted Fiber Base: a. Type 1 (mineral base) meeting requirements of ASTM E1264. b. Form 1 (Cast) or Form 2 (Water Felted). c. Class 25. d. Flame spread/smoke developed: 25/10 or less. e. Fire Rating: Nonrated. f. Product: Ecophon Performance, square edge (ceiling). g. Product: Ecophon Protect, square edge (walls) adhesive applied. h. See schedule at end of section. 4. Painted Mineral Base: a. Type 1 (mineral base) meeting requirements of ASTM E1264. b. Form 1 (Cast). c. Class 25. d. Flame spread/smoke developed: 25/10 or less. e. Fire Rating: Nonrated. f. Product: Dune Second Look, reveal edge (pre-painted dark brown prior to install). g. See schedule at end of section. 5. Painted Mineral Base: a. Type 1 (mineral base) meeting requirements of ASTM E1264. b. Form 1 (Cast) or Form 2 (Water Felted). Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 09512 - 4 2/08 c. Class 25. d. Flame spread/smoke developed: 25/10 or less. e. Fire Rating: Nonrated. f. Product: Cirrus Second Look III, square edge (Mfr standard black with black grid). g. See schedule at end of section. 6. Painted Mineral Base: a. Type 1 (mineral base) meeting requirements of ASTM E1264. b. Form 1 (Cast) or Form 2 (Water Felted). c. Class 25. d. Flame spread/smoke developed: 25/10 or less. e. Fire Rating: Nonrated. f. Product: Cirrus angled tegular, reveal edge. g. See schedule at end of section. B. Metal Suspension Systems: 1. General: Standard type, structural classification, finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C635 requirements. 2. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Double Web Steel Suspension System: Manufacturer’s standard system roll-firmed from prefinished cold-rolled electrogalvanized steel sheet; other characteristics as follows: a. Structural classification: Intermediate duty system. b. See schedule at end of section. C. Accessories: 1. Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung: a. Corrosion Protection: Stainless steel components complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts and anchors at locations indicated. 2. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized so stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire; provide not less than 12 gage: a. Corrosion Protection: Nickel-copper alloy wire; ASTM B164 nickel copper alloy UNS N04400 at locations indicated. 3. Edge Moldings, Trim: Metal or extruded plastic of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer’s standard molding for edges, penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail, suspension system indicated. a. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details: Stepped edge molding which forms reveal of same depth, width as formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member, unless indicated otherwise. b. For circular penetrations of ceiling: Edge moldings factory-fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 4. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of acoustical ceiling panel system, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 FINISHES A. General: Manufacturer’s standard factory-applied flat finish for type of system indicated. B. Colors: White and as selected by the Owner Representative from manufacturer’s standard colors. Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 2/08 09512 - 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that acoustical ceiling panel system may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Comply with ASTM C636-76 and manufacturer’s recommendations. Cooperate with mechanical, electrical contractors in locating and spacing fixtures, diffusers, similar items located in ceiling. Install level, true to plane, at required elevation and pattern with finished surfaces undamaged. B. Metal Suspension Systems: 1. Pattern: Lay out in accordance with reflected ceiling plans. Where not otherwise indicated, lay out so margins on opposite sides of rooms are equal and greater than 1/2 tile wide. 2. Main Runners: Suspend with not less than 12 gage galvanized, soft annealed steel wire. Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Hanger wires vertically with no kinks or bends. Space hangers along main runners according to manufacturer’s recommendations and code requirements. 3. Reinforcement: Reinforce suspension system as necessary to adequately support suspension system, acoustical material, light fixtures, grilles, registers, other mechanical equipment to be supported by system with maximum hanger spacing 4 feet on center. 4. Supports: Do not support from electrical conduit, mechanical ducts, pipes, or equipment. Where spans exceed recommended or specified spans, furnish larger main runner channels or additional reinforcing members, hangers, stiffening, or bracing as necessary to support loads without exceeding specified allowable deflection. Swing hangers are not permitted. Install fire rated assemblies in accordance with the appropriate UL fire rated assemblies. 5. Edge Moldings: Install at walls and vertical projections through ceiling. C. Acoustical Panels: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s recommendations; all four edges of each board to be in firm contact with and supported by flanges of the runner sections. Check level of system during installation, maintain level and true plane. 3.04 LIGHT FIXTURE PROTECTION A. Light fixtures and other recessed equipment within all fire-rated ceiling areas to be protected as required to comply with codes. Acoustical Ceiling Panel System 09512 - 6 2/08 3.05 CLEANING A. Following installation, clean dirt, finger marks, other discolored spots from surfaces in manner and with materials recommended by manufacturer. Replace dirty, discolored, damaged, and improperly applied units. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Panel Types: Where indicated on Drawings, provide specified product or equal products of other approved manufacturers accepted in advance by Owner Representative. 1. ACT-1: Armstrong, Cirrus Angled Tegular, 24” x 24”, reveal edge. (Pre-painted tile and grid to match custom color B/M REGAL FLAT FINISH WALL SATIN to cover at room 101 only. Color to be Brown Sugar #2112-20). 2. ACT-2: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl faced Sheetrock, 24” x 48”. 3. ACT-3: 24” x 48”, Ecophon Performance & Protect. Provide Ecophon Performance at ceiling. For wall application in Production Kitchen 110: Tiles to be #1, adhesive applied Provide Ecophon Protect at wall panels mounted to 5/8” plywood backing with butted vertical joints. Touch up joints with paint as needed. Start with full tile adjacent to dining area. 4. ACT-4: Armstrong, Dune Second Look I, fine texture, 24”x24”, reveal edge. (Pre-painted tile and grid to match custom color B/M REGAL FLAT FINISH WALL SATIN. Color to be Brown Sugar #2112-20). 5. ACT-5 Armstrong, Cirrus Second Look III, 24”x48”, square edge. (Pre-painted tile and grid to be standard color black). 6. ACT-6: Armstrong, Cirrus Angled Tegular, 24” x 24”, reveal edge. END OF SECTION Paint 3/08 09910 - 1 SECTION 09910 PAINT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Exterior paint for: 1) Concrete masonry units. 2) Ferrous metal. 3) Zinc-coated metal. b. Interior paint for: 1) Gypsum drywall. 2) Ferrous metal. 3) Zinc-coated metal. c. (Semi) transparent finishes for: 1) Interior wood: a) Stain/varnish/rubbed. 2. Special Coordination required with: a. Owners Tuscan Finish Contractor and Faux painter. These finishes are applied to the walls at all customer areas. Prep these areas with primer as described in greater detail in these specifications. 3. Perform the following: a. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats for exposed surfaces and items including bare and primed mechanical and electrical equipment as scheduled or considered standard practice. b. In remodeled areas, paint items or areas indicated on the Drawings. 4. Do not paint the following: a. Prefinished items, except as noted. b. Concealed spaces, except as noted. c. Labels: 1) UL, FM or others that are code-required. 2) Equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel 4. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 5. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry 6. Section 06400 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 7. Section 07840 - Fire Stopping 8. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames (Heavy Commercial) 9. Section 08210 - Wood Doors 10. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Paint 09910 - 2 3/08 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: 1. D16-84: Standard Definitions of Terms 2. D2016: Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 3. D2833-83: Standard Index of Methods for Testing 4. D3276-86: Standard Guide for Inspectors. 5. D3927-87: Standard Guide for State and Institutional Purchasing of Paint. B. Rule 66: VOC Limitations C. CAN4-S101M: Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials D. ULC: List of Equipment and Materials 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. FM: Factory Mutual B. Paint: Any “decorative, protective, or otherwise functional coating applied to a substrate. This substrate may be another coat of paint.”—The Paint Handbook, by Guy E. Weismantel. C. Sheen Definitions: 1. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section. 2. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 3. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 6. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. D. UL: Underwriters Laboratories E. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification. C. Samples: 1. Verification Samples: Paint 3/08 09910 - 3 a. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: (Paint) 1. General: Provide paint furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of paint. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of paint. B. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certification that products supplied with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Regulations: Compliance with VOC and environmental regulations. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Deliver and store materials at a temperature not below 45 degrees F in a dry, protected area, off the ground in original, undamaged, sealed containers with manufacturer’s labels and seals intact. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Protection: Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 2. Job Conditions: a. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). b. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C). c. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. d. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. Paint 09910 - 4 3/08 B. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; if conditions do not meet approval, notify Owner representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. 2. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify Owner representative of problems anticipated using the materials specified. 3. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide for maintenance purposes, quantity equal to additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon (3.785 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. Furnish from same production run as materials installed. Package and mark to identify building and material type and color. Deliver and store where directed by Owner representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Paint: 1. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W), except as noted. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: a. Diamond Vogel (D-V). b. Benjamin Moore and Company (Moore). c. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). d. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). e. Manufacturer of equal products approved in advance by Owner representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer’s best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer’s product identification will not be acceptable. Paint 3/08 09910 - 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that paint may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 2. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: 1. General: a. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer’s written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. b. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: a. Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. b. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. c. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s printed directions. d. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: a. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. b. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. Paint 09910 - 6 3/08 c. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: a. Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. b. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. c. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: a. Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. b. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mixing: 1. Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. 2. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 3. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 4. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. B. Tinting: Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.04 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in “schedules.” 4. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. B. Multiple Coats: The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. C. Tolerances: Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Paint 3/08 09910 - 7 D. Extent of Work: 1. The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. 3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 6. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. E. Scheduling Painting: 1. Coordination: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 2. Drying: Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces: 1. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: a. Piping, pipe hangers and supports. b. Heat exchangers. c. Tanks. d. Ductwork. e. Insulation. f. Supports. g. Motors and mechanical equipment h. Accessory items. 2. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: a. Conduit and fittings. b. Switchgear. c. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Paint 09910 - 8 3/08 J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: 1. Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 2. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 PATCHING A. Patch and repair any intumescent fireproofing that has been damaged by this or any other section. Cost of repairs to be borne by sections responsible for the damage, and as assessed by the contractor. 3.06 CLEANING A. Cleanup: 1. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 2. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Other Trades: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Owner representative. B. Warning Signs: Provide “wet paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.08 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete masonry units: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High-performance, 100 percent acrylic block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry mill thickness of not less than 4.0 mils (0.102 mm). 1) S-W: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46. b. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm). 1) S-W: Weather Perfect Exterior Flat B36 Series. Paint 3/08 09910 - 9 B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items, except for touch-up. 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) S-W: Kem Bond High Solids B50XZ Series. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: A-100 Gloss Acrylic House and Trim A8 Series. C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) S-W: B50WZ30 Series. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: A-100 Gloss Acrylic House and Trim A8 Series. 3.09 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar 400 Interior Latex Wall Primer B28W400. b. First and Second Coats: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar Alkyd Semi-Gloss B34WZ1100. B. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over a sealer coat and an alkyd-based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. Note: Filler typically not required for tight-grained woods such as birch and popular. 1) S-W: Sherwood Fast-Dry Filler. b. Stain Coat: Alkyd-based, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) S-W: Sherwood Water Reducible Wiping Stain S64 Series. c. First and Second Finish Coats: polyurethane varnish, as recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) S-W: Polyurethane Satin Varnish A67F1. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Paint 09910 - 10 3/08 a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) S-W: Kem Bond High Solids B50XZ Series. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal: 1. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) S-W: B50WZ30. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series. E. Ceiling panels: Provide the following finish system on acoustical covering: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. First and Second Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) S-W: ProMar 200 Flat Latex B30W200 Series. 3.10 SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board – To receive Multi Texture/Multi Color Wall Coating System (Tuscan Finish and Faux) 1. 1 coat REGAL FIRST COAT. 2. Remaining finish by others. B. Gypsum Board – Painted. 1. 1 coat REGAL FIRST COAT. 2. 2 coats REGAL AQUAVELVET. (2 coats REGAL AQUAGLO in Rooms 104, 112, 113, 114, 115, 118, 119, 125, 126, 128, & 132). Color - SW 6113 Interactive Cream. C. Interior mechanical and electrical work, and miscellaneous items exposed to view all above elevation 112’-6” or on ceiling when noted on drawings and schedules to be painted: 1. Spot prime as required with B/M recommended primer for materials to be coated. 2. B/M REGAL FLAT FINISH WALL SATIN TO COVER. Color to be Brown Sugar #2112-20. D. Interior Ductwork, Insulation, Piping, Air Registers, Uni-struts and Conduit for Televisions, Etc, in finished spaces: 1. Prime appropriate for base materials. 2. Paint to match adjacent surfaces. E. Interior Flush Wood Doors and all Wood frames and Trim: 1. SHERWIN WILLIAMS Stain consisting of 75% S64-XXR-1613 and 25% S64-XXN-0816. Stain is based on Pionite plastic laminate #WW561, Spiced Walnut. Compare sample locally prior to submitting for approval. 2. 1 coat B/M MOVAR URETHANE SANDING SEALER. 3. 1 coat B/M MOVAR SATIN URETHANE GLOSS. 4. 1 coat B/M MOVAR SATIN URETHANE LOW LUSTRE. F. Interior Faces of Wood Doors 102: Paint 3/08 09910 - 11 1. SHERWIN WILLIAMS Stain consisting of 75% S64-XXR-1613 and 25% S64-XXN-0816. Stain is based on Pionite plastic laminate #WW561, Spiced Walnut. Compare sample locally prior to submitting for approval. 2. 1 coat B/M MOVAR URETHANE SANDING SEALER. 3. 1 coat B/M MOVAR SATIN URETHANE GLOSS. 4. 1 coat B/M MOVAR SATIN URETHANE LOW LUSTRE. G. Concrete Block Exterior: (inside dumpster enclosure). 1. 1 coat MOORCRAFT INTERIOR & EXTERIOR BLOCK FILLER. 2. 2 coat MOORGARD LATEX HOUSE PAINT. 3. Paint color: Abbey Brown BM 1225. 4. Do not tape off light fixture on concrete block. H. Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames and Miscellaneous Mechanical and Electrical Items: 1. Spot prime. 2. 2 coats B/M SATIN IMPERVO ENAMEL. 3. Color - SW 6113 Interactive Cream. I. Exterior Vents, Louvers, Bollards, Guard posts, Exterior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Railings, Dumpster Gates and Other Metal Items: 1. Prime: a. Spot prime shop primed items. b. Unprimed, ferrous metal: 1 coat B/M M24 - DTM ALKYD SEMI-GLOSS. c. Galvanized ferrous metal: 1 coat B/M M04 - ACRYLIC METAL PRIMER. d. Aluminum: 1 coat B/M ORGANIC ZINC RICH PRIMER. 2. 2 coats B/M IMPERVO Enamel. 3. Paint colors: a. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames within brick and bollards: Paint to match terra cotta metal cap above brick. b. Exterior railings and gates: Dark Bronze SW-BRZ4. c. Dumpster gate metal frame: Abbey Brown BM 1225. J. Exterior Visible Mechanical and Electrical Equipment (including that which is visible on building and factory finished): 1. Finish per H. above. 2. Color if in Stucco - SW 6101 Sands of Time. K. Exterior stucco, prefinished sheet metal and other materials: 1. Finish by others; no field finishing required. 2. Paint stucco reveals to match stucco. L. Cast Stone Address Block and Cast Stone GC Emblem 1. Shop paint engraved areas with BM Iron Mountain 2134-30. M. Parking Lot Markings 1. Paint lines, traffic control arrows, step & ramp markings and symbols in parking lot, and drives including all concrete surfaces requiring same with one coat BENJAMIN MOORE M56 SAFETY & ZONE MARKING ALKYD, white or approved equal. END OF SECTION Metal Toilet Compartments 2/08 10160 - 1 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Doors, panels, and pilasters. b. Headrail. c. Hardware. d. Anchorages and fasteners. e. Metal toilet compartment accessories including, but not limited to: 1) Latch. 2) Coat hook/bumper. 2. The following is not included in this section: a. Toilet Accessories (Section 10810). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 REFERENCES A. CABO/ANSI: A117.1-92 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Floor-mounted, overhead braced Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and configurations within system and between system and adjoining system. From the Project Manual, include a copy of the specification section that applies. Metal Toilet Compartments 10160 - 2 2/08 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide metal toilet compartments units made of components of standard construction furnished by 1 manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of metal toilet compartments. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of metal toilet compartments. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of metal toilet compartments, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect metal toilet compartments from damage during shipment, storage, and construction. B. Delivery: Do not deliver to the site until the building is enclosed or other enclosed storage is available. Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise, design is based on products of Hadrian. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of specifications acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters: 1. Steel: 20 gage galvanized, bonderized, stretcher-leveled steel, galvanizing to conform to ASTM A164-71, Type R. 2. Aluminum brackets: At least 1/8 inch thick. 3. Baked enamel textured panel pre-painted to be dark grey dimpled finish #802 Pewter Metallic. B. Headrail: Continuous extruded aluminum, anti-grip profile, with clear anodized finish. C. Hardware: Stainless steel or non-ferrous alloy, chrome plated; rest position of door to be easily adjustable without removing door: Metal Toilet Compartments 2/08 10160 - 3 1. Equip each toilet compartment door with universal concealed gravity hinges and recessed hinge brackets, ADA approved latch, stop and keeper, and coat hook and bumper. 2. Provide wall mounted bumpers for out-swinging doors. 3. Coat hook and bumper on door. 4. Through bolt other hardware. 5. Make cut-outs and reinforce partitions to receive toilet accessories and grab bars. D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturers standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, or brass finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or stainless steel. 1. All urinal partitions to have three (3) brackets minimum and 12” top chrome bracket. Coordinate “U” shape brackets and “L” shaped brackets with other fixtures. E. Metal Toilet Compartment Accessories Manufacturer’s Standard Design: Heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy (“Zamac”). F. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of metal toilet compartments, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 FINISH A. Thoroughly clean, bonderize, give one coat of rust-inhibitive primer containing at least 50 percent rust- inhibitive pigments, one finish coat of baked acrylic enamel to exposed ferrous surfaces. Two colors to be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors. All like components must be the same color, unless specified otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that metal toilet compartments may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install plumb, true, square in neat, rigid, substantial manner. Connect dividing partitions and pilasters together; attach to walls with stirrup brackets of heat treated, extruded aluminum or non-ferrous alloy, chrome plated. Screw stirrup brackets to partitions and pilasters with non-removable sheet metal screws; brackets to have at least 2 bolts for each panel being fastened and 4 bolts for fastening to walls. Metal Toilet Compartments 10160 - 4 2/08 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials, procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust units to operate in proper manner and easily without binding. 3.06 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION Exterior Illuminated Signage 3/08 10430 - 1 SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR ILLUMINATED SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner provided exterior illuminated signage at the building. B. Special Coordination Required: 1. Contractor shall review shop drawings, coordinate schedule, and coordinate the Contractor’s Work with the work provided in this package. Special attention to wall and roof membrane penetrations and sealants. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing details of each item specified including mounting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sign Productions, Steve Allsop / Kori Eastwood, (319) 364-6697. This package will be contracted directly by Owner.. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Letter Size: Furnish and install, including all wiring and connections, all the exterior illuminated signage as shown on the drawings. B. Signage to be as follows: 1. Three (3) - “GC” logo signs to be opaque letters, projected and neon back lighted, letters shall be surface mounted without a raceway behind it. 2. One (1) - “Granite City Food & Brewery” banner signs to be surface mounted illuminated channel letters with translucent faces, neon internally lighted. C. Type Set Color: “Granite City” color is PMS 195, “Food & Brewery” to look black during the day and white at night. Trim caps and returns to match color of wall surface signage is mounted on. Verify all colors with owner. D. Type Set Style: Match owner font as shown on the Drawings. Size to be as shown on drawings. E. Illuminated. Exterior Illuminated Signage 10430- 2 3/08 2.03 INSTALLATION A. All ballasts to be on interior of the designated signage walls mounted on the interior wall and connected thru wall to neon light tubes. No ballasts or wiring is to be visible on building exterior. Conceal ballast and wiring above ceilings in rooms. Keep the work organized, tight to wall and keep above the 112’-6” elevation. Seal all wall penetrations waterproof and airtight at both interior and exterior wall surfaces. Connect to switches and junction boxes provided by others in area of sign locations.. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Interior Signage 3/08 10440 - 1 SECTION 10440 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Panel signs: 1) Frames. 2) Insert panels: a) Room identification signs. b) Miscellaneous information signs. c) Danger Signs. b. Vinyl die cuts. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. ADA Standards 2. ANSI Spec. A117.1 3. DHEW Spec. 4.12 4. OSHA Standards 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute C. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including elevations, sections details between system and adjoining system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide interior signage systems made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies for each system. Interior Signage 10440 - 2 3/08 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of interior signage. B. Certifications: 1. Certification: a. Submit certification that signage meets handicapped standards specified. b. Submit independent certification that Braille is correct for stated text. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect signage from damage during shipment, storage and construction. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner Representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of manufacturers licensed to use the manufacturing process of New Hermes, Inc; Manufacturers using this process need not obtain substitution approval prior to bid, but must submit letter certifying that they are providing New Hermes, Inc. licensed or franchised products. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 2. SCS-CoSines 3. Sign Solutions, 1100 Series 4. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Panel Signs: 1. Frames: a. General Requirements: Provision for modification of signage without removal of frame from wall. b. Material: Injection molded high impact styrene. c. Style: Square corners. d. Finish: Colors selected by Owner Representative from manufacturer’s standard color palette. 2. Insert Panels: a. General: Signage meeting requirements of ADA. Interior Signage 3/08 10440 - 3 b. Materials: Modified acrylic c. Graphic Process: Raised copy; 1/32 inch minimum. d. Size: As indicated on Drawings, or as scheduled. e. Lettering: Upper case characters in size as indicated on the Drawings, or if not indicated, 5/8 inch (minimum), 2 inches (maximum). f. Font: Helvetica Medium. g. Braille: Include text (grade 2). h. Finish: ADA compliant matte finish in colors selected by Owner Representative from manufacturer’s standard color palette. i. Pictogram: As indicated by text on 6 inch high (minimum) background. 3. Panel Signage Types (See attached Drawings at end of section): _________ a. Panel Type “1”: 4 inches high by 8 inches long, with text as scheduled; one of each text unless scheduled otherwise. b. Panel Type “2”: 8 inches square with graphic symbols to be included as indicated on schedule at end of section. 4. Mounting System: a. Frame: Concealed screw mount. b. Insert Panel: 3M Brand, No. 468 High Performance tape. B. Danger Signs: 1. .040-inch-thick aluminum with screenprint sign and with 1-mil polyester film over laminate. 10 inches by 14 inches. 2. Include fastovers. See schedule at end of Section. C. Vinyl Die Cut Signs: 1. General: Vinyl die cut, pressure sensitive 3M Scotchlite reflective material in letters, numbers and symbols as indicated on Drawings or Schedule. Signs to be installed on glass or Aluminum. 2. Size: 2 inches high. 3. Font: Arial ” Brewery”. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that interior signage may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plumb, true, square in neat, rigid, substantial manner. Comply with ADA. Interior Signage 10440 - 4 3/08 3.03 CLEANING A. After installation, clean all surfaces. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Provide following text on individual panel signs as specified: 1. Panel Signs: a. Panel Type “1” (1) OCC 200 (1) OCC 60 b. Panel Type “2” (1) WOMEN with Access Symbol (1) MEN with Access Symbol (1) TOILET with Access Symbol 2. Vinyl Die Cuts: a. “BREWERY” (2 locations total). b. “MECH/ELECT” (1 location) c. “FIRE SPRINKLER RISER ROOM” (1 location) END OF SECTION Fire Protection Specialties 3/08 10520 - 1 SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Fire extinguishers: 1) Dry chemical extinguisher. 2) CO2 extinguisher. b. Wall bracket. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinet: a. Non-rated cabinet. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratory 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide fire protection specialties units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of fire protection specialties. 3. Personnel: For actual installation of fire protection specialties, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. UL Listing: Provide portable fire extinguishers which are UL listed and bear UL “Listing Mark” for type, rating and classification of extinguisher listed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect fire protection specialties from damage during shipment, storage and construction. Fire Protection Specialties 10520 - 2 3/08 B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damage material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Inspect the project prior to installation; If conditions do not meet approval, notify the Owner representative. Proceeding without notification implies acceptance of conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Design is based on products of J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Amerex Corporation, Trussville, AL. 2. Larsen Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN. 3. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner representative. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Fire Extinguishers: Fully charged and ready for use at final acceptance. Size, type indicated in schedule at end of this section. B. Standard Wall Hanger Brackets: Size in accordance with fixture size where indicated by symbol on Drawings or as directed by Owner representative in location scheduled. C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. General: See Drawings and/or Schedule. 2. Fire Rating: a. None: At remainder of locations. 3. Model: Cosmopolitan; stainless steel with satin finish. 4. Trim Style: a. Semi-recessed; projected 4 inches. 5. Door Style: Solid. 6. Options: a. Die cut black letters reading “Fire Extinguisher.” b. Futura “Fire” handle. Fire Protection Specialties 3/08 10520 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that fire protection specialties may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plumb, true, square in neat, rigid, substantial manner. After erection, clean surfaces. Adjust hardware, leave in good operating condition. B. All fire extinguishers will be provided by Contractor in coordination with the requirements of the local Fire Marshal. Cabinets, only if required by Fire Marshal, to be by Contractor. C. Provide Knox box as required by Fire Marshal. 3.03 SCHEDULE Drawing Symbol Size & Type Rating General Location FE-1 10# ABC Dry Chemical (cabinet) 4A:60B:C UL Public Locations (2) FE-2 20# ABC (bracket) 20A:120B: C UL Electrical/ Mechanical (1) FE-3 5# CO2 (bracket) 5B:C UL Kitchen (2) END OF SECTION Exterior Sun Control Devices 2/08 10705 - 1 SECTION 10705 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner Provided: a. Exterior Sunshade Devices. B. Special Coordination Required: 1. Contractor shall review shop drawings, coordinate schedule, and coordinate the Contractor’s Work with the work provided in this package. Special attention to wall penetrations and sealants. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA: Standard 605 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coating on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. B. ASTM: 1. A 307: Fasteners 2. A 653/A, 653M, G90: Galvanized Steel Sheet 3. A 666: Stainless Steel Sheet 4. B 26/B: Aluminum Castings 5. B 209 M: Aluminum Sheet 6. B 221 M: Aluminum Extrusions C. AWS: 1. D1.2: Structural Welding Code - Aluminum D. SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials B. AWS: American Welding Society C. AAMA: American Architectural Manufacturers Association D. AA: The Aluminum Association E. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Condition Contractors National Association Exterior Sun Control Devices 10705 - 2 2/08 F. NAAMM: Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide exterior sun control assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from dead loads, live loads, snow loads, snow drift loads, wind loads, and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of assembly or components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Assemblies shall comply with state and local codes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance and cleaning recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing system fabrication, installation drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and adjoining system. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Structural Calculations: a. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads, including dead loads, live loads, snow loads, snow drift loads, wind loads, and thermal movement. Design calculations shall identify the moment and shear forces transferred to the structure or supports through the installation connections. b. Structural calculations shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in jurisdiction where Project is located. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of exterior sun control devices, with 6 projects of similar size, scope and type of which 3 have been in successful use for 3 years or longer. 2. Welder: Certify satisfactory AWS qualification for welding processes, and three years experience in the installation of exterior sun control devices. 3. Personnel: For actual installation of exterior sun control devices, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, with not less than 5 years experience in product installation. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials made of components, with uniform texture and color or blend, furnished by 1 manufacturer for each different product required 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Protect sun control devices from damage during shipment, storage and construction. 2. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for job-site storage and protection. Exterior Sun Control Devices 2/08 10705 - 3 B. Delivery: Do not receive materials to the site until the building is ready for installation of sun control devices or enclosed storage is available. C. Damaged Material: Products shall be free from nicks, scratches and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged material prior to installation at no additional cost to the owner. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Proceed with installation of sun control devices only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty that all sun control devices components will be free of defective materials or workmanship for a period of two years from date of installation. B. Aluminum frames and fabric attachment and applied graphics shall be warranted against defective material and workmanship for a period of two years by awning manufacturer. C. Fabrics shall be warranted by the fabric manufacturer for five years. D. Labor to replace defective fabric shall be guaranteed for one year. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Unless indicated otherwise design is based on products of Sign Productions, Steve Allsop / Kori Eastwood, (319) 364-6697. This package will be contracted directly by Owner. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Manufacturer of comparable products submitted in compliance and accepted in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. This section includes aluminum framed awning systems and fabric structures utilizing the European Staple-in method of attaching covers. B. Awnings shall be designed and certified by a registered Structural Engineer in the State in which they will be installed. Exterior Sun Control Devices 10705 - 4 2/08 C. Awning framework to be mill finish aluminum welded tube construction. Aluminum framing member profiles shall be sized to withstand all live loads, dead loads, super-imposed loads and transportation loads. Fasteners shall be non-corrosive, and non-staining. This includes all anchors, bolts, shims and accessory items. All framing members are to be joined by welding. Welds that interface with fabric panels are to be ground smooth and de-burred so that no sharp edges come in contact with the fabric. Frames to be dark bronze finish. D. Awning fabric shall be Sunbrella 100% solution dyed woven acrylic, as manufactured by Glen Raven Mills Inc. Minimum fabric weight to be 9.25 ounces. Width: 46” to 60”. Color to be 4618 – Walnut Brown. Fabric is to be applied tight and is to be free of wrinkles, sagging, puckers and punctures. All panels are to be equal in tension and quality. Seams, whenever possible, shall be joined using a triad wedge weld system to provide a seamless appearance; when not wedge welded, the thread shall be rot resistant. All mechanical fasteners, whenever possible, shall not be visible, or covered with a dissimilar material (i.e. plastic welding) than that of the awning fabric. E. Text printed on fabric to be white. F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063. G. Overhang dimension may not exceed 48 inches without suspension brackets. H. Mounting brackets shall be fabricated from 0.375-inch aluminum. I. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series non-magnetic stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. J. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size and material required for loading and installation indicated and to make a weathertight connection. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. K. Accessories: 1. Other Materials: Materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of sun control system, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Assemble in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. B. Assemble entirely by welding, with a minimum of 2 fillet welds each. 2.04 FINISHES A. Shop Finishing: Factory finish sun control devices and accessories with coating. 1. Baked Enamel: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish):Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8, except with minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. B. Finish Protection: Provide finish protection as recommended by manufacturer. Exterior Sun Control Devices 2/08 10705 - 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that sun control devices may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 ERECTION A. Mounting Options: 1. Horizontal Fixed. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s Product Data, including product technical bulletin installation instructions and details. B. Install awnings structurally sound and level. Fasteners are to be appropriate for the mounting substrate; and are to be separated not more than 2-feet o.c. along the top bar and not more than 4-feet o.c. along the bottom-bar C. Cut and trim units during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use materials, procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer. 3.06 FIELD-QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: 1. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge alignment of consecutive members: 1/32 inches. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Adjust units to operate in proper manner and easily without binding. Exterior Sun Control Devices 10705 - 6 2/08 B. Replace damaged materials with new materials complying with specified requirements. 3.08 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. System: 1. Clean exposed surfaces of sun control devices using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 2. Promptly clean surfaces around sun control devices; repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during work. 3. When work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and debris. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize soiling of other work. 3.09 PROTECTION A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer to ensure work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Toilet Accessories 3/08 10810 - 1 SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install: a. Grab bars. b. Paper towel dispenser/waste receptor: 1) Semi-recessed. c. Channel frame mirror: 1) Without shelf. d. Coat hook. e. Infant changing station. 2. The following is not included in this section: a. Plate glass mirrors other than indicated above (Section 08800). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 08800 - Glazing 3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Reference: Refer to Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current Product Data including specifications, handling, storage and installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. General: Provide toilet accessory units made of components of standard construction furnished by one manufacturer as coordinated assemblies. 2. Manufacturer: Five years experience in the manufacture of toilet accessories. 3. Contractor: Three years experience in the installation of toilet accessories. 4. Personnel: For actual installation of toilet accessories, use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation, thoroughly familiar with requirements of work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect toilet accessories from damage during shipment, storage, and construction. Toilet Accessories 10810 - 2 3/08 B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in factory sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. C. Damaged Material: Replace damaged material prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Field Dimensions: Drawings do not purport to show actual dimensions, but are intended only to establish location and scope of work. Field verify dimensions and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Standard of Quality: Unless otherwise indicated, design is based on products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc., Clifton Park, NY. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers and products are: 1. Bradley Corp., Menomonee Falls, WI. 2. Manufacturer of equal products submitted in compliance and approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Requirements: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish, unless otherwise specified below. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Grab Bars: Type 304 stainless steel, 16 gage tubing, 1-1/2 inch diameter with 1-1/2-inch clearance to wall, 12 gauge washer and concealed fasteners to wall, non-slip surface on bars.: 812 Series. B. Towel Dispensers/Waste Receptor: 22 gage with satin finish; 600 C-fold/ 800 multi-fold towels; removable 12 gallon waste receptacle: 1. Semi-recessed (recesses 4 inches, projects 4 inches): Model #B-43944 Contura Series. C. Channel Framed Mirror: One-piece roll-formed stainless steel channel frame with tempered glass, with 15-year warranty against silver spoilage. See Drawings for size. 1. Without Shelf: Model 780. D. Coat Hook: Surface mounted chrome plated brass with bumper: Model 915. E. Robe Hook: Surface mounted with concealed mounting plate and set screw. Projects 2 inches from wall. 1. Single robe hook 9115 - bright polish finish. 2. Double robe hook: bright polish finish. F. Infant Changing Station: KB101, surface mounted. G. Other Materials: Other materials not specifically described but required for complete, proper installation of toilet accessories, subject to acceptance of Owner Representative. Toilet Accessories 3/08 10810 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Work of Other Trades: Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that toilet accessories may be installed in accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and pertinent portions of referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: Immediately notify Owner Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until fully resolved. Commencement of installation signifies acceptance of surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install plumb, true, square in neat, rigid, substantial manner. After erection, clean surfaces, adjust hardware, leave in good operating condition. Use theft-proof screws to install toilet accessories. Fasten to masonry with screws and expansion shields. Anchor grab bars securely. Grab bars shall be capable of supporting minimum dead load of 300 pounds. 3.04 CLEANING A. Site: Do not allow accumulation of scraps, debris arising from work of this section. Maintain premises in neat, orderly condition. B. Toilet Accessories: Remove protection film. Accessories to be free of dust, grim, streaks. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Provide only those mirrors which are scheduled below. Other mirrors are specified in Section 08800. B. Rooms 115, 125 & 126. Each room shall have: 1. 1 water closet grab bar 42 inches straight. 2. 1 water closet grab bar 18 inches straight (Req'd in MN only). 3. 1 water closet grab bar 36 inches straight. 4. 2 coat hooks Hall Mack #782 (Room 115 only). 5. 1 mirror Bradley - 24" w. x 36" h. (Room 115 only). 6. 2 PTD and receptacles Bobrick towel/waste receptacle (Room 115 only has one). 7. 1 Infant Changing Station Model KB101 8. All other accessories by Owner. END OF SECTION RESTAURANT EQUIPMENT CO. 7120 Northland Terrace Minneapolis, MN 55428 PHONE: 763-544-8800 FAX: 763-544-7949 GRANITE CITY FOOD & BREWERY Carmel, IN From: To: Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Wilson Fan 7120 Northland Terrace Minneapolis, MN 55428 Phone: (763) 544-8800 Fax: (763) 544-7949 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. Tim Cary 5402 Parkdale Drive Suite 101 Minneapolis, MN 55416 Phone: (952) 215-0660 Fax: (952) 542-3951 Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Project: Item No. 1 - DRY STORAGE SHELVING (1 REQ'D) Metro Model METRO One (1) lot Metro "Super Adjustable Super Erecta" shelving, 5 tiers, 86" posts. Package to include: 5 ea Model A1836BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 18" W, 36" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system Accessories: 10 ea Model A1842BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 18" W, 42" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 5 ea Model A2436BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 36" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 45 ea Model A2448BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 48" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 10 ea Model A2460BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 60" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 60 ea Model 86P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 86-5/8" H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved at 1" increments and numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish 2 ea Kelmax Equipment Model DR362012 Dunnage Rack, tubular, one tier, 20" wide, 36" long, 12" high, aluminum, economy, 1500 lb. capacity, NSF 1 ea Kelmax Equipment Model DR482412 Dunnage Rack, tubular, one tier, 24" wide, 48" long, 12" high, aluminum, economy, 1500 lb. capacity, NSF Item No. 2 - PORTABLE RACKS - By G.C.F.B. 2/5/2008 SPECIFICATIONS GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 1 of 26 Item No. 2 - PORTABLE RACKS - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 3 - FREEZER SHELVING (1 REQ'D) Metro Model METRO One (1) lot Metro "Super Adjustable Super Erecta" shelving, 5 tiers, 86" posts. Package to include: 5 ea Model A1854BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 18" W, 54" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system Accessories: 19 ea Model A2460BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 60" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 1 ea Model SF56N3C Super Erecta® Three-Sided Channel Frame, 24 x 60, double snake frame, chrome finish 20 ea Model 86P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 86-5/8" H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved at 1" increments and numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish 1 ea Kelmax Equipment Model DR482412 Dunnage Rack, tubular, one tier, 24" wide, 48" long, 12" high, aluminum, economy, 1500 lb. capacity, NSF Item No. 4 - WALK-IN FOOD FREEZER/COOLER & BLAST COOLER (1 REQ'D) Kolpak Model CUSTOM Custom walk-in food cooler/freezer & blast cooler combination, approximately 23'-1" long x 15'-5" wide x 9'-3 3/4" high, with attached 7'-0" x 7'-6" x 9'-3 3/4" high blast cooler, per plan and approved shop drawing. Embossed aluminum interior, galvalume exterior, (4) 34" x 78" walk-in doors, (8) vapor proof light fixtures shipped loose, include assorted closures and wall trims. Cooler door to have viewport & 36" diamond tread plate on interior of door. Item No. 4A - STAINLESS STEEL TRIM (2 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainlesss steel "L" shaped trim around walk-in freezer door opening and building case opening, approximately 46" wide x 83" high x 6" deep, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 4B - DEFLECTOR (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel deflector, 18" wide x 86 1/4" long Item No. 5 - FOOD COOLER REFRIGERATION (1 REQ'D) Custom Refrigeration Model CUSTOM (5A) Bohn SM208AE evaporator (5B) BZT025M6C 208 3ph. R404A Bohn Scroll outdoor condensing unit. Price includes listed equipment, accessories, 5yr. compressor warranty, start/test, 1yr. service warranty. Item No. 6 - FREEZER REFRIGERATION (1 REQ'D) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 2 of 26 Custom Refrigeration Model CUSTOM (6A) Bohn LET140BK evaporator (6B) BZT035L6C 208 3ph. R404A Bohn Scroll outdoor condensing unit. Price includes listed equipment, accessories, 5yr. compressor warranty, start/test, 1yr. service warranty. Item No. 7 - BLAST CHILLER REFRIGERATION (1 REQ'D) Custom Refrigeration Model CUSTOM (7A) (2) stacked LLE102 Bohn evaporator. (7B) BZT030M6C 208 3ph. R404A Bohn Scroll outdoor condensing unit. Price includes listed equipment, accessories, 5yr. compressor warranty, start/test, 1yr. service warranty. 1 ea Model COATING Protective coating for (2) blast chiller evaporator coils. Accessories: Item No. 8 - COOLER SHELVING (1 REQ'D) Metro Model METRO One (1) lot Metro "Super Adjustable Metroseal II" shelving, 5 tiers, 86" posts. Package to include: 5 ea Model A2430NK3 Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 30" L, Metroseal 3 (corrosion-resistant) finish, corner release system, w/Microban® antimicrobial protection Accessories: 15 ea Model A2454NK3 Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 54" L, Metroseal 3 (corrosion-resistant) finish, corner release system, w/Microban® antimicrobial protection 30 ea Model A2460NK3 Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 60" L, Metroseal 3 (corrosion-resistant) finish, corner release system, w/Microban® antimicrobial protection 40 ea Model 86PK3 Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 86-5/8" H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved at 1" increments and numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", Metroseal 3 (corrosion-resistant) finish, w/Microban® antimicrobial protection Item No. 9 - BUN PAN RACK (6 REQ'D) Kelmax Equipment Model APR2018-3 Pan Rack, mobile, standard duty, full height, holds (20) 18"x26" bun or sheet pans, slides on 3" centers, all welded heavy duty aluminum construction, end loading, 5" swivel stem casters, NSF Item No. 10 - SODA SYSTEM (BAG -N-BOX) - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 11 - WORK COUNTER (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel, approximately 2'-6" wide x 8'-0" long x 36" high with undershelf, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 11A - WALL SHELF (1 REQ'D) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 3 of 26 Item No. 11A - WALL SHELF (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel shelf, approximately 14" wide x 8'-0" long per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 12 - HEATED CABINET, MOBILE (1 REQ'D) Wittco Model 1220-20-BC Heated Cabinet, mobile, electric, insulated, interchangeable interior, capacity (24) 12"x20"x2-1/2" pans, stainless steel construction, with bumpers, casters, and side push handles, full doors 1 ea 120 volts, single phase Accessories: 1 ea Model WP-83 Casters, 5", swivel w/brakes (upgrade) Item No. 13 - MIXER, FOOD (1 REQ'D) Hobart Model HL400-1STD Legacy Planetary Mixer, 1.5 hp, 200-240/50/60/3, 40-qt. capacity, three fixed speeds, gear-driven transmission, 20 min. timer, #12 taper attachment hub, manual bowl lift, bowl guard, SS Bowl, "B" beater, "D" whip, "ED" dough hook 1 ea Model VS9-12 9" Vegetable Slicer, #12 back case, hopper front, and adjustable slicer plate Accessories: 1 ea Model VS9HOLD-SHG12 #12 Plate holder 1 ea Model VS9PLT-3/16SH 3/16" shredder plate 1 ea Model VS9PLT-5/16SH 5/16" Shredder plate 1 ea Model VS9PLT-1/2SH 1/2" shredder plate 1 ea 1-Yr. parts, labor & travel time during normal working hrs Item No. 14 - INGREDIENT BIN - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 15 - CAN OPENER, MANUAL (1 REQ'D) Edlund Model MODEL 1 Can Opener, Manual, #1 with plated base (for cans up to 11" tall), "Old Reliable" Item No. 16 - WORK TABLE (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel work table, approximately 8'-0" long x 2'-6" wide x 36" high, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 16A - WALL SHELF (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel shelves, (1) 14" wide x 45" long with standard shelf bracket, (1) 14" wide x 51" long with pot & pan rack and hooks, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 16.1 - COUNTER LEGS (10 REQ'D) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 4 of 26 Item No. 16.1 - COUNTER LEGS (10 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel counter legs, 8" high, with special top plate and adjustable feet, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 17 - SLICER, FOOD (1 REQ'D) Hobart Model 2712-1 Slicer, semi-automatic, angle feed, 12" s/s Stay Sharp™ knife, MICROBAN® antimicrobial protection, Poly-V-belt, perm. ring guard, 2-speed auto. s/s carriage, s/s knife cover, top mtd sharpener, low fence, alum. base w/tilt, 120/60/1, 1/2 hp 1 ea 1-Yr. parts, labor & travel time during normal working hrs Accessories: 1 ea Model FOOD-CHUTE Food chute Item No. 18 - FOOD PROCESSOR, ELECTRIC (1 REQ'D) Robot Coupe Model R301UB Commercial Food Processor, stainless steel bowl attachment with handle only, 3 1/2 qt. capacity, 120V, 60 HZ, 9 amps, 1ph, 1/2 HP motor, 1725 RPM, 17" x 16" x 22 1/4" Item No. 19 - CLEAN DISH TABLE (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel combination clean dish table with 3 compartment sink, approximately 11'-0" long x 2'-6" deep x 34" high, include (3) 20" x 24" x 12" deep sinks with rack slides and lever drains, per plan and approved shop drawing. 3 ea Fisher Model 24090 Twist Waste Standard Valve, 3-1/2" industry standard sink opening, 2" drain outlet, flat strainer, stainless steel Accessories: Item No. 19A - FAUCET (2 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-0231-CC Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS CC male inlets, lever handles Item No. 20 - WALL SHELVES (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel shelves, (1) 14" wide x 9'-6" long, (1) 14" x 48" long, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 21 - DISHMACHINE - By G.C.F.B. (2) TANKLESS WATER HEATERS - By G.C.F.B. For Dishmachine Item No. 21A - (2) TANKLESS WATER HEATERS - By G.C.F.B. For Domestic Use Item No. 21B - 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 5 of 26 Item No. 22 - CONDENSATE SLEEVES (2 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel condensate sleeves, 4" deep x 20 3/4" wide x 60" long, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 23 - DISPOSER (1 REQ'D) InSinkErator Model SS-200-7-MRS Complete Disposer Package, sink mount system, 6 5/8" diameter inlet, with #7 collar adaptor for sink installation, 2 HP motor, s/s constr'n, includes syphon breaker, solenoid valve, flow control valve, removable splash baffle, stainless steel sink stopper, manual reverse switch 1 ea Standard height disposer body Accessories: 1 ea -29, 208v, 3 ph 1 ea Model 11757C Leg support kit for disposer Item No. 24 - PRE-RINSE UNIT (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-2187 Wall Mount Pre-Rinse Unit, 8" centers, add-on faucet with 14" swing nozzle, 44" flexible s/s hose with spray valve, wall bracket & lever handles Item No. 25 - RACK, CAN STORAGE (1 REQ'D) Kelmax Equipment Model CSR-162 Can Storage Rack, stationary design, self feeding gravity fed shelves, holds both #10 & #5 cans, all welded extruded aluminum construction, 162 can capacity, NSF Item No. 26 - SOILED DISH TABLE (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel "U" shaped soiled dish table, approximately 7'-6" long x 3'-6" wide x 34" high dish drop area, 2 sided upper glass rack shelf, 5'-6" long x 5'-6" wide x 2'-6" deep, sink area with quick-drain, sink to be 20" x 24" x 8" deep with scrap basket & rack slides, special enclosed area for silverware dishpan, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 26A - HAND SINK (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel hand sink, 10" wide x 12" long x 9" deep, part of soiled dish table (item 26) with 4" o.c. deck mount faucet, w/ left and back side splashes, back splash to accommodate soap and towel dispenser (by others), per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 26B - FAUCET (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-0325 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 6 of 26 T & S Brass Model B-0325 Deck Mixing Faucet, w/swivel gooseneck, 11 3/4" H - deck to top of gooseneck, 7 1/2" tip of nozzle to deck, lever handles, 4" centers with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets Item No. 27 - DISHROOM WALL PANELING (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Stainless steel wall paneling to clad above backsplash around clean and soiled dish tables, approximately 28" high x 25'-6" long, per plan and approved shop drawing 1 ea Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel wall paneling, approximately 24" x 48" with kink at bottom for QT coved base, per plan and approved shop drawing Accessories: Item No. 28 - CORNER GUARD (9 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom 16 ga. stainless steel corner guards, approximately 2" x 2" x 54" high Item No. 29 - SINK, HAND (3 REQ'D) Premier Restaurant Equipment Model WH-14 Hand Sink, wall model, 14" wide, 9-1/4" x 11-1/2" x 6" deep bowl, stainless steel, includes deck mounted gooseneck faucet, 18 ga. s/s wall bracket & 1-1/2" IPS drain fitting NOTE: Nail brush kit, soap & towel diaspenser are BY OTHERS 3 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom splash shields, 9" high x 15' long, pre-drilled for field installation Accessories: 3 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom sink preimeter splash, 15' x 14 1/4" x 3 1/4" high 3 ea T & S Brass Model B-0325 Deck Mixing Faucet, w/swivel gooseneck, 11 3/4" H - deck to top of gooseneck, 7 1/2" tip of nozzle to deck, lever handles, 4" centers with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets Item No. 30 - EXHAUST HOOD (1 REQ'D) Halton Company Model KVE 4'-6" wide x 12'-6" long x 2'-6" high exhaust hood, overall dimension includes 12" deep x 4'-6" long cabinet on left end of hood for wet chemical fire protection. Includes stainless steel baffle type filters, incandescent lights, per plan and approved shop drawing. Note: Duct work and fan motor, By General Contractor Item No. 31 - HOOD CONTROL PANEL (1 REQ'D) Halton Company Model MEP-4 MEP-4 standard motor control panel with 4 starters, disconnect switch, terminal blocks, NEMA 3R enclosure, w/fan/light/pilot switches mounted in panel door. **Fan electrical requirements need to be verified.** Note: Gas shut off valve to be provided by Fire Protection Supplier. 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 7 of 26 NEMA 3R enclosure, w/fan/light/pilot switches mounted in panel door. **Fan electrical requirements need to be verified.** Note: Gas shut off valve to be provided by Fire Protection Supplier. Item No. 31A - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR COOKING LINE HOOD (1 REQ'D) Halton Co. Model R-102 Ansul R-102 wet chemical system for all equipment under items #30 and #49, to include all piping performed at factory, mechanical valve, and field installation. NOTE ** Does not include test and permits which will be based on installation site and submitted with contract ** Item No. 32 - INSULATED WALL PANEL (1 REQ'D) McKinley Metal Mfg. Inc. Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel insulated wall panel, per plan and approved shop drawing. (1) 11'-0" x 6'-2" x 1" thick (1) 26'-9" x 6'-2" x 1" thick Item No. 33 - DISH RACK DOLLY - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 34 - DISH STORAGE SHELVING (1 REQ'D) Metro Model Q SERIES Q Series metro shelving, 5 tier, 86" posts, to include the following: 10 ea Model Q2460G2 MetroMax Q™ Shelf, 24" W, 60" L, polymer mats have Microban® antimicrobial protection built in, epoxy coat steel frame, wedge connectors, shelves are non-ESD safe Accessories: 5 ea Model Q2448G2 MetroMax Q™ Shelf, 24" W, 48" L, polymer mats have Microban® antimicrobial protection built in, epoxy coat steel frame, wedge connectors, shelves are non-ESD safe 12 ea Model Q86PE Metromax Q® Post, 86" H, for use without stem casters, epoxy coated Item No. 35 - PREP TABLE W/SINKS (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel prep table, approximately 2'-6" wide x 9'-6" long x 36" high, with partial undershelf, per plan and approved shop drawing. 2 ea Fisher Model 24090 Twist Waste Standard Valve, 3-1/2" industry standard sink opening, 2" drain outlet, flat strainer, stainless steel Accessories: Item No. 35A - FAUCET (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-0231-CC Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS CC male inlets, lever handles Item No. 36 - WALL SHELF - DOUBLE TIER (1 REQ'D) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 8 of 26 Item No. 36 - WALL SHELF - DOUBLE TIER (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel shelf, double tier, (1) at 14" wide x 9'-6" long with standard support brackets, (1) at 14" wide x 6'-8" long with turned up support brackets, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 37 - RANGE, SIGNATURE 36" HEAVY-DUTY, GAS (3 REQ'D) Wolf Range Model KFS-6J-27 Range, Signature 36" Heavy-Duty, Gas, (6) 30,000 BTU open burners w/(3)cast iron top grates, convection oven w/(3) racks, s/s front, top front ledge, sides and 6" stub back, 6" s/s legs, 1 1/4" front gas manifold, 210,000 BTU 3 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 3 ea 3/4" rear gas connection w/PRV (for single unit) 3 ea 120v/60/1-ph, 4 amps, std. 3 ea 5" Casters (set of 4) (all freestanding equipment) 9 ea Step-Up rear burners (4" high) 3 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KIT48 Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long, with coiled restraining device, full port gas valve and 90° street elbow, limited lifetime warranty Item No. 38 - WALL SHELVES (1 REQ'D) Metro Model SHELVING Wall mounted shelving to consist of the following: 1 ea Model 1430NS Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 14" W, 30" L, stainless steel finish, plastic split sleeves are included in each carton Accessories: 2 ea Model 1436NS Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 14" W, 36" L, stainless steel finish, plastic split sleeves are included in each carton 4 ea Model 1WD14S Super Erecta® Direct Wall Mount, single, for 14" W shelf, one shelf support & mounting plate, two shelf collar caps, single support at shelf ends, (2 required per shelf), stainless 1 ea Model 2WD14S Super Erecta® Direct Wall Mount, double, for 14" W shelf, one shelf support & mounting plate, two shelf collar caps, double support for adjoining shelves, stainless Item No. 39 - WORK TABLE (2 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel table, stationary on legs, approximately 2'-6" wide x 5'-0" long x 36" high, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 40 - Spare No. Item No. 41 - FRYER, GAS (1 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model LG300 Fryer, Gas, 90,000 BTU, 40 lb. fat capacity, millivolt mechanical controls, s/s fry tank, s/s top, twin baskets, 1/2" gas w/regulator and shut-off valve, tank size 14"x14" 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 9 of 26 s/s top, twin baskets, 1/2" gas w/regulator and shut-off valve, tank size 14"x14" 1 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 1 ea 1 year parts and labor 1 ea Casters, adj. height all s/s construction, single unit or two unit battery 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom fryer shield, 27" x 27" 1 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KIT48 Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long, with coiled restraining device, full port gas valve and 90° street elbow, limited lifetime warranty Item No. 42 - STEAMER, CONVECTION COUNTERTOP (1 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model C24EA3 Convection Steamer, Countertop, Electric, (1) comp't, 24" wide, (3) 12" x 20" x 2-1/2" pans/comp't, steam generator. manual drain w/timed smart drain & powerflush drain, basic ctrls w/60 min timer, s/s int'r comp't, s/s ext'r, split water line, leveling feet, 8.5 kW 1 ea Basic control package, manual control 60-min timer, manual drain w/timed Smart Drain & PowerFlush system, standard Accessories: 1 ea 208/60/3 phase, field convertable to 240v and/or 1 ph 1 ea Model SPS600V SYSTEM ScaleBlocker™ Water Filter, field installed by others at jobsite 1 ea 2 year limited water related parts only & labor warranty, std. Item No. 43 - COOK/HOLD CABINET (1 REQ'D) Alto-Shaam Inc. Model 500-TH-II Slo Cook & Hold Oven, electric, single deck, standard depth, separate thermostatic controls with timer, legs not included, stainless steel construction, 40 lb. capacity 1 ea 120v/60/1, 1950w, 16.0amps, NEMA 5-20P Accessories: Item No. 44 - STEAMER STAND (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel stand, approximately 24" x 36" x 36" high, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 45 - Spare No. Item No. 46 - FAUCET, POT FILLER (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-0610 Pot Filler Faucet, splash-mounted, 8" centers, vacuum breaker, flexible stainless steel hose, 60"-long, hooked nozzle w/self-closing valve, 1/2" IPS female inlets, built-in check valves Item No. 47 - RANGE, SIGNATURE 36" HEAVY-DUTY, GAS (1 REQ'D) Wolf Range Model FS-6J-0-36-M Range, Signature 36" Heavy-Duty, Gas, (6) 30,000 BTU open burners w/(3)cast iron top grates, s/s front, top front ledge, sides & 6" stub back, modular w/leg stand, 1 1/4" front gas manifold, 180,000 BTU 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 10 of 26 Range, Signature 36" Heavy-Duty, Gas, (6) 30,000 BTU open burners w/(3)cast iron top grates, s/s front, top front ledge, sides & 6" stub back, modular w/leg stand, 1 1/4" front gas manifold, 180,000 BTU 1 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 1 ea 3/4" rear gas connection w/PRV (for single unit) 3 ea Step-Up rear burners (4" high) 1 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KIT48 Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long, with coiled restraining device, full port gas valve and 90° street elbow, limited lifetime warranty Item No. 47A - STEP-UP RANGE STAND (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel 36" stand with undershelf and casters, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 48 - CHEESEMELTER, COUNTERTOP (1 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model ICM48 Cheesemelter, Gas Infrared, 40,000 ceramic infrared burners, 48" wide, stainless steel front, sides, and top, 1/2" gas w/regulator 1 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 1 ea Lake State Industries (Lot) Mounting brackets for cheesemelter, (2) 26" x 26" x 1 1/2" square tubing, (4) 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" flat plates 1 ea Lake State Industries 1/4" diameter round rods x 120" long, non-threaded, for hanging of cheesemelter 4 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom cheesemelter trim pans, 1" x 3 7/8" x 21 1/4" 4 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom flat plates, 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" square, for end caps Item No. 49 - EXHAUST HOOD (3 REQ'D) Halton Company Model KVE 4'-6" deep x 26'-9" long x 2'-6" deep exhaust hood, in three sections of 107", includes stainless steel baffle type filters & incandescent light fixtures, per plan and approved shop drawing. Note: Duct work and fan motor, By General Contractor 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Stainless steel hood closure panel, approximately 1'-1" wide x 35'-9" long, panels to be fabricated in sectional "pan" style for rigidity, per plan and approved shop drawing Accessories: Item No. 50 - REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND (1 REQ'D) Randell Model CUSTOM Remote refrigerated equipment stand, 2 section, 65" long x 32 1/2" deep x 27" high, 4 drawers, (2) 12" x 20" x 4" pan capacity per drawer, marine top, 6" adjustable legs 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 11 of 26 1 ea Model CUSTOM Remote refrigerated equipment stand, 2 section, 60" long x 32 1/2" deep x 27" high, 4 drawers, (2) 12" x 20" x 4" pan capacity per drawer, marine top, 6" adjustable legs Accessories: 2 ea Model 2ENDFIN Stainless steel end Item No. 51 - CHEF'S COUNTER (1 REQ'D) Randell Model CUSTOM Custom Chef's counter to include the following items: No. 51B - 4 well hot food unit, No. 51C - 54" remote refrigerated raised rail, No. 51D - 102" remote refrigerated raised rail, No. 51E - hand sink w/side splashes, No. 51G - 102" remote refrigerated raised rail, No. 51H - Single tier overshelf and wait counter, No. 51L - Remote refrigerated cold pan, No. 51M - (2) 10 1/2" dia. drop-in soup wells, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 51A - POS UTILITY CHASES Item No. 51B - 4 WELL HOT FOOD WELL - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51C - REMOTE REFRIGERATED RAISED RAIL - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51D - REMOTE REFRIGERATED RAISED RAIL - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51E - HAND SINK W/Side Splashes - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51F - CHEFS COUNTER REFRIGERATION (1 REQ'D) Custom Refrigeration Model CUSTOM Multiplex System with hot gas by pass piped to items: No. 63(2), 51G, 51D, 51C & 51L BZT025M6C 208/3ph R404A Bohn Scroll outdoor condensing unit. Price includes listed equipment, accessories, 5yr. compressor warranty, start/test, 1yr. service warranty. Item No. 51G - REMOTE REFRIGERATED RAISED RAIL - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51H - SINGLE TIER OVERSHELF - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51J - HEAT LAMP, BULB TYPE (9 REQ'D) Merco/Savory Model 600-S POLISHED Contempo® Warmer Lamp, infra-red spot lamp, stem mount, individual lamp assembly, with one lamp, polished Nickel finish (specify), 120v 9 ea Required Mounting Adaptor: Trac-Heat Bar, (wire-in style) add suffix " -T" to model number, WHITE Accessories: 9 ea Polished Nickel Stem, specify length up to 71" from ceiling to bottom of shade 2 ea 12-ft. Trac-Heat Bar, white, (wire-in style)-120V only, dead end, live end, outlet box cover (maximum of (9) 250W lamps per bar, 20-amp rating) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 12 of 26 18 ea Additional stem length for any part of a foot excedding the initial 30" up to 78" max from ceiling to bottom of shade, add per ft or any fraction of foot. BASED ON OVERALL LENGTH OF 47" 9 ea 120 volts, 1 phase, std. 9 ea Coated white bulb, 120V ea. Item No. 51K - Spare Number Item No. 51L - REFRIGERATED COLD PAN - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51M - SOUP WELLS (2) - Price included with item No. 51 Item No. 51N - WARMING DRAWER UNIT, BUILT-IN (1 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model VW2SB Warming Drawer, Built-In, two drawer, self-closing, one 12"x20"x6" s/s pan per drawer, individual thermostat controls, moist/crisp door vents, s/s front, aluminized steel sides & top, flex conduit for direct connection 1 ea 120v/1-ph, cord & plug, std. Accessories: 1 ea 1 year limited parts & labor warranty, std. Item No. 52 - SERVING COUNTER, HOT FOOD, ELECTRIC (1 REQ'D) Randell Model 31348 Serving Counter, Hot Food, Electric, with (3) 12" x 20" hot food wells, 50" long x 33" wide x 36" high, stationary modular design, open cabinet base, stainless top with cutting board, stainless steel open base with undershelf. Note: Unit modified length to be 50" w/3 pans to left, fill faucet to right. 1 ea Model 1BOR75P 50" x 10" x 3/4" thick ploy cutting board. Accessories: 3 ea Model 6DRNMAN Individual drains manifold to a common gate valve. 1 ea Model 6FCTSGL Fill faucet 1 ea Model 2ENDFIN (2) Stainless steel ends Item No. 53 - WALL SHELVES (1 REQ'D) Metro Model SHELVING Wall mounted shelving to consist of the following: 3 ea Model 1436NS Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 14" W, 36" L, stainless steel finish, plastic split sleeves are included in each carton Accessories: 2 ea Model 1WD14S Super Erecta® Direct Wall Mount, single, for 14" W shelf, one shelf support & mounting plate, two shelf collar caps, single support at shelf ends, (2 required per shelf), stainless 2 ea Model 2WD14S Super Erecta® Direct Wall Mount, double, for 14" W shelf, one shelf support & mounting plate, two shelf collar caps, double support for adjoining shelves, stainless Item No. 54 - BROILER, GAS, CHAR-TYPE COUNTER (1 REQ'D) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 13 of 26 Vulcan Hart Model VCCB60 Charbroiler, Gas, Low Profile Countertop, 60"W, (11) cast iron reversible grates w/slope one side, cast iron radiants, individual burner controls, s/s front & sides, 3/4" rear gas connection w/pressure regulator, 159,500 BTU 1 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom Richlite cutting board with mounting brackets 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom boiler shield, 8' high x 60" long 1 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KIT48 Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long, with coiled restraining device, full port gas valve and 90° street elbow, limited lifetime warranty Item No. 55 - GRIDDLE, COUNTER UNIT, GAS (1 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model 960RE Griddle, Countertop, Gas, 150,000 BTU, low profile, 60" griddle plate, s/s frt, sides & 4" frt top ledge, 11"H on 4" legs, 1" thk polished steel plate welded to s/s back & tapered side splashers, elec. ignition, s/s frt grease trough, 3/4" gas w/regulator 1 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 1 ea 120v/60/1-ph, w/cord & plug for controls 1 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KIT48 Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long, with coiled restraining device, full port gas valve and 90° street elbow, limited lifetime warranty 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom Richlite cutting board with mounting brackets, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 56 - CHEESEMELTER, COUNTERTOP (1 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model ICM60 Cheesemelter, Gas Infrared, 60,000 BTU ceramic infrared burners, 60" wide, stainless steel front, sides, and top, 1/2" gas w/regulator 1 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM (Lot) Mounting brackets for cheesemelter, (2) 26" x 26" x 1 1/2" square tubing, (4) 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" flat plates 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM 1/4" diameter round rods x 120" long, non-threaded, for hanging of cheesemelter 4 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom flat plates, 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" square, for end caps Item No. 57 - FRYER, GAS (4 REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model LG300 Fryer, Gas, 90,000 BTU, 40 lb. fat capacity, millivolt mechanical controls, s/s fry tank, s/s top, twin baskets, 1/2" gas w/regulator and shut-off valve, tank size 14"x14" 4 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. Accessories: 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 14 of 26 4 ea Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft. 3 ea Model BANKING STRIPV Banking strip for fryer 4 ea Model WARVUL2B10M02 1 year parts and labor 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel fryer stand, 22 7/8" x 62 3/8" x 8" high, per plan and approved shop drawing 1 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom Richlite cutting board with mounting brackets 4 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KIT48 Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long, with coiled restraining device, full port gas valve and 90° street elbow, limited lifetime warranty Item No. 58 - FRYER SPREADER (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel fryer spreader, approximately 11' wide x 24" deep with back & side splash, unit clips to fryer and is removable, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 59 - FREEZER REACH-IN (1 REQ'D) Traulsen Model G12011 Freezer, Reach-in, One-Section, Self-Contained Refrig. w/Microprocessor control, s/s front & full height door (hinged left), anodized aluminum sides & interior, (3) epoxy coated shelves (factory installed), 6" high casters, Energy Star rated, UL & NSF listed, 115v, Energy Star rated 1 ea 1 yr service/labor & 5 yr compressor warranty (std.) Accessories: 1 ea NOTE: Door hinging must be determined & proper model selected before order is placed 1 st Model G1ACC-SHLF1 Set of 3 epoxy coated shelves w/pins for all single section G-series models Item No. 60 - Spare No. Item No. 61 - OVEN, MICROWAVE (3 REQ'D) Amana Commercial Products Model RFS12MPSA Commercial Microwave Oven, 1200 watts, s/s int. & ext., 10 menu pads with capacity to program 100 menus, programmable timer, 5 power levels, braille touch pads, removable air filter, side hinged door, full 3-yr warranty, 20 amp, 120V, 60Hz, NEMA 5-20 2 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel splash behind microwave, approximately 18" x 24", mount to overshelf of chefs counter. Accessories: P.O.S. PRINTER - By G.C.F.B. 62A- Printers for chef counter, qty (3) 62B- Printer for beverage counter, qty (1) Item No. 62 - (2) REMOTE REFRIGERATED U/C REFRIGERATORS - Price included with Item No. 68 Item No. 63 - 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 15 of 26 Item No. 64 - DIPPERWELL - Price included with Item No. 68 Item No. 65 - Spare Number Item No. 66 - SELF CONTAINED ICE CREAM CABINET - Price included with Item No. 68 Item No. 67 - Spare No. Item No. 68 - BEVERAGE COUNTER (1 REQ'D) Randell Model CUSTOM Custom equipment to include the following: No. 63 - (2) 2dr. undercounter refrigerators, No. 64 - dipperwell, No. 66 - ice cream cabinet, , cutout for soda dispenser (By G.C.F.B.), (5) opening in base cabinets for glass rack storage and sink with faucet, approximately 2'-6" deep x 30'-0" long, per plan and approved shop drawing. Item No. 68A - FAUCET - Price included with Item No. 68 P.O.S. SYSTEM - By G.C.F.B. 69A- Beverage Counter Unit 69B- Back Bar Units 69C- Wait Station Bar Units 69D- Dining Wait Station Unit 69E- Patio Wait Station Unit Item No. 69 - Item No. 70 - Spare No. Item No. 71 - ICE TEA DISPENSER - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 72 - DROP-IN SODA / ICE DISPENSER - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 73 - COFFEE GRINDER - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 74 - COFFEE BREWER - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 75 - GLASSWARE RACK - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 76 - WASTE RECEPTACLE - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 77 - DOUBLE ACTING DOORS (1 REQ'D) Eliason Corporation Model SCP-7 Impact traffic doors, constructed of 3/4" x 7 ply plywood core with .032 anodized aluminum cladding both sides full height. Includes 9" x 14" acrylic vision panel, 48" high stainless steel impact plates, aluminum hinge covers 1 ea (1) single 36" x 84" door Accessories: 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 16 of 26 1 ea (1) pair 60" x 84" doors Item No. 78 - BATHROOM VANITY COUNTER (2 REQ'D) Northwest Marble & Granite Co. Model CUSTOM Custom granite counter top with intergal sinks, approximately 2'-1" deep x 6'-0" long x 33 1/2" high, 1 1/4" Arandis granite, to include a 4" apron and no splash, per plan and approved shop drawing. NOTE: Soap dispensers, By G.C.F.B. NOTE: Battery powered faucets, By General Contractor 4 ea Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Add for intergal sinks Accessories: 2 ea LL&H Woodworks Model CUSTOM Lot of custom brackets to mount granite vanities. Item No. 79 - Spare No. Item No. 80 - Spare No. Item No. 81 - BAR MILLWORK (1 REQ'D) LL&H Woodworks Model CUSTOM Custom millwork Bar, approximately 66 lineal feet long x 26" wide x 43" high. Top is stainless steel with jitterbug finish, preforated stainless steel glassrail. Dieboard to be 2x6 wall with wood facing to set on tiled curb by GC., Interior of wall to be covered with black plastic laminate. Exterior to have solid oak trim and oak veneer removable panels. Include back bar cabinets, liquor steps & wait stations. Per plan and approved shop drawing 2 ea Model CUSTOM Custom millwork liquor storage cabinet, approximately 2'-0" deep x 3'-0" x 36" high with 6" stainless steel legs, includes adjustable shelves with solid support brackets. (Without Doors) Accessories: 1 ea Lake State Industries Model BAR STAINLESS Custom stainless bar tops to include main bar, front and back, (2) POS tops, (2) glass rack cabinets, (2) trash cabinets and patio wait station Item No. 82 - BACKBAR STORAGE CABINET, REFRIGERATED (1 REQ'D) Glastender Model BB60-L6-SNH Backbar Storage Cabinet, refrigerated, 2-section, 60" wide, 36" high, condensing unit on right, wire shelves 1 ea Refrigeration compartment on right side Accessories: 1 st Model C-4X4 Caster (set of four), 4", for models 60" long or less 1 ea Stainless door 1 ea No finished top 1 ea Left door hinged right 1 ea Right door hinged right 2 ea Model DLOCK Door Lock 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 17 of 26 Item No. 83 - BACKBAR STORAGE CABINET, REFRIGERATED (1 REQ'D) Glastender Model BB60-L6-SNH Backbar Storage Cabinet, refrigerated, 2-section, 60" wide, 36" high, condensing unit on left, black exterior finish, wire shelves 1 ea Refrigeration compartment on left side Accessories: 1 st Model C-4X4 Caster (set of four), 4", for models 60" long or less 1 ea Stainless door 1 ea No finished top 1 ea Left door hinged left 1 ea Right door hinged left 2 ea Model DLOCK Door Lock Item No. 84 - BEER TOWER (2 REQ'D) Carbonic Machines Inc. Model BEER Beer tower, 8 taps, chrome finish, double columns. Price included with item No. 108 Item No. 85 - UNDERBAR EQUIPMENT (1 REQ'D) Glastender Model CUSTOM To include the following: 2 ea Model IB-48X24-CP10 Ice Bin, pass-thru, standard depth chest, 24" x 48" front-to-back, 175-lbs. ice capacity, stainless steel constr'n, 10 circuit cold plate Accessories: 4 ea Model BR3 Three-Bottle Rack, for 19" d x 12' w ice bin 2 ea Model IBA-12 Ice Bin, 12" wide x 19" front to back, splash, 33-lbs. ice capacity, stainless steel constr'n, with two tubing access holes in splash 2 ea Model DSR-36 Speed Rail, double, stainless steel, 36" 2 ea Model BSA-14 Blender Station, with dump sink, 14" w x 24" deep, w/splash, 4" deck mount faucet with goose neck spout, stainless steel constr'n, lift-out plastic perforated sink strainer 2 ea Model LS15 Splash, left end, 15" deep, BSA model 2 ea Model RS15 Splash, right end, 15" deep, BSA model 1 ea Model FSB-48-S Underbar Work Board Sink Unit, four s/s sink compartments, 48"L, no drainboards, 24" front-to-back, w/backsplash, s/s constr'n, 9-1/2" x 14-1/2" x 9-7/8" deep sink bowls 1 ea Model LWS Large Wet Waste Strainer 1 ea Model HSA-12 Hand Sink Unit, free standing design, 12" long x 19" deep, with deck-mounted faucet, stainless steel constr'n including legs 1 ea Model RSA-D Splash, 19" deep, right end 2 ea Model IFC-19/24L Underbar Filler Strip, dimensional, inside corner, 90° angle, drainboard top, full corner, 19" deep, w/backsplash, 24" left & 19" right, stainless steel constr'n 2 ea Model IFC-19/24R Underbar Filler Strip, dimensional, inside corner, 90° angle, drainboard top, full corner, 19" deep, w/backsplash, 19" left & 24" right, stainless steel constr'n 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 18 of 26 4 ea Model CB-LEG Deep Corner, 24" finished side & leg set 2 ea Model DBA-24 Drainboard, free standing design, 24" long, 19" deep front-to-back, stainless steel constr'n 1 ea Model SSR-24 Speed Rail, 24", single tier, stainless steel 1 ea Model SSR-36 Speed Rail, 36", single tier, stainless steel 2 ea Model IDU-12X36 Ice Display, rectangle, non-illuminated, 36" x 12" x 6" deep, stainless steel, bottled beverage display replace the entire top or a portion of the top of backbar units, drains thru base cabinet 2 ea Vita-Mix Model 748 Drink Machine, 2 speed, commercial blender, 64 oz. (2 liter) polycarbonate container w/ice blades, grey base, 120V, UL, cUL listed, NSF certified Item No. 86 - CHAIR PACKAGE (1 REQ'D) Waymar Industries Model CUSTOM To include the following: 88 ea Model C-30-US Liberty Collection 18" high wood SIDE CHAIR with upholstered seat, custom stain to be approved, vinyl as Custom BGD Granite City WF523. Accessories: 12 ea Model C-30-US Liberty Collection 18" high wood SIDE CHAIR with upholstered seat, custom stain to be approved, vinyl as Custom BGD Granite City WF523. (Additional seating per Tim Cary's request.) 100 ea Model CUSTOM Add for sound deadening material factory installed under C-30-US chairs 15 ea Model B-125SPEC Pub Collection, 30" high backless BAR STOOL, thicken vinyl seat, with steel tacks, silver metal footring, vinyl as Custom BGD Granite WF523. 4 ea Model B-30-WS Additional B-30-WS Barstools for waiting area Item No. 87 - BAR & DINING AREA TABLE & BASES (1 REQ'D) Waymar Industries Model CUSTOM Solid oak butcher block tops, 1 1/2" thick, eased edge & corners, custom stain finish. To include the following: 6 ea 36" x 36" Freestanding Accessories: 4 ea 30" x 48" Freestanding 4 ea 30" x 66" Freestanding 6 ea 36" x 36" flip up to 51" round 12 ea 30" x 47" Booth Tops 2 ea 30" x 53" Booth Tops 6 ea 30" x 71" Booth Tops 5 ea 33" x 51" "U" shaped Gangster Booth Tops 1 ea 51" x 51" 3/4 shaped Gangster Booth Top 56 ea 1917-30 - 17" diameter base, 3" column, 30" OAH, black wrinkle finish, (2) required for 30" x 47" ,30" x 48", 30" x 66", 30" x 51" and 30" x 71" tops. 6 ea 1922-30 - 22" diameter base, 3" column, 30" OAH, black wrinkle finish, for 36" x 36" tops. 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 19 of 26 for 36" x 36" tops. 12 ea 1930-30 - 30" diameter base, 4" column, 30" OAH, black wrinkle finish, for 51" x 51", 34" x 51" ,and 36" x 36" to 51" flip tops. Item No. 88 - GLASS SHELVING UNIT (1 REQ'D) Architectural Specialties Model CUSTOM (4) Custom wrought iron glass shelving units, approximately 4'-4" high x 3'-4" wide with (3) 6" wide tempered glass shelves on fixed supports, (unit does not have glass inserts), per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 89 - DECORATIVE WROUGHT IRON TRIMS (1 REQ'D) Architectural Specialties Model CUSTOM One (lot) decorative wrought iron trims to be installed over glass frames in Bar Smoke Enclosure area, install on both sides of frame. NOTE: This scope of work to be installed BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR Item No. 90 - RAMP AND STAIRS RAILING (1 REQ'D) Architectural Specialties Model CUSTOM Custom wrought iron ramp railing, (1) pair approximately 24" high x 22'-0" long, (2) pairs of stairs railing, approximately 48" long, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 91 - DOOR PULLS (1 REQ'D) Architectural Specialties Model CUSTOM Pairs custom metal door pulls, based on new design, clearcoat sealer, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 92 - MENU HOLDER (1 REQ'D) LL&H Woodworks Model CUSTOM Custom millwork menu holder, (2) single pocket, (2) double pocket, (1) triple pocket, (1) mini to-go with cutout, (3) mini take out w/no cutout, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 93 - FRONT ENTRY BENCH (1 REQ'D) BGD Imports, INC. Model CUSTOM (2) Wall benchs clad in Symphony Chocolate vinyl with satin nickel tacks, solid wood base & legs stained to match bar millwork, per plan and approved shop drawing (1) 80" long x 18" wide x 18" high (1) 100" long x 18" wide x 18" high (Note: Length of benches to be verified.) Item No. 94 - HOST STAND (1 REQ'D) LL&H Woodworks Model CUSTOM Custom millwork host stand, approximately 6'-6" long x 36" wide x 36" high, counter top to be oak veneer with 1'-0" x 6'-6" area raised 6" higher with granite top, cabinet base to be oak veneer and solid oak trims, closed toekick, per plan and approved shop drawing 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 20 of 26 Custom millwork host stand, approximately 6'-6" long x 36" wide x 36" high, counter top to be oak veneer with 1'-0" x 6'-6" area raised 6" higher with granite top, cabinet base to be oak veneer and solid oak trims, closed toekick, per plan and approved shop drawing 1 ea Northwest Marble & Granite Co. Model CUSTOM 1 1/4" Giallo Ornamental granite with polished face, built up edge to 2 1/4" thick rocked faced and sandblasted. Note: Granite supplier to coordinate with Millwork fabricator its fabrication & delivery specifics. Accessories: Item No. 95 - BOOTH SEATING PACKAGE (1 REQ'D) BGD Imports, INC. Model CUSTOM To include the following: Bar & Dining area Booths to be 46" high, 8" vertical channel with 8" headroll,wood side and top caps were applicable, black hard rubber bottom base, vinyl as Custom BGD Granite City WF523. (6) 48" wide x 46" high singles, no finished outside back (9) 48" wide x 46" high doubles (2) 54" wide x 46" high singles (1) 54" wide x 46" high doubles (2) 72" wide x 46" high singles, no finished outside back (5) 72" wide x 46" high doubles (5) 54" wide x 95" long x 46" high "U" shaped (1) 95" wide x 95" long x 46" high 3/4 corner booth (1) Wall Bench to be 9'-0" long x 50" high, F2E, vinyl as Symphony Lumina Copper vinyl, with removable toekick on 6" stainless steel legs Item No. 96 - DINING ROOM DIVIDER (2 REQ'D) LL&H Woodworks Model CUSTOM Custom millwork room divider, approximately 9'-11 1/2" long x 2'-3" wide x 4'-4" & 3'-0 1/2" high, counter top to be granite, cabinet base to be oak veneer and solid oak trims, closed toekick, per plan and approved shop drawing 2 ea Northwest Marble & Granite Co. Model CUSTOM 1 1/4" Giallo Ornamental granite with polished face, built up edge to 2 1/4" thick rocked faced and sandblasted Accessories: Item No. 97 - POS STATION (1 REQ'D) LL & H Woodworks Model POS STATION Custom millwork upper dining wait station, approximately 15" x 51" x 30" high, plastic laminate counter top, cabinet base to be oak veneer and solid oak trims, 6" stainless steel legs, to be notched into stone column, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 98 - PATIO STATION (1 REQ'D) LL & H Woodworks Model PATIO STATION 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 21 of 26 Custom millwork patio beverage counter, approximately 2'-6" x 9'-0" x 30" high, stainless steel counter top with jitterbug finish, cabinet base to be oak veneer and solid oak trims, 6" stainless steel legs, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 99 - BREW ROOM COUNTER (1 REQ'D) LL&H Woodworks Model MILLWORK Custom plastic laminate cabinets, (1) 24" deep x 3'-0" long work counter with storage cabinet, adjustable shelves and cutout for (1) sink, per plan and approved shop drawing. 1 ea Advance Tabco Model DI-1-10-1X Drop-In Sink, one compartment, 10" wide x 14" front-to-back x 10" deep bowl, 20 gauge stainless steel, with deck mounted gooseneck faucet, basket drain Accessories: 1 ea Advance Tabco Model K-52OMIT To Delete Faucet Item No. 99A - Faucet (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-0325 Deck Mixing Faucet, w/swivel gooseneck, 11 3/4" H - deck to top of gooseneck, 7 1/2" tip of nozzle to deck, lever handles, 4" centers with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets Item No. 100 - REFRIGERATED BEER ROOM (1 REQ'D) Kolpak Model CUSTOM Custom walk-in brew room, floorless construction, approximately 20'-2 1/2" x 11'-7" x 10'-6 1/4" high, embossed aluminum interior, galvalume unexposed exterior with one wall stainless steel. (1) 34" x 84" door with 14" x 14" viewport and 36" high alum. diamond tread plate in/out, (12) vapor proof light fixtures shipped loose, include assorted closure panels & wall trims. Item No. 101 - BEER ROOM REFRIGERATION (1 REQ'D) Custom Refrigeration Model CUSTOM (101A) Bohn SM179AE evaporator, (101B) BZT020M6C 208 3 ph. R404A Bohn Scroll outdoor condensing unit. Price includes listed equipment, accessories, 5yr. compressor warranty, start/test, 1yr. service warranty. Item No. 102 - BEER VESSEL - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 103 - FLOOR TROUGH (3 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel floor trough, approximately 9" wide x 24" long, with heavy guage stainless steel grate & catch pan connecting to 3" diameter tailpipe, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 104 - WASHDOWN SYSTEM (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model MV-0771-12CW Chrome plated washdown station with thermometer, mixing valve with 3/4" NPT inlets, 50 ft hose with water gun & hose rack 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 22 of 26 50 ft hose with water gun & hose rack 1 ea Model 2970-45 Hose rack, 1/2" bar, complete kit Accessories: 1 ea Model B-0962 Vacuum Breaker, 3/4" Item No. 105 - BREWERY MOP SINK (1 REQ'D) By Others Model MOP SINK MOP SINK- By General Contractor Item No. 106 - SANTIZING SPRAYER (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model MV-0771-12CW Chrome plated washdown station with thermometer, mixing valve with 3/4" NPT inlets NOTE: This unit to ship without 4980-40, MV-2516-44 & 2970-45 rack 1 ea Model B-0962 Vacuum Breaker, 3/4" Accessories: Item No. 107 - FAUCET, SERVICE SINK (1 REQ'D) T & S Brass Model B-0667-POL Service Sink Faucet, 2 1/4" to 8 1/4" adjustable centers, 9 1/2" from back of inlets to center of outlet, brace adj. for mounting up to 2 1/2", polished chrome plated finish, integral stops, vacuum breaker nozzle, pail hook, 3/4" garden hose thread Item No. 108 - BEER SYSTEM (1 REQ'D) Carbonic Machines Inc. Model CUSTOM Beer dispensing equipment to include: (2) TTC 8 products beer towers, (1) 101-D134A cold pack, (2) glycol kits, (2) RMS 32 drain pans and all accessories to route and dispense beer from brew room to main floor bar. Item No. 109 - BEER ROOM STORAGE SHELVING (1 REQ'D) Metro Model METRO One (1) lot Metro "Super Adjustable Super Erecta" shelving, 5 tiers, 86" posts. Package to include: 5 ea Model A2448BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 48" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system Accessories: 4 ea Model 86P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 86-5/8" H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved at 1" increments and numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish Item No. 110 - BREWMASTER CABINET (1 REQ'D) (INCLUDED) LL&H Woodworks Model MILLWORK Custom plastic laminate cabinet, 24" wide x 24" deep x 84" high Brewmaster cabinet with adjustable shelves. Item No. 111 - FERMENTATION CHILLER CONDENSING UNIT (1 REQ'D) 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 23 of 26 Item No. 111 - FERMENTATION CHILLER CONDENSING UNIT (1 REQ'D) Custom Refrigeration Model CUSTOM BZT055M6C 208 3ph. R404A Bohn Scroll outdoor condensing unit, 55 Gal. Glycol. Price includes listed equipment, accessories, 5yr. compressor warranty, start/test, 1yr. service warranty. Item No. 112 - FERMENTATION CHILLING SYSTEM - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 112A - DRAIN PAN (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless drain pan, 30" wide x 60" long x 2" high, with 3/4" MP adapter for drain fitting Item No. 113 - FERMENTATION TANKS Qty (5) - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 114 - HOSE ACCESS DOOR (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom stainless steel hose access door, approximately 14" wide x 14" long with "L' shaped frames to fit within building wall thickness, per plan and approved shop drawing Item No. 115 - CO2 FILL STATION (1 REQ'D) By Owner Model CO2 STATION CO2 FILL STATION- By G.C.F.B Item No. 116 - BULK CO2 TANK - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 117 - TANKLESS WATER HEATERS (4 REQ'D) By Owner Model WATER HEATER TANKLESS WATER HEATER- By G.C.F.B. (For Brewery) Item No. 118 - Spare No. Item No. 119 - BREWERY PANEL (1 REQ'D) By Owner Model BREWERY PANEL BREWERY PANEL- By G.C.F.B Item No. 120 - LIQUOR STORAGE SHELVING (1 REQ'D) Metro Model METRO One (1) lot Metro "Super Adjustable Super Erecta" shelving, 5 tiers, 86" posts. Package to include: 10 ea Model A2148BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 21" W, 48" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system Accessories: 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 24 of 26 48" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 5 ea Model A2436BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 36" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 30 ea Model A2460BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 60" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 36 ea Model 86P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 86-5/8" H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved at 1" increments and numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish Item No. 121 - LINEN STORAGE RACK - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 122 - HOSE RACK - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 123 - MOP SINK PANEL (1 REQ'D) Lake State Industries Model CUSTOM Custom mop sink panel, 23 1/8" x 23 1/8" x 15" high Item No. 124 - MOP SINK - By General Contractor Item No. 125 - ICE MACHINE WITH BIN - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 126 - WATER FILTER - By General Contractor Item No. 127 - LOCKER (6 REQ'D) Kelmax Equipment Model EL6 Locker, six tier, single wide, (6) 12"W x 12"D x 12"H doors, beige powder coated paint finish, finger pull, 6" legs 2 ea Model /GANG3 Put 3 lockers together Accessories: Item No. 128 - EMPLOYEE BREAK COUNTER (1 REQ'D) LL&H Woodworks Model MILLWORK Custom plastic laminate counter, approximately 2'-0" deep x 7'-9" long, cantilever brackets, 4" high back & side splashes. Item No. 129 - EMPLOYEE CHAIR - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 130 - HVAC PANEL (1 REQ'D) By Others Model HVAC PANEL HVAC PANEL- By General Contractor Item No. 131-134 - Spare No.'s Item No. 135 - PATIO CHAIRS - By G.C.F.B. Item No. 136 - PATIO TABLES - By G.C.F.B. 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 25 of 26 Item No. 201 - BREWERY UTENSIL (Not Shown On Drawing) (1 REQ'D) Premier Restaurant Equipment Model Brewery utensil to include the following: 4 ea Cambro Model PWB22 Pail w/Bail, 22 qt. capacity, natural white, polyethylene, stain resistant, dishwasher safe, NSF Accessories: 4 ea Cambro Model RFSC12 Cover, for storage container, 12, 18 & 22 qt., natural white, polyethylene 5 ea Vollrath Company L.L.C. Model 59150 Pail, 16 qt. Utility, stainless, 11 7/8" top dia., 9 3/4" height, USA made, NSF 2 ea Vollrath Company L.L.C. Model 64406 Basting Spoon, one-piece heavy duty, solid, 18-8 stainless steel, patented handle w/turn down design, satin finish, 15-1/2" (50.8CM) length, Jacobs Pride limited warranty, NSF certified, Imported, Jacobs Pride Collection 2 ea Vollrath Company L.L.C. Model 95640 Measuring Cup, 64 oz., Stainless, 18 ga., 6 3/4" ht., USA made, NSF 1 ea Vollrath Company L.L.C. Model 47097 French Whip, 24" long, one-piece, aqua NYLON HANDLE, heat resistant up to 475° F (246° C), textured handle w/end knob, 18-8 type 304 stainless wires w/center reinforcement wire, NSF, Imported Item No. 202 - BREW COOLER SHELVING (NOT SHOWN ON DRAWING) (1 REQ'D) Metro Model Brew cooler shelving to include the following: 5 ea Model A2448BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 48" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system Accessories: 5 ea Model A2454BR Super Adjustable Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 24" W, 54" L, Brite (zinc-coated finish), corner release system 8 ea Model 86P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 86-5/8" H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved at 1" increments and numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish 1 ea Kelmax Equipment Model DRCGL48248 Dunnage Rack, 4" wide "E" channel, one tier, 24" wide, 48" long, 8" high, aluminum, gusset legs w/flange feet, min. capacity of 2500 lb., NSF 2/5/2008 Granite City Food & Brewery LTD. GRANCARM Granite City Food & Brewery-Carmel 2008 Premier Restaurant Equip. Co. Page 26 of 26 FILTER MASTER LIGHT 40X40 Use and maintenance instructions CAT. 1995-10 Marking TMCI Padovan spa via Dal Vera 13 - 31015 Conegliano (TV) tel. 0438-4147 fax 0438 23682 Type Serial N° Year of supply 21/21 00966002-0/062 2004 MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 1 CONTENTS CONTENTS ....................................................................................... 1 1. INSERTION OF FILTER SHEETS (Figure 1) ............................. 2 2. FILTER CLOSING (Figure 2) .................................................... 2 3. FILTRATION BEFORE STERILIZING FILTER WITH STERILIZING SHEETS (Figure 2) ............................................... 3-4 4. STARTING-UP PROCEDURE (Figure 2) ...................................... 5 5. FILTRATION WITH NEW FILTER SHEETS ................................... 6 6. FILTRATION WITH PUMP ......................................................... 6 7. WASHING OF FILTER EQUIPPED WITH CLARIFYING SHEETS .... 7 8. INTERRUPTION OF THE FILTER DURING OPERATION .............. 7 9. FILTER EMPTYING ................................................................... 7 10. CLEANING AND OPENING ..................................................... 8 - TABLE - APPROXIMATE OUTPUT OF THE FILTER REFERRED TO ONE FILTER SHEET ................................................................. 9 - TABLE : TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART ..................................... 10-11 - ASSEMBLY FILTER WITH PARTS LIST ......................................... 12 MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 2 1. INSERTION OF FILTER SHEETS (Ref. Figure 1) - Open the filter. - Make sure that the rubber gaskets have been fitted on the plates and on the end plates of the filter. - Make sure that the plates have been properly arranged as shown in figure 1. - Center the filter sheets by setting them on the slides and make sure that they are positioned at the same distance from the gaskets. Ł N.B. ! Between the end - heads and first and last plate, no sheet should be inserted. 2. FILTER CLOSING (Ref. Figure 2) - Turn special three spoked wheel (E) and tighten the plate and filter sheet package. Figure 2 Cod. 48083800 Cod.48083350 COD. 48083301 Cod.48083350 Cod.48083800 MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 3 3. FILTRATION BEFORE STERILIZING FILTER WITH STERILIZING SHEETS (Ref. Figure 2) This operation should be carefully carried out. Steam should pass through the whole filter, starting from the outlet to the inlet. Operate as follows : - Connect the pipe which conveys the steam to the outlet tap (A) (or to the special tap provided for the steam, if available). - Leave all the taps slightly open. - Feed saturated steam at 0.5 atm max pressure (temperature not higher than 110°C) for about 15÷20 minutes. - Correct sterilization in achieved in about 15 minutes (or longer if the filter was already wet) from the moment the filter has warmed up. All connecting pipes, the filling-machine, etc.. should be sterilized during filter sterilization. Ł WARNING ! During the sterilization, the diaphragm taps should be gently closed. If they are closed too tightly, you will risk rupture of the diaphragms, due to the strong thermal stress. The same system should be adopted for the plate gaskets, and it will be sufficient to tighten the plates package just enough to guarantee their sealing. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 4 - Disconnect steam pipe. - Slightly open air vent at inlet (C) to reduce pressure to 0. - Connect water pipe to inlet tap (D) and let water flow into the filter. It will gradually replace the steam in the filter. - Open both air vents (C) and close them when a regular jet of water flows out. - Open outlet tap (A) and let water flow through the filter until it flows out without any taste and until the filter has been cooled down. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 5 4. STARTING-UP PROCEDURE (Ref. Figure 2) - If there is water in the filter, drain it. Ł N.B. - Before starting the filtration vent the filter with outlet tap (A) closed. In this way the liquid rises gently within the filter and the formation of air pockets in the filter itself is avoided. Open it again when the filter has been filled. - To obtain a correct output when using new filter sheets, the pressure should not exceed 0.5 atm at beginning of filtration. During the filtration the max pressure allowed inside the filter is 1.5-1.8 atm for the sterilizing sheets, and 3 atm for the clarifying sheets. - If, when arrived at maximum pressure, the output is not satisfactory, it will be necessary to replace the filter sheets or to clean them. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 6 5. FILTRATION WITH NEW FILTER SHEETS IMPORTANT When the filter has been equipped with new filter sheets, and the sterilization or the filling of the filter with water has been carried out, tighten again the filter sheets unit before starting filtration in order to avoid any possible leakage due to the pressure increase. It would be moreover advisable, at beginning of filtration, to let the first filtered liquid recycle through the filter (or the water with which the filter has been filled) in order to get rid of the fibres migrating from the new filter sheets. 6. FILTRATION WITH PUMP - Make sure that there is no air in the pipeline: to do this first of all fill the filter feeding line with liquid to be filtered, which comes from the storage tank. Then connect it immediately to the inlet (D). - When starting filtration with an empty filter, all the air valves should be kept open until the liquid flows regularly. - The adjustment of the output should be made with the tap (D) adjusted according to specifications indicated on sheet output table. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 7 7. WASHING OF FILTER EQUIPPED WITH CLARIFYING SHEETS - Let water flow from inlet to outlet through the filter, observing certain precaution. - Connect water pipe to inlet (D) to allow water to replace air in the filter. - Open air valves (C) and close them when water flows out regularly. - Open outlet tap (A). Let water flow continuously until it comes out clear and tasteless. 8. INTERRUPTION OF THE FILTER DURING OPERATION - It is more advisable to carry out a continuous filtration. Stopping should be always avoided if possible. - If the filter should be stopped, leave it filled with liquid. 9. FILTER EMPTYING - Open all the taps to allow complete discharge of liquid. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 8 10. CLEANING AND OPENING - Cleaning should be carried out immediately after filtration. - Open the filter. Remove the filter sheets. Wash the filter plates with the aid of a soft brusch. Never use wire brushes or scrapers. - If the filter has remained with its filter sheets for a long time the filter plates should be plunged into boiling water and after they should be carefully washed before carryng out a new filtration. - Dismantle and wash gaskets with hot water. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 9 APPROXIMATE OUTPUT OF THE MASTER LIGHT FILTER Table (Referred to one filter sheet) LIQUID Output of 1 sheet Filter sheet TO BE FILTERED (approx.) suggested WINE: - sterilizing filtration 50 l/h (do not exceed this K10 - Steril output with Steril sheets) - polishing filtration 80-90 l/h K7 or BM high output - clarifying filtration 100-120 l/h K5 Cognac, Whisky, Rum 50-60 l/h K7 Grappa 40-60 l/h K7 or KD7 high output Liqueurs 25-30 l/h K7 Vinegar: - clarification 60 l/h KD3 or KD5 - filtration for bottling 40 l/h KD7 Limpid fruit juices (polishing) 25-45 l/h K10 or KD7 high output Syrup, hot fruit juices 30-35 l/h K7 or BM high output Syrup, cold fruit juices 18-20 l/h K5 Sugars syrups up to 50-55 Bx (for higher densities we advice the use of cloths) 60-70 l/h 0-400 Syrups (straining) 200-220 l/h P A P E R N.B. - Above outputs are approximate only, in as much as they can variate according to the pype and quantits of impurities contained in the liquid to be filtered and in relation with the processes to which the liquid has been previously submitted (cold processing, fermentation, etc..). The total output of a set of filter sheets corresponds to the output obtained during the first working hour multipled by 3-5. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 10 TABLE - TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART D E F E C T EXCESSIVE DRIPPING FROM THE PLATE PACKAGE. THE FILTERED LIQUID IS TURBID, WITH FIBRES OR PARTICLES IN SUSPENSION. POSSIBLE CAUSE - Plate package not sufficient tightened. - Gaskets broken or badly installed. - Broken plates. - Excessive output. - Presence of air in the filter. - Broken filter sheets. SUGGESTED REMEDY - Tighten plate package. - Open filter, check gaskets and replace broken ones. - Open filter and check condition of plates, replace if broken. - Reduce the output according to specifications as per output table. - Let air escape from valves until the liquid flows out regularly. - Open filter and check if some filter sheet is broken; replace if necessary. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 11 D E F E C T THE FILTERED LIQUID IS TURBID, WITH FIBRES OR PARTICLES IN SUSPENSION. RAPID PRESSURE INCREASES. POSSIBLE CAUSE - Badly installed filter sheets. - Dirty plates and gaskets. - Excessive output. - Liquid too clogging. - Sheets not suitable for the type of liquid to be filtered. SUGGESTED REMEDY - Open filter and check the correct assembly of filter sheets as per figure 1. - Open filter, check plates and gaskets, wash them with hot water and a soft brush. - Reduce output according to specifications as per output table. - Extract first from the tank the clearer part of the liquid to be filtered. - Consult output table and try a different type of sheet. MASTER LIGHT 40x40 filter - CAT. 1995-10 - Page 12 MASTER LIGHT 40 - LIST OF COMPONENTS REF. DWG. No. 024-020-A (Filter assembly) POS. CODE DESCRIPTION Q.ty 1 Mobile end plate 1 2 Fixed end plate 1 3 Locking device 1 4 Drip tray 1 5 Locking screw 1 6 Screw volute 1 7 Equalizer crosspiece upright 1 8 Wheel D. 150x50 2 9 Revolving support D. 100x30 2 10 Pair of side members 1 11 Pair of end plates 1 12 Filtering plate * 13 Pair of carton pins 1 14 Product outlet manifold 1 15 46510400 Pressure gauge D.63, scale 0÷4 bar 1 16 41655650 Sampling valve D.20 3 17 Side member fastening nut 4 18 Screw fastening pawl 1 19 48078150 Sight glass gasket DN 25 2 20 46600500 Glass cylinder 1 21 Plate gaskets * 22 Butterfly valve DN 32 2 23 Pressure gauge manifold-breather product inlet 1 9 5/8" 8" 8 15/16" 25 1/2" 8" 23 24 17 38 TOP VIEW 3 RIGHT VIEW FEED / MAKE-UP LINE 63 39 17 28 23 40 22 60 66 1 Copper 70-1024 Tube Type L 1 1/2" FT. 6.00 65 1 Copper 70-1025 Tube Type L 1 1/4" FT. 1.00 64 1 Copper 70-1023 Tube Type L 3/4" FT. 2.50 63 1 Copper 70-1016 Tube Type L 1/2" FT. 1.50 62 1 Brass 60-0555 Nipple NPT 3/4" x 6" LG. EA. 1.00 61 2 Brass 60-5091 Nipple Closed NPT 3/4" EA. 2.00 60 5 Brass 60-5090 Nipple Closed NPT 1/2" EA. 5.00 59 10 Brass 60-5092 Nipple Closed NPT 1 1/2" EA. 10.00 58 2 SS 60-5707 Boiler Gauge 1/4" (420134) EA. 2.00 57 1 Copper 60-5075 Elbow 90 0.75 Inch Close Ruff Cu EA. 1.00 55 1 Brass 60-5706 PRESSURE RELIEF 30PSI 3/4" NPT EA. 1.00 54 1 Brass 30-0187 HOSE BIB 3/4" NPT EA. 1.00 51 1 Brass 60-5087 TEE FIP 3/4" EA. 1.00 46 2 Copper 60-0397 ADAPTER 1/4" FIP X 1/4" TUBE CU EA. 2.00 45 2 Copper 60-0983 ADAPTER 3/4" FIP X 3/4" TUBE CU EA. 2.00 44 1 Copper 60-0387 ADAPTER 1" FIP X 1" TUBE CU EA. 1.00 43 1 Brass 30-0072 VALVE BALL 1 1/2" TUBE CU EA. 1.00 42 1 Brass 30-0071 BALL VALVE 1 1/4" TUBE EA. 1.00 41 4 Copper 60-5077 Elbow 90 1.5 Inch Close Ruff Cu EA. 4.00 40 1 Copper 60-5057 Tee 1.5 Inch x 1.0 Inch Cu EA. 1.00 39 1 Copper 60-5080 Tee 1.5 Inch x 0.75 Inch Cu EA. 1.00 38 2 Copper 60-5059 Tee 1.5 Inch x 0.25 Inch Cu EA. 2.00 37 2 Copper 60-5081 Tee 1.5 Inch x 1.25 Inch Cu EA. 2.00 35 1 Brass 30-0842 PRESSURE REGULATOR 1/2" NPT EA. 1.00 34 1 AISI 304 30-0792 EXPANSION TANK EA. 1.00 33 1 Brass 30-0037 BALL VALVE 1/2" NPT EA. 1.00 31 1 Brass 30-0867 CHECK VALVE 1/2" TUBE EA. 1.00 30 2 Brass 30-0003 BALL VALVE 1/2" BRAZED EA. 2.00 29 4 Copper 60-5043 Elbow 90 0.5 Inch Close Ruff Cu EA. 4.00 28 3 Copper 60-5078 Tee 0.5 Inch Cu EA. 3.00 18 6 Copper 60-0985 ADAPTER 1 1/2" FPT X 1 1/2" TUBE EA. 6.00 17 5 Copper 60-5055 ADAPTER 1/2" FIP X 1/2" TUBE CU EA. 5.00 16 1 Brass 60-5697 AIR SEPARATOR 1-1/4" NPT EA. 1.00 15 1 REF.CAT. 30-0791 PUMP H-64 C/W 3/4 HP MOTOR EA. 1.00 14 1 Brass 30-0328 BALL VALVE 1-1/2" NPT EA. 1.00 13 1 Brass 60-0325 ELBOW STREET 45° X 1 1/2" NPT EA. 1.00 12 2 BRASS 60-5089 UNION PIPE 1 1/2" EA. 2.00 11 2 GALV. 60-5786 BUSHING 2 1/2" X 1 1/2" EA. 2.00 10 4 AISI 316SS 60-0026 BOLT HEX 3/8-UNC X 3/4" LG. EA. 4.00 9 4 AISI 316 60-0131 WASHER FLAT 3/8" EA. 4.00 8 4 AISI 316 60-0088 NUT HEX 3/8"-UNC EA. 4.00 7 4 AISI 304 70-0044 FB 3/16" X 1 1/2" X 3" LG. FT. 1.00 LOCATION: Ship Date: ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO. DWG. NO. BOX NO. STATUS 1 1 Hot water system 25-0186 163B skid 2 1 Chilled water system 21-0005 1135D skid 3 5 12 BBL Unitank fermenters 22-0001 1314D vessels 4 1 Dual stainless 10 port gas line 26-0140 1110A bundle 5 5 Recoil hose, Greenline # G1710-025MM10 60-2230 1110A 6 5 Recoil hose, Greenline # G1712-025M44M10 60-2231 1110A 7 1 Fermentation control panel (Temp. controllers and RTD's) 90-0300 skid 8 5 Burkert solenoid valves (send to Custom Refrigeration) 30-0149 n/a n/a 9 2 3-way ball valve 1-1/2" NPT, brass c/w electric actuator, 115VAC 60-5708 n/a 10 1 Power panel (3 receptacles; 3-phase, 220V 1-phase, 110V utility) 90-0300 skid 11 1 Load cell enclosure 90-0300 12 8 12 BBL Maturation and serving vessels 23-0002 1315D vessels 13 1 5 BBL Stacked serving vessel 23-0003 1318D vessels 14 10 Calibration strips for serving tanks 60-0858 n/a on tanks 15 10 Carbonation stone, 8"x3/4" c/w 1.5"TC ferrule 26-0002 537A 16 10 Stand pipes for serving vessels 40-0057 n/a 17 27 Adjustable foot pads for serving vessels, 1/2" UNC 60-2206 n/a 18 15 Adjustable foot pads for unitanks, 1" UNC 60-0847 n/a 19 5 Pressure gauge assembly for unitanks 26-0003 n/a on tanks 20 1 CIP/beer transfer pump Thomsen #4, 1.5 hp washdown with VFD 40-1079 102B cart 21 1 Dual chemical dispenser, 1/2" HB x 1-1/2" SMS 25-0254 1197A 22 10 Tank tap fittings (1.5" SMS cap with spigot) 60-0340 n/a 23 2 1.5" SMS thread to nut inline gas diffuser c/w 1/4" ball valve & QC 40-0103 24 3 Hose reels 40-0111 on skid 25 0 Punch Clamp Tool (Greenline punch clamp tool, #P-1) 80-0469 n/a 26 0 Stainless steel punch clamps, 1-3/4" ID (Greenline # PC-7S) 60-0834 n/a 27 1 Stainless steel punch clamps, 2-1/2" ID (Greenline # PC-10S) 60-0837 n/a 28 0 Brewers hose 1" ID x 100 ft. (Greenline #G1074-100) 60-0747 n/a coil 29 13 Brewers hose end fittings, 1.5" SMS Plain - 1" hose barb 40-0106 n/a 30 1 Brewers hose end fittings, 1.5" SMS Plain - 1.5" hose barb 40-0107 n/a 31 3 Brewers hose interconnectors, 1.5" SMS thread - thread 4" lg. 40-0124 n/a 32 25 1.5" SMS nuts 60-0316 n/a 33 25 1.5" SMS gaskets 60-0321 n/a 34 5 1.5" TC gaskets 60-0547 n/a 35 2 1.5" SMS wrench 50-4024 n/a 36 1 Clean-UP brush package 26-0156 n/a 37 1 Hydrometer flask stainless steel 40-0021 136A 38 1 Hydrometer rack stainless steel 40-0104 965A 39 2 Hydrometer, S.G. scale 1.0 - 1.06 60-1196 n/a 40 1 Hydrometer, S.G. scale 1.05 - 1.10 60-1195 n/a 41 1 Thermometer, 0 - 230 F , Enviro-Safe #30530 60-2232 n/a 42 1 Thermometer Armor casing 60-2233 n/a 43 0 Sugar refractometer 60-1203 n/a 44 1 T&S - 3/4" NPT to 1.5" SMS adapter 40-0110 962A 45 1 Yeast dump extension tube 40-0105 962A 46 1 Sheet filter Model #21/21, 21 40 x 40 plates, 5 micron, SMS fittings 30-0849 n/a crate GRANITE CITY STANDARD EQUIPMENT LIST Newlands Systems Inc. 602-30731 Simpson Rd. Abbotsford, BC Canada V2T 6Y7 Ph: 604-855-4890 Fx: 604-855-8826 6 4 MS 60-0160 NUT HEX 1/2-UNC EA. 4.00 5 4 PLASTIC 60-2206 FOOT ADJ PLSTC 1/2 NC VG-511-02S12-L3 EA. 4.00 4 1 REF.CAT. 30-0789 MICROFLAME BOILER M#MFNH-400E EA. 1.00 3 1 AISI 304 70-0007 ANGLE SUPPORT 3/16" X 1 1/2" X 36" LG. FT. 3.00 2 1 AISI 304 70-0007 ANGLE SUPPORT 1 1/2" X 3/16" X 34 1/2" LG. FT. 2.90 1 1 AISI 304 REF. DET. FRAME HOT WATER SKID EA. 1.00 ITEM# QTY. MAT. PART# DESCRIPTION UM T.QTY. 5 1/2" 21 3/4" 3 1/2" 25" 6" 4 1/2" 9" 1" 2 5/8" 40 45 42 38 18 2 RIGHT VIEW HOT WATER SUPPLY LINE 1.5" NPT FITTINGS TOP VIEW 18 39 46 66 23" 4" 5" 5" 5" 5 1/2" 4" 45° 63 63 64 15 59 57 46 71 70 68 11 12 14 40 13 6 16 4 8 1 10 5 9 7 3 21 39 18 18 37 41 42 43 11 12 18 39 17 45 24 44 21 46 40 23 33 37 46 38 17 22 18 59 1 A 5 4 2 1 D C B A B C D 8 7 6 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 3 HEREIN IS PROPERTY OF TEL.: (604)-855-4890 FAX: (604)-855-8826 ABBOTSFORD,B.C. CANADA SYSTEMS INC. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED SIZE B DWG. NO. BY DATE REV. MATERIAL (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) FINISH INCHES NAME MM/DD/YY APPROVALS DATE NEWLANDS SYSTEMS INC. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES ARE: 1/16 FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES 1/2 .005 .XX .01 .XXX DESIGNED DRAWN CHECKED REVISIONS NEWLANDS SYSTEMS INC. AND WGT: PERMISSION OF WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PARTY, OR USED IN ANY WAY UNITS MATCH EXISTING PIPING AISI 304 S.S. COMMUNICATED TO THIRD TITLE: CLIENT: IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, WORK ORDER D-01 D-00 JSM 09/30/05 JSM 10/03/05 163B D-02 JSM 01/04/06 KHB 01/05/06 JSM 09/30/05 BOILER PLUMBING SCALE:1:16 SHEET 1 OF 1 GRANITECITY STANDARD 55 54 57 46 64 62 PRESSURE RELIEF ISO-METRIC VIEW SCALE 1:8 61 25 11/16" 12 14 15 16 18 17 FRONT VIEW 44 43 40 13 11 62 2 3/4" 32 9/16" 15 3/8" 11 1/4" 61 13/16" 5 7/16" 66 66 66 46 58 TOP VIEW HOT WATER SUPPLY LINE 42 U-CLAMP 41 44 43 38 2 41 INSTALL U-CLAMP 3 65 65 INSTALL 58 DETAIL ITEM#1 21 5/8" 5 1/2" 15 1/8" 3 1/2" REF 9 5/8" 6 5 1 3 2 17 18 22 9 4 8 41 7 10 64 52 1/2" 26 1/8" 40" ref. 16 18 13 ITEM#2 15 ITEM#3 11 12 14 59 6" 4" 25" ITEM NO. QTY. PART# DESCRIPTION UM TOTAL 1 2 70-1018 SQ. TUBE 1/8 X 3 X 30 LG. FT. 5 2 2 70-1018 SQ. TUBE 1/8 X 3 X 52-1/2" LG. FT. 8.75 3 1 70-1018 SQ. TUBE 1/8 X 3 X 24 LG. FT. 2 4 4 70-0048 FLAT BAR 3/16 X 2 1/2 X 2 1/2 LG. FT. 1 5 4 60-0160 NUT 1/2" UNC EA. 4 6 2 70-0145 TUBE SQ. 1/8 X 1-1/2" X 9-1/8" LG. FT. 1.52 7 1 70-0145 TUBE SQ. 1/8 X 1-1/2 X 13-1/2" LG. FT. 1.125 8 1 70-0007 ANGLE 3/16" X 1 1/2" X 24 1/2" LG. FT. 2.1 SCALE 1 : 6 1/8" DETAIL E 5 4 TYP 3/16" USE 309 TYP. RIGHT VIEW ISO-METRIC VIEW 63 TOP VIEW FEED / MAKE-UP LINE NPT 1/2" 60 23 1/16" 6 1/4" 45° 1 3 2 8 7 6 REF.DET.E REF. 26 3/4" 13" 19 3/4" REF. - Rock Core Spoon Sampler OD Hammer Drop Date Started lbs. Boring Method ft. ft. ft. SS Depth HSA Granite City Food and Brewery Dunham Company Remarks - Continuous Flight Auger PP-tsf Hammer Wt. 30 Driller S. Gray Rig Type B-59 ATV Moisture Content % *Dry Unit Weight (pcf) Indianapolis, Indiana - Continuous Flight Augers - Hollow Stem Augers 08IN0099 CLIENT 2 - Driven Split Spoon 2/29/08 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Page 1 of 1 MD DC CFA HSA 2/29/08 B-2 Depth TEST DATA 5 10 15 Alt & Witzig File No. BORING # PROJECT LOCATION PROJECT NAME Sample Type After At Completion in. 9.0 hours - Driving Casing SOIL CLASSIFICATION - Continuous Tube DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION ELEV. STRATA in. - Mud Drilling - Cuttings - Rock Core Spoon Sampler OD Hammer Drop Date Started lbs. Boring Method ft. ft. ft. SS Depth Depth 2/29/08 Dunham Company Remarks - Continuous Flight Auger PP-tsf Hammer Wt. 30 Driller S. Gray Rig Type B-59 ATV Moisture Content % *Dry Unit Weight (pcf) Indianapolis, Indiana - Continuous Flight Augers - Hollow Stem Augers 08IN0099 CLIENT 2 - Driven Split Spoon 2/29/08 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Page 1 of 1 MD DC CFA HSA Granite City Food and Brewery B-1 TEST DATA HSA PROJECT NAME Sample Type PROJECT LOCATION BORING # Alt & Witzig File No. 5 10 15 After At Completion in. hours - Driving Casing SOIL CLASSIFICATION - Continuous Tube DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION ELEV. STRATA in. 11.0 choose to petition, and the before-mentioned procedures are followed, your petition for review will be granted, and an administrative proceeding will be conducted by an administrative law judge of the Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission. If a petition for review is not filed, this Order will be final, and you must comply with its requirements. Indiana Department of Homeland Security DIVISION OF FIRE & BUILDING SAFETY PLAN REVIEW DIVISION 402 W. Washington St., Room E245 Indianapolis, IN 46204 Fax & e-mail: SUPPORT HOOSIER SAFETY Available At Your Local Licence Branch In accordance with Section 19 of the General Administrative Rules (675 IAC 12-6-19) a complete set of plans and specifications that conform exactly to the design that was released by the office of the state building commissioner shall be maintained on the construction jobsite as well as a copy of the design release. 3202532269, steve@staniusjohnson.com 1488 Bond Street Ste. 100 Naperville, IL 60563 Telephone: (630) 357-0540 Fax: (630) 357-0164 Web Site: www.larsonengr.com Contact: Tim Ruffalo